Today’s News 12th August 2016

  • Hillary Clinton's War Policy: "Turmoil, Chaos, & Catastrophe Lie Ahead"

    Submitted by Brian Cloughley via Strategic-Culture.org,

    As a result of Trump’s stumbling, Hillary Clinton seems to be on course to become next president of the United States and it is depressing to reflect on what some of her policies might be if she achieves that office. Unfortunately, the future looks bleak for peace and stability around the world.

    She is one of the Washington-Brussels war-drum beaters who planned the 2011 aerial blitz on Libya to destroy the government of President Gaddafi, in whose murder she rejoiced, giggling that «We came; We saw; He died». The US-NATO devastation of Libya caused massive deprivation and suffering, opened the way for feuding bands of militants to fight each other for control of parts of the country, and created a haven for the lunatic extremists of Islamic State.

    Immediately after Gaddafi was brutally put to death, Clinton went to Libya and declared that she was «proud to stand here on the soil of a free Tripoli and on behalf of the American people I congratulate Libya. This is Libya’s moment, this is Libya’s victory, the future belongs to you». Her sentiments were echoed by the NATO Secretary General of the time, Anders Fogh Rasmussen, who expressed pride that the seven months of rocket, bomb and missile attacks on a defenceless country had been «one of the most successful [operations] in NATO’s history». Not only that, but «Libyans have now liberated their country. And they have transformed the region. This is their victory». Both of them were talking nonsense, but have never given the slightest indication that they regretted for a moment their energetic role in creating the Libyan catastrophe.

    Clinton attempted to justify the military assault on Libya by reflecting on the military presence of the United States around the world. She expressed satisfaction that the US maintains massive military bases in so many countries as a result of former conflicts and arrogantly declared «You know, the United States was in Korea, and still is, for many years. We are still in Germany. We are still in Japan. We have a presence in a lot of places in the world that started out as a result of conflict. And if you think about South Korea, there were coups, there were assassinations, there was a lot of problems for the Koreans to build their economy, to create their democracy. This doesn’t happen overnight. And, yes, it’s been a couple of years. I think it’s worth European support, Arab support, American support to try to help the Libyan people realize the dream that they had when they went after Gadhafi».

    It is apparent that Clinton will be uncompromising about continuing Obama’s policy of international confrontation, and that she, too, firmly believes «that America remains the indispensable nation». It is open to doubt, however, that the self-imposed mantle of indispensability has done anything to further peace and stability around the globe.

    The armed forces and intelligence agencies of the indispensable nation have carried out thousands of airstrikes all over the world over many years. From Pakistan in the east to Libya on the Mediterranean, by way of Afghanistan, Iraq, Yemen, Somalia and Syria there have been attacks by F-15 Strike Eagles, B-52 bombers, helicopter gunships, the A-10 Warthog, the even more terrifying Hercules AC-130 Spectre gunship (one of which destroyed a hospital in Kunduz, Afghanistan, last year), Tomahawk cruise missiles, and drones equipped with Hellfire missiles. The amount of explosives delivered cannot be calculated, but as one indicator of quantities, in the two years of attacks on various groups in Syria and Iraq, «coalition» aircraft have delivered about 50,000 bombs and missiles.

    US attacks have included many drone strikes in Yemen where, as reported by the US Military Times, «in March 2015, the US evacuated about 125 special operations troops amid the expanding civil war» but «has launched nine strikes this year against al-Qaida, which the US says is a persistent threat in the region and to Western interests». Other sources record rather higher numbers of covert strikes in 2016 – twenty confirmed and many others suspected – but that is irrelevant in the context of legality and effect.

    On July 1 the White House released a statement about its worldwide drone war, and the Washington Post noted its admission that «the United States has inadvertently killed between 64 and 116 civilians in drone and other lethal air attacks against terrorism suspects in non-war zones», and commented that «in releasing only aggregate figures that did not include when or where the strikes occurred, the administration shielded those claims from meaningful public scrutiny, even as it sought to bolster its own assertions about the accuracy and effectiveness of the operations».

    Even the Post could not praise the drone war, and recorded that «The New America Foundation and the Long War Journal, which have tracked drone strikes since the George W Bush administration, each put the number of civilians killed under the current administration at just over 200».

    Nobody in the West cares about Yemen and the horrors inflicted on its population by the Saudis and their backer in Washington, and it seems nobody cares, either, about the new US onslaught on Libya, also in the name of Freedom.

    President Obama rejoiced that his aerial blitzes around the globe are increasing and in June declared that «over the past two months I’ve authorized a series of steps to ratchet up our fight against ISIL [Islamic State]: additional US personnel, including Special Forces, in Syria to assist local forces battling ISIL there; additional advisors to work more closely with Iraqi security forces, and additional assets, including attack helicopters; and additional support for local forces in northern Iraq. Our aircraft continue to launch from the USS Harry Truman, now in the Mediterranean. Our B-52 bombers are hitting ISIL with precision strikes. Targets are being identified and hit even more quickly – so far, 13,000 airstrikes. This campaign at this stage is firing on all cylinders». And that was before he attacked Libya, yet again.

    President Obama fired on a few more cylinders when, as reported on August 4 by the US military journal Stars and Stripes, «American warplanes attacked Islamic State group fighters in northern Libya on Wednesday, marking a third consecutive day of US airstrikes in the war-torn nation». It can be expected that the campaign will continue for the last remaining months of Obama’s war-promoting presidency – and that his likely successor will pay as little regard as he has to international and domestic laws concerning such gung-ho forays.

    Hillary Clinton has not criticised or even questioned Obama’s years of aerial bombardment around the world and her foreign policy adviser, Jeremy Bash, told London’s Daily Telegraph that she will order a «full review» of US strategy on Syria as a «first key task» of her presidency, resetting the policy to emphasise the  «murderous» nature of the Assad regime. He said that Mrs Clinton would work to get Bashar al-Assad, the Syrian president, «out of there».

    President Assad has been selected as another target for the Clinton policy of «We came; We saw; He died» and his country appears doomed to a rerun of the Libya fiasco.

    If Hillary Clinton becomes president of the United States, there will be an even greater emphasis on global airstrikes and confrontation in general. Turmoil, chaos and catastrophe lie ahead.

  • Generation Screwed Fights Back: Investment Implications

     

     


    Generation Screwed Fights Back: Investment Implications 

    Written by Peter Diekmeyer (CLICK HERE FOR ORIGINAL)


     

    Numerous data points suggest that Western youth are increasingly disenfranchised, mal-educated and in debt. How that will affect investment outlooks is unclear. The good news is that some Millennials – in Canada of all places – are starting to fight back.

     

    So says Aaron Gunn, executive director of Generation Screwed, a movement sponsored by the Canadian Taxpayer Federation.  The group will be conducting its annual retreat of volunteer student coordinators later this month in Quebec City.

     

    There they will upgrade their strategic planning, team building, and activism skills, which they can bring back to campuses across the country to raise awareness of critical issues, such as government debts, unfunded liabilities, and unfavorable demographics facing today’s young.

     

    “We call ourselves “Generation Screwed” because governments are spending money but leaving the bills behind for the young to pay,” says Gunn. “Apathy is our biggest challenge. Many youth are so burdened with the demands of getting a start in life, they are unaware of the lousy hand they are being dealt.”

     

    The key driver of Generation Screwed’s popularity is the country’s rising national debt, which according to the organization’s debt clock, now exceeds $600 billion. And that doesn’t include provincial and municipal obligations. Worse, according to Gunn, the federal government’s 2016 budget projects $99 billion in new borrowing during the coming four years.

     

    Less sex, but “screwed” in so many ways


    “Generation Screwed” seems like an odd name for a generation which, according to a recent Washington Post article, is having less sex than previous generations. That said, the movement Gunn leads is particularly timely because Millennials are – to the use the CTF’s term – being “screwed” in so many ways.

     

    The average U.S. student debt is now USD $27,000 – $1.2 trillion overall, according to the Economist Magazine.

     

    Worse, due to the power of academic interest groups, teachers’ unions, and the politically correctness movements, students’ education is increasingly disconnected from reality and poorly adapted to the job market. Most students learn essentially nothing about money management, for example: one of the most important life skills.

     

    Upon graduation, students enter what Donald Trump calls a “rigged” economy, where older workers are entitled to union, government, academic, and other jobs with benefits that are protected by a slew of credentialism strategies. The young get stuck with unpaid internships, work part-time, or do contract work.

     

    Given their poor financial, employment and educational circumstances, not surprisingly, more than half of 18-34 year olds live with their parents, according to Pew Research.

     

    Three quarters of declining productivity: a “new normal,” secular stagnation … or decline?


    Lack of new blood in many protected sectors, ranging from governments, “too big to fail” banks, and the automotive industry, will almost certainly hit productivity. In fact, that may be happening already. Recent U.S. GDP data show that productivity fell for a third straight quarter in Q2, a first in more than three decades.

     

    Bill Gross, a portfolio manager at Janus, has described today’s economy of rising trade barriers, household deleveraging and increased government regulations as a “new normal.” Larry Summers, a former U.S. Treasury Secretary and others suggest the US economy is in a period of “secular stagnation.”

     

    For long-term planners who worry about funding pension plans, managing government debt (nobody talks about paying it back anymore) or building careers, the stakes are high. That’s because things are likely far worse than even Gross and Summers, both of whom are restricted in what they can say due to the institutions they represent, will admit.

     

    According to a range of researchers – including Laurence Kotlikoff, John Williams of Shadow Statistics, and the Fraser Institute, – the United States and Canadian governments regularly use massaged data and off balance sheet liabilities, to paint a brighter picture than actually exists.

     

    No sympathy from governments


    Gunn and Generation Screwed remain undeterred. This despite the long odds, and tough opponents – particularly seniors’ groups lined up against them (in the United States, the powerful American Association of Retired People lobby group, for example, will stop at nothing to protect members’ existing entitlements – the country’s youth are an afterthought).

     

    Nor are Millennials likely to get much sympathy from governments, which increasingly resemble hospital geriatrics wards. The average age of a U.S. Congressman is 61. That of a Canadian Senator is 65. The average age of a U.S. Supreme Court Justice will be 75 by the end of the current U.S. Presidential cycle.

     

    “I know the odds are long,” says Gunn. “But changing mentalities is a slow process. We just keep focused on doing it one person at a time.”

     

     

     

    Please email with any questions about this article or precious metals HERE

     

     


     

    Generation Screwed Fights Back: Investment Implications 

    Written by Peter Diekmeyer (CLICK HERE FOR ORIGINAL)

  • Pentagon Refuses To Disclose How Many U.S. Troops Are Fighting ISIS

    Submitted by Mike Krieger via Liberty Blitzkrieg blog,

    The United States will deploy dozens of special operations forces to northern Syria to advise opposition forces in their fight against Islamic State, a major policy shift for President Barack Obama and a step he has long resisted to avoid getting dragged into another war in the Middle East.

     

    Given this new “strategy,” if we can even call it that, I thought it’d be useful to share with readers the 16 times Obama has publicly promised over the last couple of years to not send ground forces into Syria.

     

    From last year’s post: Obama Announces “Boots on the Ground” in Syria, Despite Promising “No Boots on the Ground” 16 Times

    With American media once again singularly obsessed with the latest thing Donald Trump said, you might be surprised to find out that actual news is occurring.

    What I’m referring to specifically is the latest incident of transparency-flouting from the self-proclaimed “most transparent administration” ever. Namely, the U.S. military’s refusal to disclose how many American soldiers are engaged in combat against ISIS.

    The Hill reports:

    The Pentagon has declined to say how many U.S. troops are actually on the ground in Iraq and Syria more than two years after the first deployments to fight the Islamic State.

     

    The military only shares the number of full-time troops deployed, known as the “force management level” or FML.

     

    That figure is currently about 3,825 in Iraq and 300 in Syria, but the number of troops on the ground, including temporary deployments, is much higher.

     

    There are an additional 800 to 900 U.S. troops and defense personnel temporarily deployed to Iraq, a figure that a defense official says “tends to run around.”

     

    It’s unclear how many temporary troops are in Syria.

     

    A Central Command spokesman acknowledged to The Hill that some troops that temporarily deploy aren’t counted. In some cases, that’s included senior officials on “personnel visits.” 

    So kinda like the unemployment rate?

    Some worry that officials are hiding the deepening U.S. involvement in the fight against the Islamic State in Iraq and Syria.

    You don’t say.

    The pressure for the Pentagon to release the actual troop numbers comes as the administration faces questions from both parties about the strategy to fight ISIS and with no signs Congress is close to a deal on a war authorization.

    Who needs Congress when you can just do whatever the fuck you want.

    The issue has been simmering for months. Defense officials have rejected repeated requests from reporters for the actual numbers.

     

    “There’s been a decision made not to release that number,” Army Col. Steve Warren, a spokesman, told reporters on March 21. “The number that we release is our force management level… I don’t have a reason for not releasing this number other than it’s the orders that I’m under.”

     

    On Wednesday, a defense official again said the actual number won’t be made public, a decision from the office of the Defense Secretary and Centcom.

     

    A spokesman for the Joint Chiefs said the number of troops deployed on a temporary basis can change widely day-to-day, and it would be too difficult to explain the numbers to the public. 

    Well that’s a new one. The American public is too stupid to understand!

    The current force management level is 3,825 in Iraq and 300 in Syria, There are 800 additional troops and personnel temporarily deployed to Iraq and another 100 U.S. troops at the Office of Security Cooperation in Baghdad, which technically falls under the State Department and is not counted.

     

    And there are more troops on the way: The administration is deploying about 400 more troops to Iraq soon. The Pentagon room also has room to deploy an additional 422 troops at any time under caps set by President Obama.

     

    Those deployments would bring the total number of troops in Iraq and Syria to 5,847 — well above the Pentagon’s publicly released force management level.

     

    But even that number doesn’t include troops involved in the ISIS fight stationed elsewhere in the Middle East, outside of Iraq and Syria.

     

    Centcom told The Hill on May 4 that there were 700 additional U.S. troops fighting ISIS in the region. But weeks later, Col. Warren publicly said the number was actually “several thousand others throughout the region and 1000s more back home.”

     

    That also doesn’t include 1,605 American defense contractors in Iraq and an unknown number in Syria.

    Call me a conspiracy theorist, but it sure sounds like they’re trying to hide something.

    For now, there is no sign officials will be more forthcoming.

    If you like your transparency, you can keep your transparency.

  • Justice Department Prevented FBI Probe Of Clinton Foundation; Reporters Slam State Department Stonewalling

    For an increasingly vocal group in this country – that sees 'the establishment' for what it is – it may not come as a total shock that CNN is reporting that The (Clinton-appointee-Loretta-Lynch-run) Department of Justice has "pushed back" against The FBI's desires to begin a probe to investigate whether there was a criminal conflict of interest with the State Department and the Clinton Foundation during Clinton's tenure.

    Officials from the FBI and Department of Justice met several months ago to discuss opening a public corruption case into the Clinton Foundation, a US official has told CNN…

    At the time, three field offices were in agreement an investigation should be launched after the FBI received notification from a bank of suspicious activity from a foreigner who had donated to the Clinton Foundation, according to the official.

     

    FBI officials wanted to investigate whether there was a criminal conflict of interest with the State Department and the Clinton Foundation during Clinton's tenure.

    Makes perfect sense right? But before we go on, as a gentle reminder – it was then President Bill Clinton that gave Loretta Lynch her big break, nominating her in 1999 to serve as US Attorney for the Eastern District of New York... "probably nothing"

    So with that said, guess what happened next?

    The Department of Justice had looked into allegations surrounding the foundation a year earlier after the release of the controversial book "Clinton Cash," but found them to be unsubstantiated and there was insufficient evidence to open a case.

    As so as a result…

    DOJ officials pushed back against opening a case during the meeting earlier this year.

     

    Some also expressed concern the request seemed more political than substantive, especially given the timing of it coinciding with the investigation into the private email server and Clinton's presidential campaign.

    For there to be criminal conflict of interest, there would have to be evidence showing a government employee received something of value in exchange, such as a job post-employment or money. But, as CNN points out,

    There doesn't appear to be anything so far suggesting that in the newly released heavily redacted emails from Judicial Watch, but those emails do raise questions about whether the relationship between the State Department and Clinton Foundation was too cozy, particularly after Clinton pledged she would not be involved with the foundation when she became secretary of state in an effort to prevent an inappropriate relationship.

     

    In a case where there's a possible conflict of interest that's not necessarily criminal, the inspector general can look into it and take an administrative remedy if necessary.

     

    The State Department OIG has been looking into connections between the State Department and Clinton during her term as Secretary of State since earlier this year, but has not said anything about the matter.

    And it is this stonewalling in the face of clear evidence of the potential for 'inappropriate relationships' that has pushed a normaly docile press corps to its breaking point with The State Department. As Mediaite details, having refused to comment – other than the prepared party-line bullshit – when asked straightforward questions with regard the potential for conflicts of interest raised by the emails, reporters confronted State spokeswoman Elizabeth Trudeau…

    Three separate reporters – starting with NBC’s Abigail Williams – asked Trudeau about whether there was any improper relationship between State and the Clinton Foundation.

     

    Trudeau repeatedly downplayed the emails and said the department is “regularly in touch” with a wide range of people.

     

     

    One reporter pointed out that Clinton had “made a pledge” not to involve herself with the foundation while she was Secretary of State. Trudeau shot back that the agreement did not preclude others from talking to foundation staff.

     

    At one point, as another reporter – the AP’s Matt Lee – was getting frustrated with the lack of answers, he said this:I’m sorry, are you – am I not speaking English? Is this – I mean, is it coming across as foreign – I’m not asking you if – no one is saying it’s not okay or it’s bad for the department to get a broad variety of input from different people. Asking – the question is whether or not you have determined that there was nothing improper here.

    Enjoy…

    So – to summarize – we have hard evidence of the potential for an inappropriate relationship between Hillary Clinton's State Department and The Clinton Foundation – after she had pledged that this would not occur. We have The Justice Department  – led by Clinton appointee Loretta Lynch – implicitly blocking The FBI's probe of The Clinton Foundation's dealings (for, among other reasons, the timing could be viewed as "politically motivated." We have a State Department Inspector General who is silent.. and a State Department public relations person who has stonewalled so much, even the American press corps has grown frustrated… and the mainstream media on TV will be running stories on Trump's poll numbers, his apparent 'resignation' to losing, and his "friends and family" economic plan.

    Is it any wonder an increasingly frustrated majority of Americans do not trust Hillary, the establishment, and the status quo's American Dream? Simply put, the lengths by which strings are being pulled to ensure a Clinton presidency may well turn out to the straw that broke the camel's back of public restraint… especially if GDP, productivity, US corporate revenues, and construction spending is a more accurate picture of economic reality than the goal-seeked narrative-confirming payrolls data.

  • One Simple Reason Why Gold Can Still Jump 50%

    Submitted by Simon Black via SovereignMan.com,

    Heike Hoffman is a 54-year old fruit merchant in a small town in western Germany.

     

    She has no formal training in finance. She’s not running a multi-billion dollar portfolio.

     

    And yet, as the Wall Street Journal reported on Monday, “[w]hen Ms. Hoffman heard the ECB was knocking rates below zero in June 2014, she considered it ‘madness’ and promptly cut her spending, set aside more money, and bought gold.”

    She’s right. It is madness.

    There’s $13+ trillion worth of bonds in the world right now have negative yields, much of which is issued by bankrupt governments (like Japan).

     

    Stock markets around the world are at all-time highs even as corporate profits have been in long-term decline.

     

    And in a growing number of countries, even doing absolutely nothing and holding money in the bank means that you’ll be penalized with negative interest.

    These risks are even worse for major “institutional” investors like pension funds.

    Big investors have far fewer investment options than regular people like us. They need extremely large markets to deploy their capital.

    Think about it like this: if you have $100 billion to manage, you wouldn’t even be able to consider a small investment, like a $200,000 town home.

    $200,000 is just .0002% of your portfolio. It’s far too small to even think about.

    A senior investment manager at one of China’s sovereign wealth funds once told me they only consider deals that are at least $1 billion or more.

    Anything else is just too small, no matter how attractive.

    This is why it’s so great to be a smaller investor.

    We have recommended unique investments to members of our premium services, for example, that generate anywhere from 5% to 12% in very safe returns that are fully backed at a substantial margin by real assets (including gold).

    But the market size for these investments is only around $20 million.

    If you had $20,000, $200,000, or even $2 million to invest, your portfolio is the perfect size for these types of investments.

    But if you had $200 billion to manage, you wouldn’t be able to consider them. The investments are simply too small.

    That’s why large investors end up buying government bonds: the market is enormous.

    The market for US Treasuries, for example, is $19 trillion.

    So even if you’re managing $200 billion, the market size for US government bonds is big enough that you could easily snap up Treasuries.

    It’s the same with stocks.

    Wal Mart, Apple, Toyota, Samsung… the market size of large public companies is worth tens of trillions of dollars, big enough for major funds to invest.

    But again, that’s precisely the problem.

    Almost every single market and asset class that’s big enough for major institutional investors is at/near its all-time high.

    The yields on government bonds are at the lowest levels in recorded history (and in many cases even negative).

    Stocks are at record highs at a time when corporate profits are in decline.

    Many funds around the world (especially in Europe) have been jumping into the US market as a “safe haven” against all the Brexit uncertainty.

    Yet they’re doing so at a time when the US dollar is at a multi-decade high, and both US stocks and bonds are at all-time highs.

    It’s generally not the greatest investment strategy in the world to buy assets at their all-time highs… you’re taking on a LOT of risk.

    But major funds and institutions have very few options available.

    Simply due to their massive size, they’re chained to these risky asset classes. Even doing nothing and holding money in the bank could mean paying negative interest.

    But there is one very big exception: gold.

    The total market size for gold, as estimated by the World Gold Council, is more than $7 trillion.

    That’s a big market, more than sufficient for institutional investors to deploy billions, even tens of billions.

    Central bankers have been doing it themselves, snapping up hundreds of tons of gold in recent years.

    (The Chinese bought tens of billions of dollars worth of gold in the last year.)

    Yet unlike stocks and bonds, gold is NOWHERE NEAR its all-time high, at least in US dollar terms.

    In fact gold can still appreciate nearly 50% before it breaks its previous price record.

    This means that GOLD is about the only major asset class that isn’t anywhere close to its all-time high, but still a big enough market for institutional investors.

    Stocks are very expensive. Bonds are insane. Bank rates are negative for many large investors.

    But gold is still historically inexpensive despite having appreciated substantially this year.

    So gold should become much more attractive to large investors, especially since there will likely be more debt, more money printing, more capital controls, and more monetary insanity in the future.

    These trends are pretty clear.

    And if you understand them, the case for owning at least a small amount of gold is obvious.

    Don’t fall in love with gold. Don’t maintain a religious devotion to it. And don’t dive in headfirst with your entire life’s savings. Accumulate slowly.

    But do recognize that there’s no other global, highly liquid asset that increases in value as governments and central banks decline.

    So having even just a little bit of gold can be an excellent insurance policy.

  • Mapping Millennials: Over-Educated, Under-Employed, Debt-Ridden, & "Looking To Make A Difference" In The World

    Millennials continue to puzzle the general population.

    Many Boomers are still trying to pinpoint how millennials approach life. They are trying to understand how to impress millennial colleagues, how to sell to them, or how to retain them as employees. Boomers want to know what it was like to grow up with today’s technology, and how that impacts one’s outlook.

    Even millennials are still perplexed by their own generation. Just because there is a lot being written about Gen Y in the media does not mean that anyone really understands anything. In fact, many millennials are truly unique, and can’t really be meaningfully categorized in any black or white box.

    The reality is that millennials were not shaped by just three TV channels – their culture stems from access to millions of different websites and Youtube channels, unfiltered points of view, a wealth of diversity, and recent world events.

    And while we don’t want to put millennials in a box, we do like to focus on data. Take away your own conclusions from the following infographic…

    Courtesy of: Visual Capitalist
     

  • Why Donald Trump's "Sound Money" Stance Scares The Mainstream

    Authored by Judy Shelton, originally posted Op-Ed via The Wall Street Journal,

    The source of trade anxiety is a broken global monetary system that distorts price signals with sharp currency moves.

    The surest way to become alienated from Donald Trump supporters is to invoke the word “global” with regard to trade or economic interests. Even if you embrace the Trump economic agenda for enhancing U.S. competitiveness by lowering taxes and easing regulation, even if you support an “America First” approach for tackling domestic shortcomings from education to infrastructure – there is still a negative stigma attached to proposing any kind of global economic initiative.

    Yet by insisting that the U.S. Treasury label China a “currency manipulator” and by promoting trade that is both free and “fair,” Mr. Trump may be laying the groundwork for a significant breakthrough in international monetary relations – one that could ultimately validate the rationale for an open global marketplace and restore genuine free trade as a vital component of economic growth.

    The notion that something good might come out of a Trump policy elicits guffaws in certain economic circles. And questioning whether today’s exchange-rate regime serves the cause of beneficial cross-border commerce is tantamount to advocating protectionism. Nevertheless, Mr. Trump’s emphasis on currency manipulation brings into focus the shortcomings of our present international monetary system—volatility, persistent imbalances, currency mismatches—which testify to its dysfunction. Indeed, today’s hodgepodge of exchange-rate mechanisms is routinely described as a “non-system.” Or, as former International Monetary Fund chief Jacques de Larosière termed it at a Vienna conference in February 2014, an “anti-system.”

    If monetary scholars once diligently sought to explain the relative virtues of fixed-versus-flexible exchange rates on global economic performance, they have largely abdicated any responsibility for the escalating political backlash against trade that blames currency manipulation for lost business.

    No serious economist would claim today that the “dirty float” intervention tactics practiced by numerous countries would be remotely acceptable within the freely flexible exchange-rate system envisaged by Nobel Laureate Milton Friedman. Nor would anyone suggest that any coherent mechanism exists comparable with the fixed-rate system anchored by a gold-convertible dollar that reigned in the decades following World War II.

    Nobel Laureate Robert Mundell has consistently argued for the restoration of a system of formally maintained exchange rates to reduce uncertainty and promote growth. Yet the lack of willingness among the great majority of economists to recognize the imperative for global monetary reform to avoid a breakdown in global trade relations has left policy makers in the lurch. Faced with mounting demands to address currency manipulation through “strong and enforceable provisions”—i.e., tariffs—those who support free trade are being forced to consider the broader implications of a sluggish world economy that has become overly reliant on central banks.

    Is it more egregious when governments deliberately intervene in foreign-exchange markets to manipulate currencies to gain an export advantage—or when central banks seek to accomplish the same thing through monetary policy?

    The point is that today’s free-for-all approach to international monetary relations permits nations to pursue any exchange-rate policy they wish. Relative currency values are thus vulnerable not only to the manipulative tactics of government authorities, but also to the speculative maneuvering of foreign-exchange traders—the most active of which, in a market that averages $4.9 trillion in daily volume, are the world’s largest banks.

    No wonder so many workers employed by U.S. companies that manufacture products requiring substantial capital investment—automobiles and tractors, computer and electronic equipment—have become disenchanted with the supposed long-term benefits of free trade. It is one thing to lose sales to a foreign competitor whose product delivers the best quality for the money; it’s another to lose sales as a consequence of an unforeseen exchange-rate slide that distorts the comparative prices of competing goods.

    To brand trade skeptics as sore losers is to malign them unfairly. To resent being victimized by currency movements is not the same as being opposed to free trade, nor does it signal an eagerness to engage in protectionist retaliation. It’s simply an honest response to incongruity: We need to reconcile global monetary arrangements with global trade aspirations.

    As former Federal Reserve Chairman Paul Volcker has observed:

    “Trade flows are affected more by ten minutes of movement in the currency markets than by ten years of (even successful) negotiations.”

    Mr. Trump’s forceful rhetoric may help put an end to the politically correct attitude so prevalent among economists that breezily dismisses what was once accepted as a truism: Stable exchange rates foster long-term prosperity by maximizing the productive use of economic resources and financial capital. Why continue to passively accept the negative economic consequences of global monetary disorder? Why permit legitimately earned profits from business operations and investments in foreign countries to be wiped out by unpredictable currency losses? Why hold global economic growth prospects hostage to antiquated exchange-rate arrangements?

    It’s time to end the intellectual vacuum and focus on serious initiatives for global monetary reform. The goal is to maximize prosperity by harnessing the power of free-market signals across borders. Monetary clarity is the key to reconciling the principles of free trade with the promised benefits of an open global marketplace.

    By focusing on currency manipulation as an unfair trade practice, Mr. Trump has not only identified the crux of the economic dilemma, he has also spotlighted the social and political tensions its consequences have fostered.

  • Demographic 'Death Cross' Looms As World "Plague" Of Elderly Population Grows

    The number of countries where the elderly outnumber the young is on the rise

     

    What began in 1995 in a single country, Italy, will spread globally to economies as diverse as New Zealand and Georgia, by 2030.  As Joseph Chamie – an independent consulting demographer and a former director of the United Nations Population Division – details, by 2030, 56 countries will have more people aged 65 and over than children under 15.

    As Bloomberg reports, the former UN head demographer compared population projections of kids under the age of 15 to that of people aged 65 and over. It’s not just industrialized nations like Japan and Germany succumbing to the age curse. The turning point will take place in 2020 in the Cuba and South Korea, followed five years later in Thailand and the U.S.

     

    By 2075, the global population is forecast to pass the demographic milestone…The Demographic Death Cross…

     

    Chamie refers to this as “the jump from a Toys ‘R’ Us society to an Olds ‘R’ Us one.”

    While the prospect of longer lives is a good thing, problems arise when a shrinking work force cannot foot the pension bill. Several decades ago, you could have had about 10 workers per retiree, but that could shrink to the point where in Italy,  for example, you had three workers per retiree. While the political choices are unsavory — increase taxes or cut benefits — governments are running out of time to act.

    You “can't repeal the law of demographics,” Chamie said.

  • Erdogan Threatens To Abandon US Dollar In Trade With Russia

    The unexpectedly sharp antagonism between Turkey and the west accelerated today, and one day after NATO preemptively reminded Turkey that it is still a NATO alliance member and advising Ankara that “Turkey’s NATO membership is not in question”, Turkey had some more choice words for its military allies. Cited by Reuters, Turkey foreign minister Mevlut Cavusoglu told Turkish’s NTV television on Thursday that the country “may seek other options outside NATO for defense industry cooperation, although its first option is always cooperation with its NATO allies.” Translation: if Russia (and/or China) gives us a better “defensive” offer, we just may take it.

    The sharply worded retort came on the same day that Turkey said it will resume airstrikes on Islamic State targets in Syria, and asked Russia to carry out joint operations against its “common enemy.”  Ankara halted strikes after the downing of a Russian plane by Turkish forces last year.

    In the same interview, Cavusolgu said that Ankara “will again, in an active manner, with its planes take part in operations” against Islamic State targets. Cavusolgu also said that Ankara has called on Moscow to carry out joint operations against the “common enemy” of IS. “Let’s fight against the terrorist group together, so that we can clear it out as soon as possible,” Cavusolgu said, adding that otherwise IS will continue to expand and spread into other countries.

    To be sure, coming from the nation which directly engaged in oil trade with the Islamic State, this is at least a little ironic, however, what is notable is the significant pivot Turkey has made vis-a-vis military engagements, rotating not toward the US alliance, but toward the Kremlin.

    “We will discuss all the details. We have always called on Russia to carry out anti-Daesh [IS] operations together,” he said, adding that the proposal is still “on the table.” The foreign minister went on to tout the benefits of closer cooperation between Turkey and Russia.

    “Many countries are engaged in Syria actively. There could be mistakes,” he said. “In order to prevent that, we need to put into practice the solidarity and cooperation [mechanism] between us including sharing of real-time intelligence.”

    The comments came just days after Turkish President Erdogan visited St. Petersburg for talks with Russian President Vladimir Putin, in the first meeting between the two leaders since the plane was downed.

    But perhaps the most notable development was reported today by Turkey’s Gunes newspaper, which said that as part of the discussion between Putin and Erdogan on Tuesday, the Turkish president suggested to abandon the US dollar in bilateral trade between Turkey and Russia, and instead to transact directly in lira and rubles. This would “benefit both Russia and Turkey”, Erdogan allegedly said in his August 9 meeting in St Petersburg, adding that this would relieve the lira from the USD’s upward pressure. The reason Erdogan is concerned about exchange rates is because recently Turkish inflation soared by nearly 8% Y/Y, and the recent devaluation of the TRY against the USD has only poured more oil on the fire.

    Needless to say, such a bilateral agreement would further infuriate Turkey’s European “friends”, permanently halting Turkish accession into the customs union, in accordance with Austria’s recent demands, and would in turn lead to a dissolution of the refugee agreement that is still keeping millions in refugees away from Europe in general and Germany, and Merkel’s plunging popularity ratings, in particular. Which, incidentally, means that not only Erdogan, but now also Putin, holds key leverage over the career of Europe’s most important politician.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 11th August 2016

  • Islam's "Quiet Conquest" Of Europe

    Submitted by Giulio Meotti via The Gatestone Institute,

    • "Islam is a French religion and the French language is a language of Islam." — Tariq Ramadan.

    • In 1989, Dalil Boubakeur, rector of the Grand Mosque of Paris, justified the persecution of Salman Rushdie by Ayatollah Khomeini. Last year, Boubakeur called for the conversion of churches into mosques.

    • In Britain, mainstream Muslim organizations are dispensing "Islamic justice" through more than 85 sharia courts attached to mosques.

    • Civil war in France is what the Islamic State is looking for: unleashing a blind repression so that the Muslim population will show solidarity with the revolutionary minority. Yet, there is still worse possible outcome: that nothing happens and we continue as is.

    • Real "moderate Muslims" are silenced or murdered.

    Last month, the Wall Street Journal published an interview with France's director of domestic intelligence, Patrick Calvar. "The confrontation is inevitable," Mr. Calvar said. There are an estimated 15,000 Salafists among France's seven million Muslims, "whose radical-fundamentalist creed dominates many of the predominantly Muslim housing projects at the edges of cities such as Paris, Nice or Lyon. Their preachers call for a civil war, with all Muslims tasked to wipe out the miscreants down the street."

    These Salafists openly challenge France's way of life and do not make a secret of their willingness to overthrow the existing order in Europe through violent means, terror attacks and physical intimidation. But paradoxically, if the Islamists' threat to Europe were confined to the Salafists, it would be easier to defeat it.

    There is in fact another threat, even more dangerous because it is more difficult to decipher. It has just been dubbed by the magazine Valeurs Actuelles, "the quiet conquest". It is "moderate" Islam's sinuous project of producing submission. "Its ambition is clear: changing French society. Slowly but surely".

    That threat is personified in the main character of Michel Houellebecq's novel, Submission: Mohammed Ben Abbes, the "moderate" Muslim who becomes France's president and converts the state to Islam. And from where does President Ben Abbes start his Islamization? The Sorbonne University. It is already happening: Qatar recently made a significant donation to this famous university, to sponsor the education of migrants.

    In France, the quiet conquest has the face of the Union of the Islamic Organizations of France (UOIF), which a Simon Wiesenthal Center report charged with "anti-Semitism, advocacy and financing of terrorism and call to Jihad… "

    Not only does UOIF not encourage the integration of Muslims in France," the report states, "it actually provides a nursery for the most radical Islamist positions."

    In Italy we have just witnessed the strategy of this "moderate Islam." The largest and most influential Islamic organization, l'Unione delle comunità ed organizzazione islamiche in Italia (Ucoii), sponsored Milan's first Muslim councilwoman, Sumaya Abdel Qader, a veiled candidate of the center-left coalition. Qader's husband, Abdallah Kabakebbji, openly called for the destruction of the State of Israel: "It is a historical mistake, a scam", he wrote on Facebook. His solution? "Ctrl + Alt + Delete".

    Qader won the race over a real moderate Muslim, the unveiled Somali activist, Maryan Ismail. I met Mrs. Ismail at a pro-Israel forum in Milan. After losing the election, she broke with Italy's Democratic Party in an open letter: "The Democratic Party has chosen to dialogue with obscurantist Islam. Once again, the souls of modern, plural and inclusive Islam were not heard".

    Take two "stars" of this French "moderate Islam." The first one is Tariq Ramadan, the grandson of Hassan al-Banna, the founder of the Muslim Brotherhood, the motto of which is: "Allah is our objective; the Prophet is our leader; the Quran is our law; Jihad is our way; dying in the way of Allah is our highest hope."

    Ramadan does not hide in Raqqa or shoot at French citizens. By applying for French citizenship, he would like to become one of them. His office is in the Parisian suburb of Saint Denis; he has written 30 books and he has two million Facebook followers. Ramadan has academic chairs all over the world, he is the director of the Research Center for Islamic Law in Doha (Qatar) and the president of the European Muslim Network. He publicly campaigns for Islam along with Italy's former prime minister, Massimo D'Alema. Ramadan recently explained his vision for Europe and France: "Islam is a French religion and the French language is a language of Islam".

    Ramadan's project is not the hoped-for Europeanization of Islam, but the not-hoped-for frightful Islamization of Europe. He opposes the assimilation of Muslims into French culture and society. A few days before the election in Milan, Ramadan was in Italy to endorse the candidacy of Sumaya Abdel Qader.

    The second French "star" is Dalil Boubakeur, the rector of the Grand Mosque of Paris. In 1989, Boubakeur justified the persecution of Salman Rushdie by Ayatollah Khomeini. In 2002, he testified for the prosecution against the writer Michel Houellebecq. In 2006, he sued Charlie Hebdo in court, after the publication of the Danish Mohammed cartoons. Last year, Boubakeur called for the conversion of churches into mosques and asked to "double" the number of mosques in France.

    Dalil Boubakeur, rector of the Grand Mosque of Paris, last year called for the conversion of churches into mosques and asked to "double" the number of mosques in France. (Image source: TV5 Monde)

    In the United Kingdom, mainstream Muslim organizations are dispensing "Islamic justice" through more than 85 sharia courts attached to mosques. Divorce, polygamy, adultery and wife-beating are only some of these courts' matters of jurisprudence. In Germany, vice-chancellor Sigmar Gabriel criticized Saudi Arabia for financing Islamic extremism in Europe. It is the same kingdom which last year offered to build 200 new mosques in Germany.

    Qatar, with its Al Jazeera television megaphone, is also very active in sponsoring Muslim Brotherhood Islamic radicalism all over Europe. The Qatari royal family, for example, in 2015 donated £11 million to Oxford's St. Anthony's College, where Tariq Ramadan teaches. Qatar also announced that it was willing to spend $65 million in the French suburbs, home to the vast majority of the six million Muslims in France.

    Today in Europe, several scenarios are possible, including the worst. Among them, there is a civil war, which many are beginning to talk about, including Patrick Calvar, the director of domestic intelligence. This is what the Islamic State is looking for: unleashing a blind repression so that the Muslim population will show solidarity with the revolutionary minority. Yet, there is still worse possible outcome: that nothing happens and we continue as is.

    The end is more important than the means. The Islamic State has the same goal as most of the members of so-called "moderate Islam": domination under the sharia. Many supposedly "moderate Muslims", even if they do not commit violent acts themselves, support them quietly. They support them by not speaking out against them. If they do speak out against them, they usually do so in coded terms, such as that they are "against terrorism," or that what concerns them about violent acts by Muslims is the possibility of a "backlash" against them.

    Violent jihadis, however, are not the only means of transforming Europe, and perhaps are even counterproductive: they could awaken the nations they attack. Soft and more discreet means, such as social pressure and propaganda, are even more dangerous, and possibly even more effective: they are harder to see, such as the West's acceptance of dual judiciary and legal systems; sharia finance (if there had been a "Nazi finance" system, in which all financial transactions went to strengthening the Third Reich, what effect might that have had on World War II?), and the proliferation in the West of mosques and extremist Islamic websites. Although there are indeed many real "moderate Muslims", there are also still many who are not.

    To conservative Muslims, however, any Muslim who does not accept every word of Allah — the entire Koran — is not a true Muslim, and is open to charges of "apostasy", the punishment for which is death. According to a leading Sunni theologian, Yusuf al-Qaradawi, based in Qatar, "If they [Muslims] had gotten rid of the punishment for apostasy, Islam would not exist today."

    That is why the late writer Oriana Fallaci once said to The New Yorker: "I do not accept the mendacity of the so-called Moderate Islam". That is why real "moderate Muslims" are silenced or murdered.

    This might summarize the current Islamic mainstream mentality: "Dear Europeans, continue to think about a shorter working week, early retirement, abortion on demand and adultery in the afternoon. With your laws, we will conquer you. With our laws, we will convert you".

  • A New Wrinkle In The Paper Gold Con Game

     

     

     

     

    A New Wrinkle In The Paper Gold Con Game

    Posted with permission and written by Craig Hemke, TF Metals Report (CLICK HERE FOR ORIGINAL)

     


     

    Here’s a story that came out earlier today. Maybe it’s just me, but it’s easy to see a Bullion Bank plot here. For months, we’ve documented all of the various points of demand for gold in all its forms. And now, as The Bullion Bank Paper Derivative Pricing Scheme is being stretched to extremes, suddenly the LME wants to offer another form of paper gold with which to screw everyone.

     

    And note who’s involved here…not only is it the LME working in conjunction with the Evil Of Evils Goldman Sachs, they’re all “working in conjunction” with The World Gold Council. IF ANYTHING SHOULD PROVE FOR YOU ONCE AND FOR ALL THE THE WGC IS A SHADY, NASTY AND WORTHLESS ORGANIZATION, THIS SHOULD DO IT! Here’s your link from Reuters detailing the news:

     

    LONDON, Aug 9 The London Metal Exchange (LME) said on Tuesday it is planning to launch spot and futures contracts for gold and silver in the first half of 2017, adding to its list of products which includes copper and aluminum.


    The 139-year old exchange is working in collaboration with the World Gold Council, an industry body backed by gold mining companies such as Barrick Gold and Goldcorp, and is supported by five banks and proprietary trader OSTC, which have committed to provide liquidity.


    “The initiative has been driven by the need for greater market transparency, to support and aid ongoing regulatory change, provide additional robustness to the precious metals market, broaden market access,” the exchange and its partners said in a statement.


    Financial market transparency has been a major focus for regulators after evidence of price manipulation in lending rates between banks in the Libor scandal in 2012.


    As regulators continue to review commodity markets, the bullion industry is braced for further changes that could ultimately include a mandatory central clearing or more expensive bilateral trading.


    Banks and bullion operators have looked for ways to preserve London’s role as a major global trading centre, while increasing transparency of a market which can trace its roots back to the 17th century.


    The London Bullion Market Association (LBMA), another industry body whose members are mostly banks, refiners and dealers, separately asked exchanges and technology firms in October last year to bid for services such as a gold exchange or a clearing platform.


    London currently dominates the global over-the-counter gold trade with an estimated $5 trillion changing hands every year, while New York’s Comex contract sets the benchmark for futures.


    The LME plans physically delivered spot, futures and options contracts. The gold will be 100 ounces in size (worth around $133,600 at current prices) and silver 5,000 ounces. All contracts will be cleared through LME Clear, the exchange’s clearing house, which has an annual traded notional value of $12 trillion.


    LIQUIDITY


    The World Gold Council CEO Aram Shishmanian said that they had initially engaged with around 30 firms, but only Goldman Sachs, ICBC Standard Bank, Morgan Stanley, Natixis and Societe Generale signed up to support the contracts from the launch day.


    After the transformation of precious metals benchmarks in 2014, led by a regulatory drive to make them more robust to attempts of manipulation, banks have become more cautious.


    Several of them have run into trouble with regulators over misdemeanours in their precious metals trading business.


    The benchmarks are widely used by producers, consumers and investors to trade and value the metal. Gold and silver are among the eight major market benchmarks that are regulated by Britain’s watchdog Financial Conduct Authority (FCA).


    Frankly, my favorite part of the entire article is this:

     

    Several of them have run into trouble with regulators over misdemeanours in their precious metals trading business.


    “Several of them have run into trouble over misdemeanors”….GIVE ME A BREAK. Misdemeanors. That’s pretty funny.

     

    Anyway, the new “gold” contract looks to begin trading by summer of next year. (Maybe the entire fraud will have collapsed by then?) Here are the actual specs. Have a look and see if you notice a rather critical distinction/component of this latest fraud:
    http://lme.com/metals/precious-metals/gold/

     

    Here, please allow me to help. What word jumps off the page at you from this screenshot below? (Hint: It starts with a “U”.)

     

     

    So the new, “physically-settled” LME gold contract is one where “seller transfers unallocated gold to…the LPMCL member bank (Goldman)…and buyers receive unallocated gold at any LPCML member bank (Goldman)“. THAT SOUNDS LIKE A GREAT FREAKING DEAL! WHERE DO I SIGN UP?

     

    But, seriously, what a gigantic SCAM this all is! These Banks will do literally ANYTHING to perpetuate their Paper Derivative Pricing Scheme. This latest move to collect gold and fees while scamming investors into believing that they own “physical gold” is just another example. And again, that the WGC is “collaborating” in this con should tell you all you need to know about that organization, too.

     

    You don’t own it unless you hold it. Period, end of story. Sadly, as we’ve come to learn over the years, everything else is just a Banker scheme to screw you.

     

     

     

    Please email with any questions about this article or precious metals HERE

     

     

     

     

     

    A New Wrinkle In The Paper Gold Con Game

    Posted with permission and written by Craig Hemke, TF Metals Report (CLICK HERE FOR ORIGINAL)

  • 2016 Will End With Economic Instability And A Trump Presidency

    Submitted by Brandon Smith via Alt-Market.com,

    Political and economic events tend to swing like a pendulum, or move like the tides.  What you think you know today, according to the mainstream mood, can swiftly change tomorrow.  Sometimes this is mere random coincidence, but often it is engineered by the powers that be.  When discerning coming trends, the only assumption I recommend people operate on is that the globalists will play the long game; the short game is only relevant as far as it serves the long game.

    What is the long game?  The globalists have openly admitted their goal in numerous mainstream publications, but my favorite example is the January 1988 issue of the Rothschild run magazine The Economist.  The issue pronounces boldly that investors should “get ready for a global currency” by 2018.  I examine this issue in detail in my article The Economic End Game Explained.

    The Economist article mentions the sacrifice of “some” economic sovereignty of nation states, the end of the dollar’s world reserve status and the rise of the IMF’s Special Drawing Rights basket currency mechanism as a “bridge” to a single global currency.  None of these changes can be accomplished without certain parts of the world suffering severe financial instability first.  Not only is this a mathematical inevitability, such crisis is also a useful tool for elitists to mold the public’s collective psychology.

    So, let’s make this crystal clear — the long game is the total and OPEN centralization of economic and geopolitical power into the hands of a select few financial elites.  Not the pulling of strings behind the curtain.  Not shadow governance.  OPEN governance of the world by the elites, accepted or even demanded by the people.

    There are a lot of assumptions floating around economic conditions and election developments right now that do not take into account this long game.  The first being that globalists “are losing their grip on the situation.”

    I would have to disagree.  In terms of political leaders (East and West) and surface economic indicators, the elites have more control than ever.

    The argument of the “bumbling globalists” became rather popular the days after the initial success of the Brexit referendum.  This was of course based on the assumption that the Brexit is damaging to the globalists rather than helpful to them.  I outline why the Brexit is a perfect scapegoat for a fiscal downturn engineered by the elites in my article Brexit: Global Trigger Event, Fake Out, Or Something Else?, published before the Brexit vote took place.

    Since the referendum, central banks and politicians around the world have begun calling for a single monetary and fiscal policy initiative meant to “head off any ill effects of the Brexit.”  That is to say, the open calls for one economic authority to rule them all have now begun.

    The numerous warnings by the financial elites of a coming crisis event have most people in the mainstream and even many alternative analysts scratching their heads.  For those that hyper-focus on stock markets, all seems to be well.  Of course, these people only have an attention span that lasts until the next market ticker opens for the day.  They aren’t looking at the bigger picture.

    To be fair, though, the mainstream media is really laying on the fake-out propaganda thick.

    July and August have produced considerably strange behaviors from stocks so far, with a record number of days positive, followed by a near-record number of days negative.  I would consider this a form of volatility that should not be overlooked.  The media have so far shrugged off these developments and only noted that stock valuations are still high despite the Brexit “surprise.”  Their assertion has been that the Brexit “had no effect;” completely ignoring the fact that such events can have long term consequences rather than immediate consequences.

    Oil prices have plunged back towards lows last seen at the beginning of the year, something I stated would eventually occur after the predictable failure of the OPEC meeting in Doha.  Low global demand continues and production has not slowed in any meaningful way.

    There has been a steady correlation the past year between oil and stocks.  The current decoupling is unlikely to last very long and stocks should track down to oil by September as speculators give up trying to hold crude offshore in a useless effort to drive prices higher.  The mainstream has said little to nothing about this decoupling or its eventual consequences.

    The past two months of employment numbers have been an epic farce, with the media playing up the supposed number of jobs added while mentioning nothing about the nearly 95 million working age Americans removed from the rolls and no longer counted as unemployed.  That’s almost one third of the U.S. population, and around half of all working age Americans that have no job.

    The Bureau of Labor’s claim when cornered by this statistic and the fraudulent nature of their primary employment percentages?  “Those people don’t want to work, therefore they should not be counted…”

    The better than expected jobs reports have so far allowed markets to levitate.  I would assert, however, that stocks are merely treading water at the deceptively calm center of a hurricane.

    The reality is, they cannot hide an economic collapse forever.  Negative financial effects are going to touch ground somewhere, and the data is going to sneak through.  Case in point; U.S. productivity is now at 37 year lows despite government statistics claiming fully recovered employment.  You would think that in such a happy labor environment portrayed by the BLS productivity would grow.  This is not the case.  Perhaps a total unemployed population of over 100 million people may be contributing to the implosion of U.S. productivity…?

    Outside of the U.S., European banks are on the verge of a breakdown, and central bank stimulus measures and rate cuts are adding minimal extra boost to markets.  They aren't currently falling much, but they aren't rallying much either.  In essence, equities are becoming stagnant due to artificial support from central banks and there is little incentive for investors to participate any longer.

    In light of the latest manipulations of economic data and the jawboning of stocks since March, some alternative analysts have pronounced that the central banks plan to prop up markets “indefinitely,” or at least until Hillary Clinton can win the election.

    This is an unfortunate assumption by the alternative crowd…

    I remember before the Brexit vote a vast majority of independent economists and liberty analysts argued that the elites would “never allow” the U.K. referendum to pass — that they had the power to rig the vote however they pleased.  If this is the case (and I agree it is the case), then clearly the elites WANTED the Brexit to pass.

    It would serve alternative analysts well to recall specifically the rigged polling numbers in the weeks leading up to the Brexit which showed a definite win for the “Stay” crowd.  Interesting how that all turned out, isn’t it?

    I am consistently reminded of the Brexit surprise when I look today at the polling numbers on the U.S. election.  The erratic and inconsistent polling shows Trump climbing, then suddenly sinking days later, then climbing again without any clear catalysts.  Many polls contradict each other, just as the polls did before the Brexit, and, the same kind of circus atmosphere is present, if not more prevalent.

    It may be possible, if not certain, that this is all a game.  The Brexit outcome was predetermined, which is how elites like George Soros scored successful investment bets on the referendum passing, and the reason why the Bank for International Settlements gathered central bankers from around the world as the vote was taking place.

    I believe that the U.S. presidential election has also been predetermined; with a Trump win.  Some people might be confused by this concept.

    Trump’s campaign has been consistently compared to the Brexit campaign by globalists in the media, as well as by mainstream pundits.  They call it a "dangerous" trend of rising populists.

    The propaganda surrounding the Brexit asserts that the referendum will eventually lead to global economic crisis; and already, central banks and politicians are attempting to tie the Brexit to anything that might go wrong fiscally in the near future.

    The propaganda surrounding Trump is the same; that Trump is unfit to lead America and that his economic policies will end in global financial ruin.

    One constant connects the Brexit referendum and Trump — both are supported by conservative movements with anti-globalist leanings.

    I submit that there is in fact a wider economic crisis on the way, and that the elites plan to use the Brexit and Trump as scapegoats for this crisis.

    I have stated this before, but I think the idea needs repeating:  The globalists need the economy to turn unstable in order to create a rationale for a centralized economic authority and a single global currency system.  This is why they have consistently called for a “coordinated global central banking policy” after the Brexit.  This is why they continue to warn of a fiscal crisis even though stock markets remain at all-time highs.

    If Hillary Clinton, a well known globalist puppet deep in the bedrock of the establishment, wins the election only to have the economy tank, then the globalists will get the blame.

    If Trump is either allowed in office, or is placed in office, and the economy tanks, CONSERVATIVES, the primary enemy of the globalists, will get the blame for the resulting crisis.

    To reiterate, the globalists have created the conditions by which an economic crisis can be triggered at the time of their choosing (within certain limits).  They are then either supporting the success of seemingly conservative based movements and candidates, or simply refusing to interfere with them.  This is being done so that the globalists can then blame the crash they created on conservative movements.

    This allows them to demonize not just conservatives, but the conservative philosophy in general; labeling it a poisonous ideal akin to fascism.  Their solution?  Erase all elements of conservatism and sovereignty from society for the sake of the “greater good” of the collective.

    This is part of the long game.

    As I noted after the U.K. referendum, I believe the Brexit to be part of a “one-two-punch combination,” and that the second punch has not arrived yet.  My view appears to be supported by the number of financial elites warning investors to pull out of markets today before it is too late.  Obviously, they know something the rest of the financial mainstream does not.

    This sets up the elites as “prophets” rather than criminals, as economic perception turns negative and the public begins looking for answers.

    In the meantime, I believe a softer downturn will begin before the election takes place, most likely starting in September.  This will give a boost to the Trump campaign, or at least, that is what the polls will likely say.  I would also watch for some banking officials and media pundits to blame this downturn on Trump’s rise in the polling data.  The narrative will be that just the threat of a Trump presidency is “putting the markets on edge.”

    Many claim the Federal Reserve will not raise rates in 2016 with the election threatened by a Trump candidacy.  I believe the Fed will in fact raise rates, as they always do going into major recessions.  If they do not raise rates before the election, they will most certainly raise rates in December if Trump is in the White House.

    I realize that many will argue that Trump will “never be allowed to win,” just look at how the media demonizes him.  But this is what people argued before the Brexit, and they were wrong.  I suggest that this demonization campaign is much like the doom and gloom used by globalists before the UK referendum — it is not meant to stop the event.  It is not meant to prevent Trump from getting into office, it is meant to make Trump and conservatives a scapegoat for an impending crisis once he is IN office.

    While I certainly am not advocating Hillary Clinton in the Oval Office, I have to point out that a Trump presidency serves the globalist long game better than a Clinton presidency

    First, the elites need an international financial crisis to encourage the public to support a single central bank policy and authority.  They can blame such a crisis on Trump and the Brexit and divert attention away from themselves.

     

    Second, the elites need to remove the philosophy of conservatism as an obstacle to global collectivism and the destruction of national sovereignty.  Again, conservatives will be blamed as participants and co-conspirators in the fiscal crisis, and painted as so devilish that no future generation would want to be a associated with conservative thought.

     

    Third, the elites need to kill the dollar’s world reserve status.  And yes, even this could be blamed on Trump as Saudi Arabia moves away from the dollar as the petro-currency and multiple nations begin to protest Trump’s “isolationism” by dumping the dollar.  In October, China (with the approval of the IMF) begins spreading SDR-based liquidity around the world, launching the next phase of the end of the dollar as world reserve right before the U.S. election climax.

     

    Fourth, the elites need internal conflict within the U.S. and/or martial law in order to justify international intervention.  A Trump presidency will most likely be met with accelerated violence from social justice activists and general riots from the entitlement class.  I believe Trump will use martial law measures, though he probably will not label this "martial law".  There may even come a day when globalist “leaders” will assert that Trump cannot be allowed access to a nuclear arsenal, and that he must be stopped.

    If Trump turns out to be anti-constitution, and the liberty movement acts to stand against him — we will be accused of working for the social justice miscreants, or we will ironically be accused as agents of the globalists.  If we fight against a globalist intervention or the social justice mobs, we will be accused as fascists by the international community.  Truly, with Trump as president, many doors open for the elites.

    That said, this does not mean the elites will be ultimately successful in their endeavors.  There are always unknowns to any grand scheme.  As Mike Tyson famously said, “Everyone has a plan until they get punched in the mouth.”  I believe the elites will be surprised by some sizable punches in the mouth.  Until then, though, their current strategy appears to be running on schedule.

  • Even Reuters Gets It: "Money-Printing Has Pushed Stocks Out Of Kilter With Economic Reality"

    It appears that the world's central-scammers have finally gone too far. In a shockingly Zero-Hedge-ian statement, Reuters is forced to admit that "spooked by the end of a 30-year bond bull run and bouts of money printing which have pushed stock values out of kilter with economic reality," high-profile investors are turning their backs on financial assets and favoring real assets.

    Of course, all it took was 7 years of unprecedented monetary policy experimentation to decouple the fantasy of equity markets from the harsh reality of the real economy…

     

    But, as Reuters explains, alternative investments such as a Ferrari 335 S Scaglietti, a rare blue diamond or a case of Romanee-Conti Grand Cru wine from Burgundy are going mainstream as investors grapple with ultra-low interest rates and volatile stocks.

    Rare coins, collectible jewelry and classic cars join fine wine among the top performers in the year to end-March…

    And fine wine saw its largest positive monthly movement since 2010 in July with the Liv-ex Fine Wine Investables index, which tracks around 200 Bordeaux red wines from 24 leading producers, up by 4.5 percent. It is up 13.8 percent so far this year, compared with 6.9 percent for the S&P 500 and 8.9 percent for the FTSE 100.

    "As a physical asset, fine wine tends to perform well in periods of uncertainty…and is also not linked to the prices of other assets in most circumstances," said Andrew della Casa, Founding Director of The Wine Investment Fund.

    Over a five-year period, cars, coins and jewelry returned 161 percent, 73 percent and 63 percent respectively, eclipsing Britain's FTSE-100 stock index, which was up 15 percent since the start of 2011.

     

    But with future demand tough to call, Andrew Shirley, author of the Knight Frank Wealth Report, strikes a note of caution.

    "You should still only be buying the investments of passion that you will enjoy owning and will give you pleasure even if their value goes down – there is certainly no guarantee that values will continue to rise.

     

    "There is an argument that such investments add diversity to portfolios, provide a hedge against inflation, and unlike equity-based investments, offer a degree of tangibility but like gold they tend not to generate any income and can also be illiquid, and subject to changes in taste and fashion."

    Gold, another so-called safe haven from top-of-the cycle bonds and expensive stocks, is also enjoying a purple patch, BlackRock research shows.

    With returns up 26.8% year-to-date – its best year since 1979 – gold has returned almost twice as much as higher-risk emerging market dollar bonds and non-U.S. Developed market bonds, and almost five times a 3.1 percent return on U.S. large caps, it said.

    Analysts at Unigestion describe the gold price rise as a "classic" market response to stress triggered by Britain's shock decision to quit the European Union and fears of negative rates but it was difficult to predict how long these circumstances supporting a rush into gold might last.

    *  *  *

    So with yields at record lows and stocks at record highs, the world is waking up to the reality that financial assets are nothing but smoke-and-mirrors, blown and reflected by central planners' manipulation to keep the confidence alive. The problem is, the elites are stepping away, leaving the greatest fools to fight over the last morsels of 'easy' money before the inevitable new-world-order-ushering plunge occurs.

     

  • Paul Craig Roberts Exposes "The Stench Of Raw Propaganda"

    Authored by Paul Craig Roberts,

    I just heard the rawest kind of propaganda from former presstitute David Satter, who hangs out at the right-wing Hudson Institute and pretends to be an expert on Russia and Putin.

    On August 10 Satter told NPR’s audience that Washington’s hope to bring peace to Syria would fail unless Washington understood that the Russian government had no humanitarian feelings and did not care about the loss of human life. What Washington needs to do, said Satter, was to make sure that Putin and his henchmen understood that they would be held accountable as war criminals.

    Watch the latest video at video.foxnews.com

    I should be hardened by now, but it never fails to astonish me that agents for the elite are willing to tell the most blatant and transparant lies. Perhaps this is because they know that the media and their fellow bought-and-paid-for “experts” will not challenge them on their statements. In fact, this is the way explanations are controlled and history rewritten.

    Perhaps everyone has already forgotten that when Washington’s plan to invade Syria was blocked by the UK Parliament and Russian diplomacy, Washington sent the forces used against Gaddafi in Libya to overthrow Assad in Syria where they emerged as ISIS and commit extraordinary atrocities.

    As ISIS was serving Washington’s purpose, Washington took no action against them. After a couple of years of death and destruction suffered by Syrians, the Russian government lost its patience and backed the Syrian Army with air power. Soon ISIS was defeated and on the run.

    Washington was caught in a bind. In Iraq Washington was fighting ISIS, because ISIS was overthrowing Washington’s puppet in Iraq. However, in Syria Washington was supporting ISIS, often characterizing ISIS as “moderates” fighting to bring democracy to Syria. Now that ISIS is on the verge of total defeat in Syria, Washington’s whores among the “experts” want Russia punished for blocking Washington’s overthrow of Syria.

    In the 21st century the numerous war crimes are all accounted for by the US and Israel. These crimes were enabled by the EU which provided cover for the official lies, such as Iraqi weapons of mass destruction and Iranian nukes, that were used by Washington for its unprovoked aggressions that have destroyed in whole or part seven countries.

    Real experts have integrity, and these experts want the Clinton, George W. Bush, and Obama regimes tried for their war crimes. I think David Satter should be in the dock with them.

  • Saudi Arabia Needs To Cut Oil Production (Video)

    By EconMatters


    The bottom line is that the only way the oil market rebalances in the near future is if Saudi Arabia cuts Oil Production. They are realistically the only party that can pull this production cut off right now.

    © EconMatters All Rights Reserved | Facebook | Twitter | YouTube | Email Digest | Kindle   

  • A New Gartman Record: Stopped Out At A 2.5% Loss In One Day

    For anyone who still doubts the power of fading Dennis Gartman, let this be a lesson to you.

    From his Tuesday, August 9, Gartman Letter:

    Cotton prices have plunged overnight on the  news that China will extend its sales of cotton from its reserves through the end of September. China has been selling cotton from its reserves for the past several months as demand from its cotton spinners for supplies to meet the demand for cloth have increased materially. This time, however, China has increased the amount of cotton it will released, previously stating that it was going to allow for 1.7 million tonnes of cotton to be sold from the reserve but now increasing that to 2.0 million tonnes. We have been waiting for this announcement to finally step up to buy cotton and with prices plunging today we’ll do exactly that. Those who cannot trade futures should avail themselves of the cotton ETF, BAL, listed on the NYSE. However, be certain to put in limit orders, not market orders. Cotton is trading 2% lower this morning and thus orders in BAL should be placed 1.9-2.1% below last night’s close, but no higher.

     

    NEW RECOMMENDATION: We’ve waited to own cotton on a break and it is breaking hard this morning on the news out of China discussed above. We’ll buy new crop December cotton at or near to $74.25 and for now we’ll risk no more than 2% on the trade. Those using BAL… the cotton ETF… should be prepared to buy it on a limit order no higher than $49.60 vs. the close yesterday on the NYSE of $50.69

    And then, from Wednesday, August 10, some 24 hours later.

    We hand here at TGL, had a second ill day in a row, wrecked by our position in cotton, for we bought the cotton ETF and suffered sharply as a result. For the year-to- date, we are up 4.8%, now modestly under-performing  our International Index and rather badly under-performing a simple long position in the S&P.

     

    It has taken only twenty four hours to prove us wrong and we are stopped out for a loss of a bit more than 2.5%. We’ll return to cotton… sooner rather than later, but for now we are wrong!

    Remember: Gartman is now bullish: “We’ve no choice. We have to dance with TINA… There Is No Alternative…until the music stops even though we do not like the music and we do not like the band.”

  • ISIS 2.0: Terrorist Organization Launches Social-Media-Block 'Workaround' Browser Plug-In

    The Islamic State is beefing up its online propaganda and recruitment efforts with the release of a downloadable web-browser plugin for its Amaq newswire.

    As The Foreign Desk's Lisa Daftari reports, appearing Sunday on the terror group’s social media channels, a prompt allows users to download a packaged extension file to install the plugin in the Firefox browser and then access the latest Amaq news website directly from the toolbar.

    The problem

    The plugin represents yet another front in the online battle ISIS is waging as it seeks to establish a ‘Digital Caliphate’ and to continue broadcasting victories and announcements to the world.

    With the ongoing campaign by the U.S.-led coalition pegging back the terror group militarily in Syria and Iraq, ISIS has intensified online activities publishing high definition videos of attacks, color digital magazines, daily news bulletins and radio broadcasts to an array of blogs, websites and social media platforms.

    Online, tech companies continue to fight the terror group, minimizing its platform and ability to spread.

    Jihadi tweets were down 45 percent from two years ago, an Obama administration official stated last month, as Twitter continues to shut down thousands of ISIS-affiliated accounts.

    Similar purges by Facebook and Google have removed thousands of Facebook pages and YouTube accounts that are attempting to disseminate the Islamic State’s message.

    There have also been similar moves by blogs such as WordPress and Tubmlr as well as other social media platforms such as Telegram Messenger, the current social media platform of choice for jihadis.

    The U.S. has simultaneously launched a counter-extremism drive with an anti-ISIS message online.

    The jihadi workaround

    While a suspended Twitter account or Facebook page makes it harder for followers to find jihadi accounts, as replacement accounts differ slightly by username, the Firefox plugin would appear to work around that issue as information becomes readily available through a click of the toolbar button.

    As soon as law enforcement and counterterror agencies move to intercept the web domain currently linked to by the plugin, Jihadis can reroute the url to a new domain, putting their latest news and propaganda effortlessly in the hands of any ISIS supporter.

    In the two days that the plugin has been available, The Foreign Desk has observed the current Amaq news website has remained online, protected by a Cloudflare mask that protects the domain from DDOS attacks, and updates have been published to the site ahead of the group’s Telegram channel postings.

    Amaq

    Established in 2014 as an ‘alternative to Western media’s’ coverage of the group, Amaq News Agency has emerged as an outlet widely cited by global news networks as an official ‘State-run’ media arm of the Caliphate.

    In the immediate aftermath of ISIS attacks, notably the Paris attacks of November 2015, and more recently the Brussels, Bangladesh and Nice attacks, experts in the West have been increasingly monitoring the Amaq news feeds for ISIS claims of responsibility.

  • The More The Establishment Freaks Out Over Trump, The More Attractive He Becomes

    Submitted by Charles Hugh-Smith via OfTwoMinds blog,

    Trump is attractive precisely because the Establishment fears and loathes him because 1) they didn't pick him and 2) he might upset the neoconservative Empire that the Establishment elites view as their global entitlement.

    The Establishment is freaking out about Donald Trump for one reason: they didn't pick him. The Establishment is freaking out because the natural order of things is that we pick the presidential candidates and we run the country to serve ourselves, i.e. the financial-political elites.

    Donald Trump's candidacy upsets this neofeudal natural order, and thus he (and everyone who supports him) is anathema to the Establishment, heretics who must be silenced, cowed, marginalized, mocked and ultimately put back in their place as subservient debt-serfs.

    With Trump ascendant, the serfs are selecting the noble in the castle on the hill. Outrageous! Unheard of!

    You know the Establishment is freaking out when Establishment pundit mouthpieces like David Brooks and Francis Fukuyama are freaking out about Trump. David Brooks could not restrain his disdain for Trump on a recent Charlie Rose segment, in which he intoned (and I paraphrase) that Trump can't put eight words together without referring to himself, i.e. he is not just a narcissist, but he is (take this, Trump!) a fragile narcissist— unlike people like Brooks, of course, who are solid, secure, wise, well-educated, erudite water-carriers for the status quo.

    Policy heavy-hitter Fukuyama confesses the political system in the U.S. is broken but he can't understand why the citizenry has selected the "singularly inappropriate instrument" (his description of Trump in the pages of Foreign Affairs) of Donald Trump to express their disdain for their neofeudal lords.

    Well, Mr, Fukuyama, let me explain it to you: the debt-serfs have selected Trump precisely because the neofeudal financial-political nobility you represent consider him a "singularly inappropriate instrument".

    But, the pundits rage, he's a narcissist. He's fragile. (Now isn't that a classic middle-brow slam from the hopelessly middle-brow ("I only sound middle-brow due to my starring role in the mainstream media; actually I'm brilliant beyond words") Brooks.

    Policy guru Fukuyama has a much better turn of phrase, of course: "narcissist" is way too common and middle-brow a critique at his level. Thus we get "singularly inappropriate instrument" (ooh, now there's a sharpened blade that slips easily between the ribs).

    Dear Establishment pundits, flacks, hacks, sycophants, apparatchiks, toadies, lackeys, functionaries, leeches and apologists: the more you label Trump as "singularly inappropriate," the more attractive he becomes to the 81% who've been left behind by the financialized-globalized-neofeudal order that has so greatly enhanced your own wealth, influence and power.

    Trump is attractive because the Establishment fears and loathes him. Why? 1) They didn't pick him and 2) he might upset the neoconservative liberal hegemony Empire that the Establishment elites view as their global entitlement.

    The elitists like Brooks and Fukuyama admit that politics have failed. But they believe the solution is more people like us in power. You know, reasonable, well-educated elitists who won't stoop to get our hands dirty with laundered millions (for example, the Clinton Foundation).

    The utter cluelessness of the professional apologists and punditry would be laughable if it wasn't so pathetic: the more you fume and rage that Trump is unqualified, narcissistic, singularly inappropriate, etc. etc. etc., the more appealing he becomes to everyone who isn't inside the protective walls of your neofeudal castle.

    The people outside the cozy walls of the protected elites don't care if he is unqualified (by the standards of those who get to pick our presidents for us) narcissistic, singularly inappropriate, and so on–they are cheering him on because you, the multitudes of water-carriers for the Imperial elites, the teeming hordes of well-paid, I-got-mine-so-shut-the-heck-up pundits, flacks, hacks, sycophants, apparatchiks, toadies, lackeys, functionaries, leeches and apologists, are so visibly afraid that your perks, wealth, influence and power might drain away if the 80% actually get a say.

    Dear pundits, flacks, hacks, sycophants, apparatchiks, toadies, lackeys, functionaries, leeches and apologists: we're sick of you, every one of you, and the neofeudal Empire you support. We want you cashiered, pushed outside the walls with the rest of us, scraping by on well-earned and richly deserved unemployment.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 10th August 2016

  • French Tourism Tumbles 10% On Average Following Terrorist Attacks

    Submitted by Michael Shedlock via MishTalk.com,

    Want to know how much European tourism declined in the wake of terrorist attacks?

    Today, a translated Le Monde (The World) headline readsAfter the Attacks, Foreign Tourists Leave France“.

    In the first six months of the year, the number of overnight stays of foreign tourists in France fell by an average of 10%, due to concerns over the attacks, said Secretary of State for tourism promotion, Matthias Fekl, in an interview with the Sunday newspaper.

    Decline in Numbers

    • In Paris, the hotel occupancy fell by 9.8 points to 78.1% in July compared to last year, according to figures from the Economic Observatory of Paris tourism.
    • Airline reservations for American tourists declined by 19.2% between 25 and 31 July, while they were up 14% between June 27 and July 3.
    • Airline reservations of the British fell 23% last week of July, under the combined effect of the attacks, the Brexit and the fall of the pound, according to Thomas Deschamps, economic and Observatory Paris tourism statistics.
    • The festival of Bayonne posted a decline in attendance of 20%.
    • The Loire castles, one of the most visited castles in France, experienced a general decline in attendance of 6%, but a fall of 20% for Japanese customers, according to its CEO Jean d’Haussonville, quoted in Le Parisien last week.
    • The firm Protourisme estimates convention cancellations and works council bookings related to business tourism will be down 5% to 10% in September compared to last year.

    Overall French hotel occupancy has fallen between 5 and 10% YoY…

     

    And French RevPar has now tumbled 10 straight months…

     

    Les Miserables, indeed!

  • Redneck Investin Part 1 – A look from the other side

    While we often get caught up in discussions about QE and gold storage reports, it’s easy to forget the realities in life that most humans face on planet Earth.  Let’s face it – you need spare money to invest.  And not a few extra coins – you need real cash.  We tried to explain Forex in Splitting Pennies for the common man, as they are the real losers in Forex.

    We get questions all the time from common folk who don’t know about investing.  Not all are poor.  One great example is a older trust fund baby with $100 Million in a Bank of America Savings account “Ain’t nobody touchin’ MY MONEY!” he’d say.  

    So, for all of you who are not qualfied investors – here’s your practical poor-man’s guide to investing.  And it’s short – only 1 page!  This is also a good read for those who want a different outlook, to understand a little about how ‘the other side’ lives.

    Rule #1 – If you only have $1,000 to invest, the only reasonable investment is in CANNED FOOD which can be stored for up to 20 years.  Because Food inflation, depending on how you calculate it, is about 10% – 20% per year or more.  Certain food items can experience a permanent ‘adjustment’ of 50% – 100% for example due to weather factors or other circumstances.  Where else can you get 20% per year returns nearly guaranteed?  Plus, if the investment doesn’t work out or you get desperate, you can eat it.  It’s a win-win.  The best way to store this food is in large PVC pipes dug deep into the ground, the cans can be connected with duct tape and lowered into the pipes.  When you need some money – just pull up your in ground savings account!  It will be safe here from the IRS and from pesky hungry neighbors.  No capital gains tax here.

    Redneck Arbitrage Strategies

    Coin Hoarding 

    A penny is worth more than a penny.  Not only in the United States – in Russia too!  Take this strategy international!  In the US, it’s illegal to melt pennies.  But that may not always be the case.  And if you think this strategy is only for Rednecks, think again. 

    Kyle Bass is a Nickel Hoarder (but, he had to buy them from the Fed due to the large quantity):

    At the time of the mega-purchase of 20 million circulated nickels in 2011, the coins contained 6.8 cents apiece in metallic value per planchet. Nickel and copper have dropped since that time, and the current melt price is just under face value according to the Coinflation web site. Since Bass paid face value for his nickel hoard, there was no downside risk.  Obtaining such a vast amount of 5-cent pieces obviously requires more than ordering the coins through normal channels such as armored car companies. This multi-ton request had to be filled by the Federal Reserve. When the Fed asked Bass why he wanted a cool million in Jeffersons, he calmly replied “I like nickels.”

    Postage Stamp Arbitrage

    This is illegal and information about this strategy is provided only to demonstrate how ridiculous the financial system is, in its current state and form.  FOR EDUCATIONAL PURPOSES ONLY – DO NOT CONSIDER ACTUALLY DOING THIS!!! “Forever” stamps sell at current single stamp value of $.47; they were $.41 in April 2oo7; about a 12% increase.  12% you’re thinking – it’s nuthin.  But it’s guaranteed!  And people always need stamps.  Checkout this site for historical stamp data.

    Although, investors here should note the value actually DROPPED in last 2 years.  But this has been a historical anomaly.

    Rule #2 – Keep a savings account in heavy metal stored in remote locations.  Make regular ‘deposits’ to this account by spending an afternoon ‘scrapping’ – collecting unused metal garbage such as appliances, cars, metal frames, railroad tracks (abandoned, of course) and other metal objects.  Don’t go near electrical wires!  They are live and will shock you!

    Free Money Claims

    Cash in, on a class – action.  Anyone is eligible to get a check.  Did you smoke Marlboro cigarettes in the late 90’s while living in east Massachusetts?  You may be eligible for a big reward.  Did you purchase Tom’s Toothpaste in the last few years?  Sites such as Free Money Claims list class actions that are open for joining.

    Civil War Treasure Hunting

    If you’ve got a lot of time, and if you’re poor or on the dole probably you do, and you like the outdoors, nuthin better than a good ol’ treasure hunt!  Spend some time doing some research, get the gear – and go hunt!  You’ve got nothing to lose.  In the worst case, you spend a day or two hiking through the woods and get some good excercise.  It’s out there:

    ..there are reports that there is a cache of Civil War-era valuables worth upwards of $350,000 buried deep in the woods of Fairfax County, Virginia.

    If you think Redneck investin’ is a dead end- you haven’t been following CNBC.  There’s billions in this budding domestic ’emerging market.’

    The south will rise again!

    If you want a quick Forex education, checkout Splitting Pennies – the pocket guide designed to instantly make you a Forex genius!

    If you want to get started looking at investing, checkout Fortress Capital Forex

    For financial institutions, checkout Liquid Claims Securities Settlement Serivces.

  • "It's One Gigantic Lawless Crime Scene" – Exposing The Dirty Business of U.S. 'Think Tanks'

    Submitted by Mike Krieger via Liberty Blitzkrieg blog,

    Many of you have already read this past Sunday’s excellent and deeply disturbing article published by the New York Times regarding the shady and inappropriate activities regularly conducted by U.S. “think tanks.” If you haven’t read it yet, I highly suggest you take the time to do so.

    It’s important to acknowledge that the U.S. economy has morphed into one gigantic lawless crime scene. An environment in which crony insiders who add zero value to society parasitically feast on the country’s treasure. In the case of so-called “think tanks,” we have organizations receiving copious taxpayer subsidies for the privilege of screwing over the American public.

    To understand the topic further, I present you with some excerpts from the article titled, Researchers or Corporate Allies? Think Tanks Blur the Line:

    Think tanks, which position themselves as “universities without students,” have power in government policy debates because they are seen as researchers independent of moneyed interests. But in the chase for funds, think tanks are pushing agendas important to corporate donors, at times blurring the line between researchers and lobbyists. And they are doing so while reaping the benefits of their tax-exempt status, sometimes without disclosing their connections to corporate interests.

     

    Thousands of pages of internal memos and confidential correspondence between Brookings and other donors — like JPMorgan Chase, the nation’s largest bank; K.K.R., the global investment firm; Microsoft, the software giant; and Hitachi, the Japanese conglomerate — show that financial support often came with assurances from Brookings that it would provide “donation benefits,” including setting up events featuring corporate executives with government officials, according to documents obtained by The New York Times and the New England Center for Investigative Reporting.

     

    “This is about giant corporations who figured out that by spending, hey, a few tens of millions of dollars, if they can influence outcomes here in Washington, they can make billions of dollars,” said Senator Elizabeth Warren, Democrat of Massachusetts, a frequent critic of undisclosed Wall Street donations to think tanks.

     

    Washington has seen a proliferation of think tanks, particularly small institutions with narrow interests tied to specific industries. At the same time, the brand names of the field have experienced explosive growth. Brookings’s annual budget has doubled in the last decade, to $100 million. The American Enterprise Institute is spending at least $80 million on a new headquarters in Washington, not far from where the Center for Strategic and International Studies built a $100 million office tower.

    The U.S. economy would be infinitely better if everyone in Washington D.C. blasted off to space in a rocket ship.

    The likely conclusions of some think tank reports, documents show, are discussed with donors — or even potential ones — before the research is complete. Drafts of the studies have been shared with donors whose opinions have then helped shape final reports.

     

    Donors have outlined how the resulting scholarship will be used as part of broader lobbying efforts. The think tanks also help donors promote their corporate brands, as Brookings does with JPMorgan Chase, whose $15.5 million contribution is the largest by a private corporation in the institution’s history.

     

    Despite these benefits, corporations can write off the donations as charitable contributions. Some tax experts say these arrangements may amount to improper subsidies by taxpayers if think tanks are providing specific services.

     

    “People think of think tanks as do-gooders, uncompromised and not bought like others in the political class,” said Bill Goodfellow, the executive director of the Center for International Policy, a Washington-based think tank. “But it’s absurd to suggest that donors don’t have influence. The danger is we in the think tank world are being corrupted in the same way as the political world. And all of us should be worried about it.”

    Indeed, “think tanks” represent a key, overlooked player in the never-ending information war being waged against the American public. A war specifically designed to shape public perception in favor of policies that go against our best interests while making a handful of people extremely wealthy.

    “We strongly believe in our model of seeking solutions to some of our country’s most difficult problems,” John J. Hamre, the chief executive at C.S.I.S., said in a written reply to questions. “We gather stakeholders, vet ideas, find areas of agreement and highlight areas of disagreement.” 

    Emphasis on “stakeholders,” i.e. corporate sponsors. If these think tanks are actually working in the best interests of the country, why is inequality soaring and why has the middle class been destroyed so efficiently?

    Yet researchers at think tanks are seeing corporate influence firsthand. Rachel Stohl, a senior associate at the Stimson Center in Washington, said she had been quizzed by potential donors as she tried to raise money for research on the military’s use of armed drones.

    “‘Are you going to say drones are bad?’” she recalled one potential financial backer asking. “‘We are not interested in funding something that says drones are bad.’”

     

    The confidential Brookings spreadsheet had an unassuming title: Corporate Overviews Tracking. It listed nearly 90 corporations, from Alcoa to Wells Fargo, providing a glimpse of the vast electronic file that Brookings maintained on donors and prospects, and the benefits it might offer.

     

    The database, along with thousands of pages of emails, solicitations for money and memos on meetings with corporate officials, highlighted Brookings’s practice of assuring that donors would see results from their contributions.

    So why exactly are taxpayers subsidizing this behavior?

    K.K.R., after starting special funds around 2010 to invest in real estate and other infrastructure projects, donated $450,000 to Brookings, some of it as the institution agreed to set up meetings for a top K.K.R. executive with community leaders in Philadelphia and Detroit, where the company was considering real estate projects. Brookings separately produced a report, published on K.K.R.’s website, promoting one of the company’s infrastructure projects in New Jersey, after the company executive suggested such a piece.

     

    Lennar joined Brookings’s Metropolitan Leadership Council, established for the program’s top donors, in July 2010. That month, the company won approval to redevelop Hunters Point in San Francisco, turning the area into a more than 700-acre mix of housing, education and commercial development.

     

    Brookings would later name the project one of the three most “transformative investments in the United States.”

     

    The San Francisco project generated controversy from the beginning, with critics concerned about toxic waste left by the former Navy shipyard.

     

    Follow-up memos were more explicit: Brookings, as it sought an additional $50,000 from Lennar in 2014, said it was prepared to “use our convening power, research expertise, network connections and knowledge of innovative practices to help further drive the ultimate impact and success” of Lennar’s project and to “provide public validation of San Francisco’s efforts through national and local media coverage.”

     

    The think tank soon delivered.

    Screen Shot 2016-08-09 at 10.50.56 AM

    All this corporate marketing paid for with taxpayer subsidies. Good gig if you can get it.

    Hitachi has been another large donor to the metropolitan program, giving a total of $1.8 million to Brookings over the last decade, according to Brookings documents. The think tank reviewed the company’s corporate marketing and sales strategy targeting the United States, an internal memo shows. Brookings also organized public events that featured top Obama administration officials and allowed Hitachi executives to promote their products.

     

    When JPMorgan offered a major donation to the metropolitan program in 2011, Brookings created the Global Cities Initiative, complete with a new logo that called it a “joint project of Brookings and JPMorgan Chase.”

     

    The project was premised on a common interest between the bank and the think tank. Brookings wanted to promote economic growth in cities by encouraging international trade, and JPMorgan wanted to gain new business by offering loans to companies in the same markets.

     

    Mr. Indyk and executives from JPMorgan said the company and the think tank simply agreed on a worthy agenda.

     

    “This was about growing the economy, and we are incredibly proud of the results of this initiative,” said Peter Scher, the head of the corporate responsibility program at JPMorgan. “We believe it’s had a huge impact in more than 30 cities that are involved.”

     

    At the same time, hundreds of pages of memos — status reports to JPMorgan, internal reports by Brookings staff to prepare for meetings with top bank executives, and formal documents soliciting more money — make clear that Brookings saw the Global Cities Initiative as a branding effort that could help JPMorgan bolster its standing in cities.

     

    “Bottom line: Growing metro economies is good for the nation and for JPMC; also, many U.S. cities are JPMC clients — motivation to support them and their clients,” said one Brookings document dated July 2011, as officials from the think tank met with top bank executives to discuss a planned donation that eventually totaled $15 million.

     

    The Global Cities Initiative, another document written by a Brookings senior fellow explained, “must mean a marriage between JPMC corporate interests” and “Brookings continued thought leadership.”

     

    JPMorgan, in a document dated a month before the agreement was signed, said the pending donation to Brookings “deepens/extends relationships with important client base among business and civic leaders both in the U.S. and abroad.”

     

    At times, Brookings officials seemed worried they were not doing enough for the bank.

     

    This is all so gross…

    Screen Shot 2016-08-09 at 11.04.19 AM

     

    Donations from the corporations to Brookings are tax exempt based on the premise that the think tank’s work benefits the public good, not a company’s bottom line.

     

    But two lawyers who specialize in nonprofit law — Miranda Perry Fleischer, a professor at the University of San Diego School of Law, and Clifford Perlman, a partner at a New York-based firm — said Brookings’s agreements raised questions.

     

    “Tax deductions are subsidies that are paid for by all taxpayers,” Ms. Fleischer said. “And the reason the subsidy is provided is that the charitable organization is supposed to be doing something for the public good, not that specifically benefits the private individual or corporation in the form of providing them goods or services.”

    Apparently “the public good” now equals helping big cities and big banks. You know, those suffering the most from American neo-feudalism.

    While all the above is disgusting and unacceptable, what follows is even worse. It shows how the corruption and cronyism of think tanks can directly lead to the exportation of war and death abroad.

    General Atomics, the California-based manufacturer of Predator drones, had a clear problem. Prospects for sales were falling as the wars in Afghanistan and Iraq wound down. The company wanted the Obama administration to change its policy to allow for sales to other countries, a lucrative proposition.

     

    “When the budgets are going down in the U.S., you would like to be able to export more,” Frank Pace, the president of the company’s aircraft systems group, told a Reuters reporter in late 2013 at an air show in Dubai.

    How this man lives with himself, I’ll never know.

    At about that time, the industry turned to the Center for Strategic and International Studies for help, providing money that the think tank used to conduct a study on drone policy, including exports.

     

    C.S.I.S. set up confidential meetings at its headquarters with company representatives, inviting top officials from the Navy, the Air Force, the Marine Corps, the Coast Guard, the State Department and the office of the defense secretary, according to emails and other documents obtained by The Times through open records requests.

     

    As a think tank, the Center for Strategic and International Studies did not file a lobbying report, but the goals of the effort were clear.

    In this economy, everything is a loophole, everything is a swindle.

    “Political obstacles to export,” read the agenda of one closed-door “working group” meeting organized by Mr. Brannen that included Tom Rice, a lobbyist in General Atomics’s Washington office, on the invitation lists, the emails show.

     

    Boeing and Lockheed Martin, drone makers that were major C.S.I.S. contributors, were also invited to attend the sessions, the emails show. The meetings and research culminated with a report released in February 2014 that reflected the industry’s priorities.

    But the effort did not stop there.

     

    Mr. Brannen initiated meetings with Defense Department officials and congressional staff to push for the recommendations, which also included setting up a new Pentagon office to give more focus to acquisition and deployment of drones. The center also stressed the need to ease export limits at a conference it hosted at its headquarters featuring top officials from the Navy, the Air Force and the Marine Corps.

     

    Mr. Brannen, who has since left C.S.I.S., declined to comment. The think tank insisted that its efforts to influence administration policy were not lobbying.

    What a heaping pile of bullshit.

    One thing is clear: The result was a victory for General Atomics.

     

    In February 2015, almost one year after the C.S.I.S. report was issued, the State Department announced a clarification of its rules, easing final approval that month for General Atomics’s long-planned sale of unarmed Predator drones to the United Arab Emirates, the first such sale to a non-NATO nation. The think tank report was just one of many voices pushing for the change.

     

    A State Department spokesman said that while the government officials involved in the review had received opinions from think tanks and industry officials, “at the end of the day, this is a considered U.S. government policy.”

    There you have it folks. Just another tale from the putrid and hopelessly corrupt U.S. economy.

    Naturally, we shouldn’t be the least bit surprised that one of the most destructive human beings in modern American history is a Distinguished Fellow in Residence at the Brookings Institution. Yes, you know who I’m talking about…

    Screen Shot 2016-08-09 at 11.19.23 AM

    Thanks for playin’ America.

    Screen Shot 2016-08-09 at 11.22.00 AM

  • Some Olympic Athletes Are Chasing Huge Gold Medal Bonuses

    If you’re a world-class British athlete, it may well be time to consider emigration to Singapore… judging by the colossal variance in gold medal bonuses on offer by various nations at The Olympics.

    The glory of winning a gold medal is a massive incentive for athletes competing in Rio but, as Statista’s Niall McCarthy reports, the impressive bonuses on offer add another more lucrative dimension to the games.

    The size of the bonus on offer varies hugely by country. For example, British athletes do not receive bonus for winning a gold medal whereas American competitors get $25,000 for every gold they take home. 

    Successful athletes from Singapore are awarded a prize of $1 million Singapore dollars, not a bad day at the office at all.

    Singapore has never won a gold medal…

    Though all eyes will be on Singapore’s great medal hope Joseph Schooling who made an impressive start to Rio 2016 with a powerful swim in the 100m freestyle heats on Tuesday.

    Indonesia offers its successful Olympians around $380,000, according to Fox Sports Australia. The following infographic provides an overview of the biggest estimated cash rewards for gold medal winners in Rio (the values were converted from Australian to U.S. dollars).

    This chart shows the estimated bonus per gold medal at the Olympic Games in Rio…

    Infographic: Some Athletes Are Chasing Huge Gold Medal Bonuses | Statista
    You will find more statistics at Statista

    So we have four years to move to Singapore, gain citizenship somehow, overdose on PEDs, become a world-class ______[BLANK]______, and ride off into the sunset with our $750,000! Doesn’t seem so hard.

  • Here's How A US-China War Could Play Out

    Authored by Peter Apps, originally posted at Reuters.com,

    For all the focus on terrorism, one of the most striking features of the last decade is that the risk of war between the world’s major countries has returned. For the first time since the fall of the Berlin wall, military thinkers in the United States, Europe and Asia are putting serious thought into what such a conflict might look like.

    For a world with no shortage of nuclear weapons, that’s alarming. As I wrote last month, there is now not just a credible – if still limited – risk of conflict between Russia and NATO states, but also a real risk any such war would go nuclear.

    Last week, U.S.-based think tank RAND Corporation – which also studied the prospects of war in the NATO member Baltic states – unveiled its latest thinking on what a potential clash between the United States and China would look like. The report is not direct U.S. government policy – although RAND has long been regarded as a major generator of thought for the U.S. military – but it does push the envelope further than much that has gone before.

    The report stresses that while premeditated war between Washington and Beijing ”is very unlikely,” the mishandling of disputes like the multiple territorial confrontations between China and U.S. allies such as Japan and the Philippines are a “danger” that “cannot be ignored.”

    RAND examined two different scenarios, one for an inadvertent conflict taking place in the present day and one in 10 years from now, assuming Beijing’s military and economic buildup continues at roughly its current rate. China will substantially close its military gap with the United States over the next decade, it predicts – but the fundamental dynamics of how things will play out might not be hugely different.

    Even now, the People’s Liberation Army is seen as having the ability to give a bloodied nose to U.S. forces in the region. Washington could expect to lose an aircraft carrier and multiple other surface warships in the opening stages, RAND warns, citing Chinese advances in ballistic and guided missiles as well as submarines.

    The report does not estimate the number of human casualties, but they could be substantial. The loss of an aircraft carrier or several major surface warships could easily cost thousands of lives in an instant.

    At the same time, it’s also generally assumed that both Beijing and Washington would have considerable success with cyber attacks.

    As another recent report points out, China’s effectiveness would difficult to gauge – not least because it has not participated in a major conflict since invading Vietnam in 1979.

    The real decision for Washington would be how much military force to commit to the Asia Pacific theater. Other threats and responsibilities would not have gone away – the Middle East would almost certainly still be a mess and the risk of Russian action in Europe might actually be heightened. Still, the United States would have considerable reserves of aircraft and ships in reserve.

    Whether a conflict only endured days or weeks or dragged on for a year or more, Washington would almost certainly retain the ability to strike widely at Chinese targets across the battle space – including, in at least a limited way, into mainland China. Over time, Beijing could face the destruction of most, if not all, of its major surface naval forces. Its relatively primitive submarines would also likely be fairly easy picking, RAND predicts, although that will probably be less true by 2025.

    The real battle of attrition, however, would be economic – as it almost always is when great powers confront each other. On that front, the consequences for China could be devastating.

    Washington and Beijing are each other’s most significant trading partners. The report estimates that 90 percent of that bilateral trade would cease if the two were in direct military confrontation for a year. That would hurt both sides, but the United States could likely continue trade with much of the rest of the world while almost all imports and exports to China would have to pass by sea through a war zone.

    Perhaps most importantly, China might find itself cut off from vital external energy sources while Washington’s energy supply chain would be far less affected.

    While RAND estimates a year-long Asian war would take 5-10 percent off U.S. gross domestic product, it believes China’s economy could shrink by up to 25 percent.

    These are good reasons why war should never happen. Even if miscalculations pushed both countries to the brink, it’s all but impossible to make a logical argument for either side to push things over the edge. The danger, therefore, would seem to be primarily ill-conceived actions that might cause a World War One-style escalation.

    In the case of the United States and China, RAND’s analysts say they believe nuclear escalation would likely be avoided even if both sides fought prolonged naval and air battles. That’s a major departure in Western military thinking from the days of the Cold War, when nuclear escalation was seen an almost inevitable consequence of any direct conventional clash.

    Whether that’s certain is a different question. Wars tend to develop their own horrific internal logic and momentum, and the temptation to move to more powerful weapons is ever present.

    For now, there’s no evidence that Beijing has adopted Moscow’s thinking on “de-escalatory nuclear strikes,” using a single nuclear warhead in an attempt to shock a Western adversary into standing down and ending the conflict. But it’s possible to imagine that happening.

    It’s becoming increasingly important to consider scenarios like these. It we don’t, the unthinkable might quietly – or worse still– suddenly and brutally become reality.

  • As California Water Wells Run Dry, Kelly Slater Builds 65 Million Gallon "Perfect Wave" Tank

    Back in December 2015, international surfing phenom Kelly Slater set the internet abuzz when he released video footage of himself surfing what he called the “perfect” man made wave. Slater made headlines again in May 2016 when he announced the sale of a majority stake in his Kelly Slater Wave Company to the World Surf League, an organization that hosts surfing competitions around the globe (terms of the sale were not disclosed). We have to admit, it’s pretty awesome, dude. 

    A surfer riding a wave at the Kelly Slater Wave Company site in Lemoore, Calif.

     

    Turns out that the perfect man made wave happens to be located in the middle of California’s Central Valley, over 100 miles from the coast.  For those of you not familiar with the Central Valley, it’s an agricultural oasis in the middle of California that produces a large percentage of the fruits and vegetables consumed in this country (see our post entitled “California Is Turning Back Into A Desert And There Are No Contingency Plans“). The problem, as we’ve pointed out multiple times on this site, is that California’s historic drought has forced farmers in the Central Valley to fallow over 500,000 acres in recent years due to a lack of water.  In fact, as can be seen in the charts below, state and federal water allocations to farmers in recent years have been all but non-existent.  That said, farmers aren’t the only ones making sacrifices, water wells are running dry for rural homeowners in the Central Valley and Jerry Brown imposed the State’s first ever mandatory water restrictions on residential consumers back in 2015.

    CVP

    SWP

     

    For those reasons and so many more, we were a little surprised to discover that Kelly Slater’s “perfect wave” found its home in the Central Valley of California.  We just have to question the logic of state/county officials who approved a 65 million gallon (give or take a few million) man-made wave pool in the middle of farmland fallowed due a lack of water.  Are we missing something here?  So farmers can’t get water deliveries due to environmental restrictions imposed to save an invasive fish species (see “California Drought Worsens – El Nino ‘Gains’ Flushed Into The Pacific As Water Storage Runs Dry“) but a surfer can build a giant “perfect wave” for private use by himself and couple of buddies? 

    But hey, at least the water situation is getting better.

    Cali

     

    Oh well, just enjoy the video and forget we said anything.

  • China Food Inflation Looms As Ag Output Set To Plunge Most In 50 Years Amid Historic 'La Nina'

    Via Investing In Chinese Stocks blog,

    The 2016 La Nina is set to be bigger than 1998 and that was one of the strongest ever. It was a bad hurricane season in the Southeast United States, and the effects of La Nina lasted for more than 2 years, eventually draining natural gas inventories due to colder than normal winters, sending prices to $10 / MMBtu.

    China is also concerned due to flooding and the effect on food prices.

    At the beginning of this summer, Anhui, Guangxi, Guizhou, Hubei and other areas have suffered large floods, local residents and property caused substantial losses. China's major cities weather data from the World Agricultural Outlook Board released data show that average precipitation of various cities in recent signs of deviation from normal is obvious central elevation.

     

    Logically speaking, choose to take the data itself is a deviation from the normal value, if the normal value is an average value within a sufficiently long period of time, then the data in the long run should be at a zero value fluctuate. Location but in fact, the average annual precipitation of various cities has deviated from the normal 20 mm / month or more shock for nearly a year, sometimes even reaching 55 mm / month as much.

     

    Large amount of precipitation and frequent storms across the board so that the Yangtze River above the warning level, superimposed on the arrival of the main flood season influence the formation of summer flooding a large area. Up to now, the country has 26 provinces suffered floods, which affected counties have more than a thousand. Why this year the weather is so abnormal it? This is the El Niño phenomenon has a direct correlation. El Nino from the tropical Pacific SST anomalies warming, thereby causing global climate (especially in the Pacific Rim region) exception, in accordance with its laws of history, El emergence period is probably about seven years, but not appear every time El Niño will huge disasters, because even if this phenomenon leads to abnormal weather, there is stress.

     

    Measure an important indicator of the El Nino phenomenon is the SST anomalies (published in the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration), the data show that in 2015 – 2016 SST anomalies have reached a high of 2.82, higher than the 1982–1983 years 2.79 and 1997– 2.69 in 1998. The data show that this year's El Nino phenomenon is worse than in 1998, even NASA (National Aeronautics and Space Administration) expectations: the strongest El Niño may debut in 2016.

     

    …Once the abnormal weather caused crop failures, then the prices of agricultural products there will move up the role, which led to changes in the domestic CPI.

    The last two strong La Ninas caused drops in agricultural output:

    First, once the abnormal weather led to rising prices of agricultural products, it will cut production of agricultural products through this link.

     

    In the past 50 years of food production, the lowest growth rate appeared in those two years. Once in 1985 and once in 2000, grain output fell 7% in the former, while the latter's food production fell 9%. These two serious cuts to food occurred in the third year after the El Nino phenomenon, and therefore, a conclusion can basically get is: are these two food production caused by the El Nino weather anomaly caused.

    Chinese grain output went negative in 1999 and didn't recover until 2004:

    Second, 1997–1998 years that floods seem bigger impact on the agricultural harvest. Since 1998, China's grain harvest plunged from 510 million tons to 430 million tons in 2003, a decline of more than 15%, and since 1999, China began to grain from average annual growth rate of around 3% fall into negative growth, until 2004, only to return to positive growth in food production. For 1982–1983 Nian that weather impact, its effect on agricultural crops is relatively eased off a little. When El Nino event starts on agricultural products affected by the formation of agricultural products is still increasing production status, affect only agricultural production growth. After 1985, agricultural harvest brief negative growth in agricultural production in 1986 and will soon return to normal.

    Food inflation went from negative during the Asian Crisis up to 33 percent:

    Third, no doubt are: food production will bring upward pressure on food prices, if we are focusing in 1997 – 1998 and that the impact of the El Niño phenomenon on agricultural products of the case (that of 1982 due to a lack of market-oriented price mechanism the lack of reference value), you can see the 1999 CPI began to appear a rising cycle, when it rose to 2004 round ended. The terms of the CPI was rising phase of the sample can be easily found in many varieties in the CPI, food prices rose the most fierce breed when food prices year on year growth from 33.9% -13.8%, climbed all the way, you can guess, in the case of high probability, when food prices because of supply problems pushed faster.

     

    From these three events we can infer the following: First, food production caused by the El Nino phenomenon, is expected to last for two years, until 2018, food production will have to repair; the second is the labor shortage even at the current trend of urbanization, we must be alert to the magnitude of agricultural production may be more severe than that of 2000; the third is food price inflation is likely to become the focus of attention late.

  • Why The Father Of The Orlando Mass-Shooter Was Sitting Behind Hillary

    Well this is a little awkward…

    The Taliban-supporting, gay-punishing, father of Orlando mass-murderer Omar Mateen appeared to find the words of Presidential candidate Hillary Clinton appealing as he cheered her on at a campaign rally in Kissimmee (just south of Orlando!).

    His reason for being there… Simple:

    "Hillary Clinton is good for United States versus Donald Trump, who has no solutions.."

    Hillary Clinton spoke to a crowd in Kissimmee, just south of Orlando.  She was supposed to be talking jobs, but started the speech off paying tribute to those affected by the Pulse Nightclub shooting.

    "I know how many people, families, loved ones, and friends are still grieving, and we will be with you as you rebuild your lives."

    But local media WPTV happened to notice the man, who has a mustache and was wearing a red hat, behind Clinton. It was Seddique Mateen, the father of Orlando mass shooter Omar Mateen.

    NewsChannel 5 asked Mateen what he was thinking about when Clinton spoke about the Orlando incident.

     

    "We've been cooperating with the federal government, and that's about it," he said. "Thank you."

    Mateen didn't want to answer any other questions, but just hours later, WPTV ran into him by chance at a rest stop on the way back to West Palm Beach.  He wanted to do an interview…

    and show us a sign he made for Clinton.

    Finally when asked if he thought some people would be surprised to see him there, especially given the proximity to Orlando.

    "Why should they be surprised?  I love the United States, and I've been living here a long time," Mateen said.

    Of course, the fact that the mass-shooter's father was so perfectly placed seated right behind her is probably just a coincidence… but The Clinton campaign was very quick to deny it once social media noticed…

    "The rally was a 3,000-person, open-door event for the public. This individual wasn't invited as a guest and the campaign was unaware of his attendance until after the event."

    Still, we are sure if Matteen's appearance had been embraced by the nation's liberals (for being brave enough to appear and support real change in America or something like that) then the campaign spin may have been different.

    One final piece of food for thought…

    * * *

    Clinton definitely did not want to answer any questions about it…

  • Bank Of England Suffers Stunning Failure On Second Day Of QE: "Goodness Knows What Happens Next Week"

    It started off well enough.

    On the first day of the Bank of England’s resumption of Gilt QE after the central bank had put its monetization of bonds on hiatus in 2012, bondholders were perfectly happy to offload to Mark Carney bonds that matured in 3 to 7 years. In fact, in the first “POMO” in four years, there were 3.63 offers for every bid of the £1.17 billion in bonds the BOE wanted to buy.

    However, earlier today, when the BOE tried to purchase another £1.17 billion in bonds, this time with a maturity monger than 15 years, something stunning happened: it suffered an unexpected failure which has rarely if ever happened in central bank history: only £1.118 billion worth of sellers showed up, meaning that the BOE’s second open market operation was uncovered by a ratio of 0.96.  Simply stated, the Bank of England encountered an offerless market.

     

    What makes this particular failure especially notable – and troubling – is that while technically uncovered sales of government securities happen frequently, and Germany is quite prominent in that regard as numerous Bund auctions have failed to find enough demand in the open market in recent years forcing the “retention” of the offered surplus, when it comes to a central bank’s buying of securities, there should be, at least in practice, full coverage of the operation as the central bank is willing and able to pay any price to sellers to satisfy its quota.

    For example, in today’s operation, the scarcity led to the BOE accepting all submissions, even as some investors offered prices above the prevailing market. The highest accepted price for the 4 percent bond due in 2060, for example, was 194.00, compared with a weighted average of 192.152, which means that the happy seller obtained a yield well in excess of that implied by the market.

    And yet, despite having a completely price indiscriminate buyer, some £52 million worth of bond sellers simply refused to sell to the BOE at any price!

    The QE failure quickly raised alarm signals among the bond buying community. In a Bloomberg TV interview, Luke Hickmore, an Edinburgh-based senior investment manager at Aberdeen Asset Management said that “lots of people are bidding us for bonds — Mark Carney is now bidding me for bonds and he still can’t have them. The problem is he was trying to buy 15-year plus bonds today in the gilt market. That’s a really difficult area.”

    Needless to say, immediately after the news that not even the BOE can buy all the bonds it needs to buy at any price, yields on 10 and 30-year gilts quickly dropped to new record lows. “Yesterday we saw a 3.63 cover in the short APF so this is a sharp difference that has really caught the market off guard,” said Daniela Russell of Legal & General Group in London, cited by Bloomberg.

    We were surprised they didn’t slide even lower. After all, if even the central bank is met with an offerless market, there is simply no price that is high enough, as ludicrous as that may sound, for longer-maturity gilts because the last marginal seller can demand any price from the BOE and they will get it.

    As Bloomberg notes, the BOE’s failure to reach its target on Tuesday is an early warning of the challenges it may face in expanding its QE plan. A big part of the problem for the central bank is that it already scooped up about a third of the U.K. government bond market as part of a program that started in March 2009. And, with yields already at all time lows, it has just run into the same problem that we warned back in 2014 will haunt the BOJ: a lack of willing sellers. Ironically, even as the BOJ has stumbled from one monetary policy embarrassment to another, it never had a failed POMO. It was up to the Bank of England to demonstrate what a bond shortage really means.

    But why the lack of sellers? Well, since the BOE paused purchases in 2012, global bond yields have tumbled, meaning investors may be less willing to part with longer-term bonds that tend to offer higher yields than their shorter-dated equivalents. Long-dated U.K. bonds are in particular demand from pension companies that hold the securities to match their liabilities.

    “You’d understand why investors might not be keen to offload longer bonds – if you are looking for yields that’s the only place on the curve to be,” said Jason Simpson, a London-based fixed-income strategist at Societe Generale SA.

    Longer-dated bonds are “an area where people are hunting down what yield is left – you have to extend out into that area to get anything really,” Aberdeen’s Hickmore said. Carney “is going to say ‘it’s very early days, this is day one of the long-end purchasing.’”

    Whatever the reason, and however the BOE will try to justify this striking failure, Mark Carney has a major problem on his hands: according to last week’s announcement, the BOE hopes to increase its holdings of government securities by 60 billion pounds ($78 billion) to 435 billion pounds over the next six months. However, if today is any indication, it will fail.

    Tomorrow the market’s attention will be fixated on the BOE’s Asset Purchase Facility website (link) then another open market operation, this time in the seven- to fifteen-year sector, is scheduled to take place. Another uncovered failure like today, and alarm bells will be going off everywhere, not to mention that Gilt yields will implode.

    Just as importantly, the BOE has said that “the Bank will announce its response to the shortfall in today’s uncovered operation at 9am tomorrow.”

    We can’t wait, and neither can SocGen’s Jason Simpson: “It is a bit of a surprise that this went uncovered in the first week of the operation, goodness knows what happens next week.”

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 9th August 2016

  • Deportation European Style: "Dear Terrorist, Please Go Home"

    Submitted by Mike Shedlock via MishTalk.com,

    The Algerian assailant who attacked two female Belgian police officers with a machete ignored two exportation orders. Only 40% of exportation orders are obeyed.

    Machette Attack

    The above image from Islamic State Claims Responsibility for Machete Attack in Belgium.

    The Financial Times reports Belgium Machete Attacker Earmarked For Deportation.

    The man who injured two policewomen with a machete in a suspected terror attack in the Belgian city of Charleroi on Saturday had been earmarked for deportation.

     

    Belgian authorities have confirmed the 33-year-old Algerian assailant had lived in Belgium since 2012 and had ignored two expulsion orders.

     

    Deportation has become the bedrock of the EU’s migration policy, with Brussels pushing to reach agreements with countries across Africa and the Middle East to make it easier to send people with no right to stay back to their home country. Countries that agree to such deals will be able to access investment funds of up to €62bn, according to an EU proposal launched in June.

     

    This push comes despite criticism from some migration experts that widespread removals are difficult to carry out, because of a combination of their cost and strict legal conditions. At the moment, only 40 per cent of failed asylum seekers are ever deported, according to figures from the European Commission.

     

    Theo Francken, Belgian secretary of state for asylum and migration, in press release on Sunday insisted that the government was committed to expelling foreign criminals: “The government has already taken a series of steps to accelerate the return of these criminals. We have to continue.” [Mish translation: we have no idea what to do next.]

     

    But Mr Francken also admitted to difficulties with carrying out expulsions to Algeria: “Forced returns to Algeria remain problematic despite years of bilateral and European negotiations.”

     

    Belgian media reported that the that the perpetrator shouted “Allahu akbar [God is great]” during the assault.

    Dear Terrorist, Please Go Home.

    Is it politically incorrect to point out the officers attacked by the man with a machete were women? Reuters mentioned that several times, the Financial Times not at all.

    Question aside, the European plan of action is the stern message “Dear terrorist, please go home”. When that doesn’t work, the message is repeated, presumably until it does work.

    It’s likely that you are as shocked as I am that such a well thought out plan does not work.

    Is there a count of deportation orders ignored, or do authorities just issue them and hope?

    Clearly hope isn’t working. The authorities need tough follow-up actions. I suggest the deportation authorities need to add “pretty please” to message.

  • The Chilling Thing Twitter Just Said about San Francisco’s Office Bubble

    By Wolf Richter, WOLFSTREET.com

    Twitter is shaking up San Francisco. It’s the city’s 10th largest employer, and second largest tech employer, after Salesforce. But it hasn’t yet figured out, despite a decade of trying, how to make money. Last October, it announced that it would lay off 8% of its workforce. A couple of weeks ago, it reported a second-quarter net loss of $107 million along with disappointing user metrics and lousy projections. Its shares have lost 74% since their miracle-IPO-hype peak at the end of December 2014.

    And now Twitter is dumping nearly one third of its total office space on the San Francisco sublease market.

    It leases a number of floors in the two buildings at Market Square. The four floors it put on the sublease market total 183,642 square feet of “fully furnished” office space with workstations for 1,416 employees, according to a marketing brochure by corporate real estate firm CRESA.

    It’s the largest sublease space now available in San Francisco.

    The largest of the floors, at 78,792 square feet, is at its 1355 Market location, the iconic former San Francisco Furniture Mart that Twitter moved into in 2012. The floor comes with “600 workstations, 49 conference rooms, multiple collaboration/lounge areas, 2 kitchens, 2 training rooms, and a Mother’s room,” according to the brochure.

    It also listed three floors at the adjacent One 10th Street building that it moved into in 2014. The floors, 34,950 square feet each, are also fully furnished with similar amenities, and earned a “2016 International Interior Design Association – Honor Award,” according to the brochure. Twitter spared no expense before its IPO to dazzle investors with its buildings and show them what noble material it was made of.

    San Francisco’s darling even extorted a highly controversial payroll tax exemption for six years from the city by threatening to head out of town when it was looking for larger digs in the neglected Mid-Market area.

    All spaces listed are available “immediately” and rent is “negotiable,” the brochure says.

    Twitter has been shrinking from its grandiose plans. In October last year, it abandoned plans to lease an additional 100,000 square feet at the building where Square is, at 1455 Market. Both companies share the same CEO, Jack Dorsey.

    But this comes at an inopportune time for San Francisco’s office market.

    According to commercial real estate firm Savillis Studley, vacant availability in Q2 rose to 8.3% (up from 7.7% in Q1), and Class A availability hit 9.2% (up from 8.4% in Q1). In the Financial District, it “spiked” to 9.8% (up from 8.6%). Despite “a flurry of large subleases and these direct deals” in Q2, with Fitbit, Lyft, and Stripe signing the largest deals, leasing activity over the past four quarters plunged 31% from the five-year average to 5.9 million square feet.

    “Caution prevailed,” the report said, as “more firms coped with funding shortfalls by cutting back or considering relocations to other markets.”

    After a relentless five-year boom, average asking rent, at $64.30 per square foot, according to Savillis Studley, is among the most outrageously expensive in the country and nearly twice the national average of about $33 a square foot.

    That might not have made any difference to startups that were drowning in cash and faced no pressure to ever make money, or were even encouraged to burn through as much cash as possible to quickly grow into the next Facebook. But that era is now being superseded by the “post-unicorn era,” as Dropbox CEO Drew Houston called it so elegantly, and money suddenly matters.

    But some of the smartest money already got out, at the peak last year.

    San Francisco-based real-estate fund Shorenstein Properties acquired Market Square in 2011 for $110 million, according to The Registry. For another $200 million, it redeveloped the former Furniture Mart into a tech hub. With vestiges of hope still clinging to Twitter before the layoff announcement in October last year, and with office prices and rents soaring, Shorenstein decided to unload the property – and made a killing.

    In August last year, it sold a 98% stake to JP Morgan Asset Management for $936 million, or $877 per square foot. This is what a totally crazy property boom will do, along with impeccable timing and knowing your way around city politics. It was one of the highest per-square-foot prices in the city’s history.

    But the office boom faces two challenges: new office towers that are sprouting like mushrooms just when employment growth faces iffy prospects. Twitter isn’t alone. Numerous companies have started to lay off employees, even as others are still hiring. And employment has peaked.

    In June, according to the California Employment Development Department, the number of jobs in San Francisco – 533,200 – was back where it had been in November last year:

    US-San-Francisco-employment-2016-06

    I’m now getting “numerous” reports, anecdotally – up from just “one” four months ago – that people, even tech workers, beyond the age of Millennials, so folks in their early to mid-fifties, are getting laid off, and that they’re having trouble finding another job here. That doesn’t bode well at all for San Francisco’s commercial real estate bubble. When times get tougher, no one needs vast amounts of empty and utterly unproductive office space that is among the most expensive in the country.

    But San Francisco is so expensive overall that a lot of people, once they lose their jobs, choose to leave and head to where life is more affordable. So this is the kind of problem San Francisco really doesn’t need at the moment. Tremors are already going through the condo market. Condo prices are under pressure. Sales volume has been down all year. The luxury end is in trouble. And now this: Read…  Is the “Leaning Tower of San Francisco” the Only One?

  • Retired Green Beret Blasts "Make No Mistake, Everyone Warning About Clinton Is A Target And They Are Marked"

    Submitted by Jeremiah Johnson (nom de plume of a retired Green Beret of the United States Army Special Forces (Airborne)) via SHTFPlan.com,

    The Obama Administration has been characterized by not only a lack of transparency on issues that surface, but a deliberate obfuscation to mask true actions and intentions.  There are literally no limits to what the man and his handlers will do outside of the law to attain their ends, while simultaneously “crafting” legislation to enslave the citizenry.  The fawning, lying press trumpets his victories and quietly spins his defeats: objectivity cannot be maintained by journalists on the government payroll and command.

    Hence a sitting American president, a man who should have been hauled off of a stage in 2012 and clapped in irons for treason is able to do whatever he wants.  Remember?

    “Tell Vladimir I’ll have more leeway after the election.”

    Now the Congress and the State Department labeled Iran both a “rogue state that supports terrorism” and “a supporter of Hezbollah and Al-Qaeda.”  So my question is where did Obama secure the necessary Congressional approval to airlift $400 million to Iran on January 17, 2016?  More: Since this was Obama’s move, did he not use his position unilaterally and without any Congressional approval to provide funding to a nation that supports (and conducts direct action missions to complement) terrorist activities?  And this is with Iran, that vows to strike the U.S.?

    Just as in the same vein, how can we join Russia in a bombing campaign of “boogeyman” ISIL/ISIS when we, the U.S., created it?

    Just as in the same vein, how can we send a QRF (Quick Reaction Force) of our military’s finest commandos to stop the slaughter of an American ambassador and his staff in Libya…when we approved of and enabled it?

    The “administration,” if you prefer that ludicrous term to the true state, the “regime,” is made of Teflon…nothing can touch it.  Fast and Furious proved it.  Hillary’s e-mails proved it.  The cashiering of half of the admiralty and general staff of the United States Armed Forces proved it.  The removal of TARS, of the scrambling of fighters, the scrapping of the A-10 Warthog, the cessation of Tomahawk production…all of these measures prove it.  Obamacare steamrolling through the (at the time) Democrat-controlled Congress…enabled by Senator Olympia Snow (R, Maine) proved it.  The hearings and the deciding vote.

    Nothing can stop the administration.  Nothing.  And nothing will be able to stop the next one.

    Does everyone really think that Trump will be elected?  Really?  Throughout the past two weeks, he has literally run on “self-destruct” and must have a lobotomized campaign manager.  Haven’t we seen this before, when Romney won the first debate and made a fool out of Obama, and then turned into a neutered eunuch for the next debates?

    Do not be fooled: it is all intentional.

    There is no such thing as an election, only a controlled paradigm shift with a force-fed theatrical playbill that the dumbed-down public gobbles up.  The two “camps” of Democrat and Republican, and the illusion of a colossal battle, a political “Clash of the Titans” between conservatism and socialism drawing the focus and attention of the people away from surrounding events nationally and in the world.

    Look at Hanna, the alleged Republican…the first of the jackasses to come out and support Hillary Clinton.  Look at the moneyed interests pooling behind her: Meg Whitman, Warren Buffet, and the invisible but ever-present incubus of George Soros, the man who destroys countries for a hobby and a price.  Look at Hillary, the “good wife,” the “good mother,” the “good 501-C-3” member with a billion dollar “kitty” in the Clinton Foundation and three Delaware shell corporations to hide her loot.  The “good speaker,” snagging $50 – 200 K dollars per speech.

    The good fundraiser who raised $90 million dollars in the month of July alone.

    By her campaign slogan… “I’m with Her” by those very words are such notables as James Comey, Loretta Lynch, Houma Abedin, Debbie Wassermann-Schultz…all of them…complicit with her in the crimes she has committed.  She would provoke a nuclear war with Russia in order to prevent those e-mails from coming to light.

    Her “candidacy” is a degradation and an abasement, not only of the American Justice system, but of the entire Constitution of the United States and the freedom of every citizen.  Those who are “with her” don’t even realize they’ll be the first ones in the gristmill when the time arrives.  That time is almost here.  It’s all been smoke and mirrors, but soon there won’t need to be.  The obfuscations and treacherous maneuvers are masked but in a short time they’ll all be completely unveiled.

    The 2nd Amendment will be completely destroyed and/or nullified.  The face of this entire country is going to change, and akin to most bad things, it’ll have to happen before people realize it and take action.

    Everybody who criticizes the incoming dictator is marked, make no mistake about it.  We still have a little bit of time, but not much, and effects generated need to have substance, not form.  No juvenile displays of occupying a shed/storage room/visitor center in a National Park or Forest.  No standoffs with a disbandment and then everyone is arrested individually.  The torch is being passed.  Everyone who is criticizing Obama and warning about Clinton is a target and they are marked, along with countless others of the 325 million of us.

    If Hillary Clinton takes the presidency, it is the end of the United States.

  • Japan Orders Military To 'State Of Alert' As North Korea Accuses US Of Seeking 'Preemptive Nuclear Strike'

    Just days after North Korea has accused Washington of planning a preemptive nuclear strike – following the US announcement that it would deploy its B-1 bomber in the Pacific for the first time in a decade – Japan's increasingly militarist tone just ratcheted up to '11' as defense ministry officials have ordered its military to be ready at any time to shoot down any North Korean missiles that threaten to strike Japan, putting its forces on a state of alert for at least three months.

    Tensions have been running high since North Korea – officially named the Democratic Peoples' Republic of Korea (DPRK) -carried out its fourth nuclear test in January, followed by a barrage of missile launches that this month reached Japanese waters directly for the first time (via Military.com)…

    Pyongyang accused Washington of "becoming all the more pronounced in their moves to topple down the DPRK by mobilizing all nuclear war hardware," using North Korea's official title.

    "The enemies are bluffing that they can mount a preemptive nuclear strike on the DPRK by letting fly B-1B over the Korean peninsula within two-three hours in contingency," said an English-language statement on state media.

    "Such moves for bolstering nuclear force exposes again that the US imperialists are making a preemptive nuclear strike on the DPRK a fait accompli."

    On July 29, the U.S. Air Force said it would upgrade its hardware on Guam by sending the B-1 for the first time since April 2006.

    "The B-1 will provide U.S. Pacific Command and its regional allies and partners with a credible, strategic power projection platform," it said in a statement.

     

    Pyongyang has repeatedly warned it may carry out preemptive nuclear strikes against South Korean and U.S. targets.

    The secretive state, led by supreme leader Kim Jong-un, warned Saturday it would respond to any aggression by reducing the U.S. to a "sea of flames".

     

    "The ever-mounting moves of the U.S. imperialists to ignite a nuclear war are pushing the situation on the Korean peninsula into the uncontrollable and catastrophic phase," said the North Korean statement.

    And so, following this outburst, as Reuters reports, Abe has stepped up his military's preparedness to respond…

    Japan ordered its military on Monday to be ready at any time to shoot down any North Korean missiles that threaten to strike Japan, putting its forces on a state of alert for at least three months, a defense ministry official and media said.

     

    Up to now, Japan has issued temporary orders when it had indications of an imminent North Korean missile launch that it has canceled after a projectile had been launched.

     

    However, because some test firings are hard to detect, it has decided to put its military on standby for a longer period. The order will be reviewed after three months, state broadcaster NHK said.

    In other words, the next time Kim Jong-un launches, it may start the next war.

    *  *  *

    An increasingly militaristic Japan is something we’ve been warning about for a while. As Liberty Blitzkrieg's Mike Krieger previously detailed

    In case you aren’t up to speed on your Japanese history, the nation’s post WWII Constitution prohibits military action unless it’s in self-defense. Clearly a sensible approach, which is why the current Japanese government, led by the demonstrably insane and incompetent Prime Minister Shinzo Abe, wants to get rid of it.

     

    This story is very important. Not only will this action increase the likelihood of World War III in the Far East, but it’s another important example of a government acting against the will of the people.

     

    Polling has indicated the Japanese public is against a pivot toward militarization and war, but Prime Minister Shinzo Abe  is pushing forward nonetheless. In fact, the current legislation to allow overseas military intervention has already passed the lower house of government. This prompted many Japanese to emerge from their decades long political apathy and get out into the streets. It’s estimated these protests were the largest in recent memory.

    Fast forward a year, and here’s what Abe is up to now.

    From the AP article, Japan Picks Defense Chief Who Downplays Wartime Past:

    TOKYO (AP) — A woman who has downplayed Japan’s wartime actions and is known to have far-right views was named defense minister in a Cabinet reshuffle on Wednesday, a move that could unsettle relations with Asian neighbors with bitter memories of World War II-era atrocities.

     

    Prime Minister Shinzo Abe changed more than half of the 19-member Cabinet in a bid to support his economic and security policies, as well as push for revising Japan’s postwar constitution.

     

    While keeping the economy as the top priority, Abe said he would do his “utmost to achieve a (constitutional) revision during my term,” which ends in September 2018.

     

    A lawyer-turned-lawmaker with little experience in defense, Inada is one of Abe’s favorites. She regularly visits the Yasukuni Shrine, which honors war dead including convicted war criminals, a gesture seen as an endorsement of Japan’s militaristic past.

     

    She also has defended Japan’s wartime atrocities, including forcing many Asian women into sexual servitude in military-run brothels, and has led a party committee to re-evaluate the judgment of war tribunals by the Allies.

     

    Her link to a notorious anti-Korea group was acknowledged by a court this year in a defamation case she lost. Inada also was seen posing with the leader of a neo-Nazi group in a 2011 photo that surfaced in the media in 2014.

     

    Finance Minister Taro Aso, Foreign Minister Fumio Kishida and Chief Cabinet Secretary Yoshihide Suga were among key Cabinet members who retained their portfolios, while 10 ministers were replaced in the reshuffle. Many are not necessarily experts in their assigned portfolio, prompting opposition lawmakers to criticize Abe for dominating the Cabinet with like-minded supporters of his political views.

    While campaigning for last month’s upper house elections, Abe promised to focus on economic revitalization in the short term, and to later seek to revise Japan’s pacifist constitution.

     

    Since he took office in late 2012, Abe has sought to boost growth by pumping massive amounts of money into the world’s third-biggest economy. But lavish monetary easing and public works spending so far have failed to reignite growth as much as hoped.

     

    As is typically the case, when all else fails on the domestic front, politicians look to get a war started.

    The question is, Krieger asks ominously, what sort of war will this be? If it happens, it’ll be the first fourth turning level war since the nuclear age began. In a best case scenario, world leaders would be at least sane enough not to deploy nuclear weapons. If that’s the case, the conflict would likely focus on financial and cyber warfare. Things that can be extraordinarily destructive in their own right, but would at least avoid a destruction of the human race. Such topics will be explored further in the years ahead.

  • How You Got Screwed – A User's Guide To A Rigged System

    Does this describe you?

    • You’re carrying huge amounts of college debt.
    • You’re an adult still living with your parents because you can’t afford to move out.
    • You’re not able to find a job that pays a livable amount of money.
    • You want to get married, but you can’t afford it.
    • Prices keep going up, but your income doesn’t follow.
    • You’ve got health insurance but can’t afford medical care due to the high deductibles.
    • You joined some movement like Operation Wall Street or the Tea Party, or followed a revolutionary politician like Ron Paul or Bernie Sanders, and didn’t see anything change.
    • You feel that something’s not right, even though the government and the media keep telling you how great everything is.

    Then this book – "How You Got SCREWED – A guide to a rigged system" – is for you…

    "When I was younger, maybe 10 or 11, I remember playing a game of Monopoly with a friend. I was doing well, but I was still losing – and that’s when I realized that my friend, who was acting as the bank, was cheating by secretly moving money from the bank over to his own pile. Once I figured this out, I quit the game. Why play a game when it’s impossible to win?

     

    In a nutshell, that’s what’s happening to you in today’s America. Throughout your entire childhood, you were told about the American Dream, and how if you worked hard and did the right things, you could build a good life for yourself. If you’re reading this, then you’ve figured out that something went wrong: Either someone’s cheating, or they changed the rules without telling you.

     

    I’m here to tell you that this is exactly what happened.

     

    The generations before you actually did have a real shot at achieving their dreams, but over time, so many people cheated, looking for shortcuts to achieving their own dreams, that they ended up changing the game. They rigged the game, and now that it’s your turn to play, they’ve made it almost impossible for you to win.

     

     

    In reality, I’m a typical middle-aged guy. I’ve achieved my own American Dream, with a wife, two kids, two dogs and a house with a white picket fence in the suburbs (seriously).

     

    I’ve pretty much got it made – but over time, as I learned about how the game is rigged, how the odds are stacked against the next generation, I’ve come to realize that my kids are going to face huge hurdles in achieving their dreams – hurdles I didn’t have to face. And it’s not just my kids: I realized that a lot of people in my generation, and the majority of people younger than me, are in the same boat.

     

    Not only are most of them destined for a life of frustration and unfilled dreams, but the system that’s holding them down is the same system that’s choking the life out of this country. And it’s all because some of the people who came before us decided to rewrite the rules of the game, benefiting them and hurting the rest of us."

    As Crimson Avenger sums up:

    After years of observing the many corrupted systems that affect our lives, I compiled my thoughts into this book – “How You Got Screwed.” If you’d like a copy, just download the book in PDF form by clicking here .

     

    There is no cost for the book, and you’re free to use it and share it as you see fit. I wrote it to help people understand what’s truly happening in this country, and the more people you share it with, and the more ways you think to use it, the happier I’ll be.

    Full book below…

    How You Got Screwed 1.0

  • Say Hello To Southeast Asia's New Silk Roads

    Authored by Pepe Escobar, Op-Ed via RT.com,

    It’s not only China vs. the US in the South China Sea. Few in the West realize that two completely different, intersecting stories are developing in maritime and mainland Southeast Asia.

    The Permanent Court of Arbitration in The Hague denied China’s historic rights to waters in the South China Sea within its nine-dash line; it also ruled that the Spratly Islands are not islands, but “rocks”; thus they cannot generate 200-nautical mile exclusive economic zones (EEZs).

    These decisions were taken in accordance with the UN Convention on the Law of the Sea (UNCLOS). Now comes the real nitty-gritty – which is a mix of diplomatic ballet and classic Beijing opera.

    The framework under which Beijing is ready to negotiate is somewhat detailed here. But the problem at the starting gate is that Beijing stipulates – as a precondition to any negotiation with the Philippines – that The Hague’s decision should not be discussed. Chinese nationalism has been deeply wounded in The Hague, and the Chinese Communist Party (CCP) knows it will be very hard to tame it.

    Manila for its part faces a constitutional problem. The Filipino constitution rules that the “state shall protect the nation’s marine wealth in its exclusive economic zone, and reserve its use and enjoyment exclusively to Filipino citizens.” It goes on to say that the state “may enter into co-production, joint venture, or production-sharing agreements with Filipino citizens, or corporations or associations,” but “at least 60 per cent of whose capital is owned by such citizens.” If President Duterte goes against this provision he may be impeached.

    Enter the face-saving Asian way of doing business. A graphic example is already at hand; no one so far has urged China to remove people and/or installations from The Hague-coined “low-tide elevations” in the South China Sea.

    In practice, Manila will use The Hague’s ruling as a sort of road map – while not insisting Beijing must recognize it. But that implies an extra obstacle: Beijing may still insist on Manila recognizing Chinese sovereignty over a selected bunch of “rocks”. Filipino diplomats actually hope this won’t be the case. If that happens, we’re in business.

    The first step in the negotiation should be no sovereignty decision over those “rocks” – including the highly contentious Scarborough shoal. Just like what happened in the 1940s, when the then Republic of China came up with the “nine-dash line”, this should be decided in the future. In the short-term, a deal on fishing within the 12 nautical mile territorial sea around the shoal should be all but inevitable.

    This means, in practice, that Beijing will not interfere with Filipino fishermen and/or Filipino oil exploration within its EEZ – while reducing its own workload in those “low-tide elevations”. That’s a tall order, but doable, because the payback will be increased business.

    President Duterte knows as much as the Beijing leadership that China is absolutely essential to the development of Filipino infrastructure.

    That will open the way to joint Chinese/Filipino oil exploration. Of course, constitutionally it can’t be an equal share, but China can still get a very good deal in terms of production rights. Not to mention the deal can be expanded to international waters beyond those EEZs, involving other players such as Vietnam and Malaysia.

    At the same time, China will not desist from building a first-class blue water navy with global reach. That’s the rationale for the sophisticated submarine base in Hainan Island and those ultra-controversial land reclamations in the Spratly Islands. Beijing’s overall strategy is to fully control security in the South China Sea – considering whatever the hegemon may come up with.

    Beijing clearly sees what the US means by “freedom of navigation”; code for the US Navy being able to blockade China’s trade routes in the South China Sea, as I analyzed here. If the US Navy gets too close to China’s southern seaboard, a blockade could be devastating. After all, the whole strategy of setting up Chinese island – or “rock” – defenses in the South China Sea is to keep the US Navy as far away as possible. This is the real deal – much more than fuzzy claims of sovereignty.

    And one thing is clear. If the Pentagon goes for the monkey business option, all hell will break loose. The RAND Corporation is already on freak out mode just because the People’s Liberation Army (PLA) Air Force flew the long-range strategic bomber H-6K over those “low-tide elevations”.

    Watch the Greater Mekong

    One thing is the real high-stakes game being played in the South China Sea. Another thing entirely is Southeast Asian economic integration, via the ASEAN Economic Community – which implies a central strategic role for ASEAN.

    The key problem is a real disconnect between mainland and maritime ASEAN. The Philippines and Indonesia are very much focused on South China Sea issues. Cambodia, Laos, Thailand – but also Brunei – lean towards accommodation with China. The others tend to sit on the fence. And then there’s Vietnam as a pivot; with an interest in the South China Sea but not keen on antagonizing China – a next-door neighbor and major trade partner.

    It’s mainland Southeast Asia, not maritime Southeast Asia that should be the key driver for regional development in the near future. Some figures tell the story. The Greater Mekong sub-region – which includes the southern Chinese provinces of Yunnan and Guangxi – has more than 400 million people with half of ASEAN’s GDP of $2.5 trillion. Cambodia, Laos, Myanmar, Thailand and Vietnam bear a market of 250 million people and a GDP of $700 billion; even without Vietnam, that’s a GDP of around $500 billion and a market of 150 million people.

    They are all expanding like crazy; the Mekong mainland is growing as much as six percent a year. That reminds me, as a comparison, of the early 1980s, when Vietnam was still dreaming of becoming an Asian tiger.

    Expansion goes all over the place. The East-West economic corridor – promoted by the Japan-based Asian Development Bank (ADB) – goes from southern Myanmar through central and northwest Thailand and southern Laos all the way to Danang in Vietnam. The North-South corridor goes from Kunming in Yunnan, China to Bangkok and southern Thailand. The southern corridor goes from southern Myanmar to northeast Thailand, Cambodia and Vung Tau in southern Vietnam; road connections in this corridor, also promoted by the ADB, are still relatively incipient, but advancing fast.

    Of course there are still myriad problems – related to road construction, border crossings, stifling bureaucracy, the language barrier, internet speed. But that’s the way of the future.

    And all that action also ties in with China positioning itself as a de facto high-speed rail power in Southeast Asia. That happens to be a key plank of One Belt, One Road (OBOR); the Southeast Asian branches of the New Silk Roads. China Railway Group Limited (CREC) is very well positioned to build the Malaysia-Singapore high-speed rail, against Japanese and Korean competition.

    The 417 kilometer high-speed rail – stretching between Yunnan province and Vientiane in Laos – is already being built, while the China-Thailand high-speed rail project is also back on track after a few bumps on the financial road. In practice, we’re talking about over 3,000 kilometers of high-speed rail from China’s Yunnan to Laos, Thailand, Malaysia, and Singapore; the Southeast Asian stretch of the New Silk Roads, eventually connected to central China, Central Asia, Southwest Asia – and Europe.

    So watch Southeast Asia. The whole show is not only about maritime Southeast Asia – which is a hostage of the complex, conflicting big power China-US relationship; quite a few key geopolitical implications will derive from the development push of the Greater Mekong sub-region – and the progressive integration of mainland Southeast Asia.

  • Pokemon Go Claims Its First Fatality

    We recently posted a light-hearted piece highlighting a Chinese public service announcement on the public dangers of playing Pokemon Go (see: "China Unveils 'Pokemon Go Danger' Public Service Announcement").  Turns out we didn't take the warning seriously enough.  According to reports from San Francisco the popular game has claimed its first fatality.  College student Calvin Riley was shot in the back while playing the game at around 10pm in a park near San Francisco's Fisherman's Wharf.  According to the New York Daily News

    A 20-year-old man was shot dead while playing Pokémon Go at a dark San Francisco park late Saturday, relatives said.

     

    The armed assailant allegedly watched San Joaquin Delta College student-athlete Calvin Riley from afar as he and his friend played the popular game in the Aquatic Park near Fisherman’s Wharf at around 10 p.m., according to KGO-TV.

     

    The duo paid no mind to the suspicious person and went back to catching the fanciful creatures on their phones.

     

    Moments later, the San Mateo, Calif., man was fatally shot after wandering ahead of his friend, said John Kirby, who spoke to the television station on behalf of the victim’s parents.

     

    "From what we know, there was no confrontation. There was nothing said back and forth,” Kirby said. “It was just senseless … just came up and shot in the back and ran away for nothing.”

     

  • Federal Agency Says Wearing "Don't Tread On Me" Hat Might Be Racist

    Submitted by Andrew Stiles via HeatSt.com,

    Wearing a Gadsden Flag hat to work could be considered racial harassment, according to the Equal Employment Commission, the government body that oversees “hostile work environment” harassment claims against federal agencies.

    The iconic flag, which originates from the Revolutionary War, features coiled snake above the words “Don’t Tread On Me.”

    In recent years, it has become a favorite symbol of the Tea Party movement and conservative activists.

    Earlier this year, the EEOC received a complaint from a “Shelton,” an African American, who charged that his employer (the federal government) had subjected him to racial discrimination when a coworker “repeatedly wore a cap with an insignia of the Gadsden Flag.”

    Shelton (not his real name) said he found the cap to be “racially offensive” because the man who designed it in 1775, Christopher Gadsden, was a slave owner and because the insignia was a “historical indicator of white resentment against blacks stemming largely from the Tea Party.”

    The EEOC acknowledged that the flag did not originate with the Tea Party movement, and was created centuries ago “in a non-racial context.” However, the commission also found that the Gadsden Flag could be “interpreted to convey racially-tinged messages in some contexts,” citing as an example a 2014 shooting spree in which white supremacists draped Gadsden Flags over the bodies of two murdered police officers.

    “Certainly, Complainant ascribes racial connotations to the symbol based on observations that it is sometimes displayed in racially-tinged situations,” the commission wrote.

    The commission concluded that the claim “must be investigated to determine the specific context in which [the hat-wearing coworker] displayed the symbol in the workplace,” and called for the gathering of “evidence that would illuminate the meaning conveyed by [the coworker’s] display of the symbol.”

    Eugene Volokh at the Washington Post writes that even the threat of legal liability in such case is likely to prompt employers to crack down on free expression as a mere precautionary measure, even if such speech is protected by the First Amendment.

    Finally, we leave it to SHTFPlan.com's Mac Slavo to conclude so eloquently:

    It is completely outrageous. It is a Rorschach test for being offended. This case is the first of what will be many in an formal exercise in absurdity and arbitrary loss of rights. Apparently it is doesn’t matter what the symbol that offends actually stands for, or what the person wearing/associated with it actually intended to express.

     

    Instead, the door is now wide open for anyone to be fired, disciplined or put on a list even though they may have done nothing at all except express their free speech. We’re not even talk about real substantial cases here… everything is racist; everything is potentially terrorist; and absolutely everything is offensive. Don’t even try to express yourself at all.

  • In First Autopilot Crash In China, Tesla Model S Driver Crashes In Beijing With Autopilot Engaged

    Just two months after Elon Musk was engaged in major damage control over a scandal involving a Tesla Model S which crashed while in self-driving mode, killing its driver, China Daily reports that a Tesla Model S crashed in Beijing on August 2, while the car had its autopilot on and the driver had both hands off the steering wheel.

    This is the first autopilot crash in China, in which luckily nobody was killed or injured.

    Luo Zhen, the driver of the car, has been driving for seven years, and has never been involved in any accident before. “My car hit the right side of a black Santana that was parked in the inner lane of the road after it had developed some mechanical problem,” he said.

    He added that before the crash happened, he could see almost half of the Santana’s back and there was a reaction time of around five seconds, but Tesla’s Autopilot system failed to spot the vehicle and crashed into it, while another car that was initially in front of him bypassed it successfully.

    “After the accident, I had to manually stop the car, otherwise it would have kept going, as if it had just hit a speed bump,” Luo said.

    A video of the incident was posted on CarNewsChina, in which as Jalopnik observes, the Tesla is moving quite slowly when a disabled Santana on the left comes into view, about 100 feet after a warning triangle. The car in front of the Tesla has no issue scooting over in its lane to make room. The Tesla, for some reason however, makes no such move.

     

    As Jalopnik puts it, “It all seems fairly avoidable to me.”

    Cited by Xinhua, Luo said that he thought the car’s reaction was confusing because it did not conform to the car’s priority reaction of automatically turning right and following the vehicle in front. Instead it kept going.

    The Santana’s taillight and reflectors were damaged, while the Tesla Model S’s left front bumper, left front headlight, left front fender and left mirror were crashed.

    The accident has cost Luo 50,000 yuan ($7,525) on repairs. And when he bought the car, he spent more than 20,000 yuan on the optional Autopilot Convenience Features.

    Believing there are technical bugs in the system of Autopilot, Luo said Tesla should take half of the responsibility, while the other half should be paid by the Santana’s driver for illegal parking. However, there is no law in China and many other countries that clearly states who should be held responsible in case a self-driven vehicle is involved in an accident.

    “There are not many self-driven cars at the moment, so it is unrealistic to expect a law,” said Fu Yuwu, chairman of Society of Automotive Engineers of China, according to a report by National Business Daily.

    After contacting Tesla and only getting the contact detail of the insurance company, an angry Luo posted an article telling details of the accident and his opinions on Twitter-like Sina Weibo on Wednesday, which has drawn dozens of comments and discussions. Luo criticized Tesla for exaggerating the automatic driving function but only using a small space on the manual to warn users that it is only an assistance driving system.

    However, adding insult to (monetary) injury, a comment on his post said Tesla’s manual specifically warned drivers not to remove their hands from the steering wheel, adding that it is illegal to do this in China.

    Luo said a lawyer team has contacted him to support him to sue Tesla for false advertising, but he has not decided whether to do it yet. Duan Zhengzheng, public relation manager at Tesla China, declined the telephone interview request to comment on.

    While we doubt Tesla’s reputation will take a big hit as a result of this incident, what is more curious is the revelation that driving in China without having one’s hands on the steering wheel is illegal: if accurate, this means that the concept of driverless cars in China can be put indefinitely on hold at least until such time as the law is changed. However, for that to happen, a lot of palms will have to be greased, and also begs the question whether Uber, which lately has been also betting its future on a vision of self-driving cars taking over the world, figured out just how major the hurdles would be for its grand design when it comes to the most deisrable market of all, and is why last week it conceded the race for Chinese marketshare to its local competitor, Didi.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 8th August 2016

  • Musical Chairs

    Submitted by Jeff Thomas via InternationalMan.com,

    You’re familiar with the children’s game of musical chairs. Ten children walk around nine chairs whilst listening to music. When the music stops, each must quickly find a chair and sit in it. One child is out of luck and is out of the game. Then a chair is removed and the nine remaining children walk around the eight remaining chairs, waiting for the music to stop again.

    Economics is a bit like musical chairs. In a recession, the economy takes a hit and there are some casualties. Some players fail to get a chair in time and are out of the game. The game then goes on without them. The economy eventually recovers.

    But a depression is a different game entirely. Since 2007, the world has been in an unacknowledged depression. A depression is like a game of musical chairs in which ten children are walking around, but suddenly nine of the chairs are taken away. This means that nine of the children will soon be out of the game. But it also means that all ten understand that the odds of them remaining in the game are quite slim and that desperate times call for desperate measures. It’s time to toss out the rule book and do whatever you have to, to get the one remaining chair.

    Of course, the pundits officially deny that we have even been in a depression. They regularly describe the world as “in recovery from the 2008–2010 recession,” but the “shovel-ready jobs” that are “on the way” never quite materialize. The “green shoots” never seem to blossom. So, what’s going on here?

    Depressions do not occur all at once. It takes time for them to bottom and, if an economy is propped up through economic heroin (debt), the Big Crash can be a long time in coming.

    In that regard, this one is one for the record books. As Doug Casey is fond of saying, a depression is like a hurricane. First there are the initial crashes, then a calm as the eye of the hurricane passes over, then, we enter the trailing edge of the other side of the hurricane. This is the time when things really get rough—when even the politicians will start using the dreaded “D” word. We have entered that final stage, as the economic symptoms demonstrate, and this is the time when the game of musical chairs will evolve into something quite a bit nastier.

    In normal economic times, even including recession periods, we observe financial institutions maintaining their staunchly conservative image. For the most part, they deliver as promised. But, as we move into the trailing edge of the second half of the hurricane, we notice more and more that the bankers are rewriting the rule book in order to take possession of the wealth that they previously held in trust for their depositors.

    And they don’t do this in isolation. They do it with the aid of the governments of the day. New laws are written in advance of the crisis period to assure that the banks can plunder the deposits with impunity. Since 2010, such laws have been passed in the EU, the US, Canada and other jurisdictions.

    Trial balloons have been sent up to ascertain to what degree they will get away with their freezes and confiscations. Greece has been an excellent trial balloon for the freezes and Cyprus has done the same for the confiscations. The world is now as ready as it’s going to be for the game to be played on an international level.

    So what will it look like, this game of musical chairs on steroids? Well, first we’ll see the sudden crashes of markets and/or defaults on debts. Shortly thereafter, one Monday morning (or more likely one Tuesday after a long weekend) the financial institutions will fail to open their doors. The media will announce a “temporary state of emergency” during which the governments and banks must resolve some difficulties in order to “assure a continued sound economy.” Until that time, the banks will either remain shut, or will process only small transactions. (This latter announcement is a nice way of saying that the depositors will be on an allowance from the bank until further notice.)

    Just as Greeks may now withdraw €420 per week, much of the rest of the world will operate under a similar allowance. What about a business that would need to pay that amount for even one salary? What of a restaurant that would pay that amount for even a small food delivery? That remains to be seen—but business will not be robust.

    Of one thing we can be sure. The banks will part with no more than they absolutely have to in order to avoid riots. Their wish will be to confiscate as much as possible themselves, and the new laws allow them to do just that.

    And that’s when we’ll discover that nine chairs have disappeared.

    Remember, what we’re looking at is the end-game. The banks will no longer maintain the ruse of client concern beyond this point. Each player grabs as much as he is able, because banking as we know it will come to an end.

    To be sure, a new banking system will rise from the ashes in a few years, but for now, the wealth that’s on the table will be swept up by those who have the law on their side.

    Many of the most august names in banking may well disappear over the next few years. Some institutions folded in 2008, but re-opened under new names (minus the debt that sank them in the first place). Others, like Bear Stearns and Lehman Brothers, are gone for good. They will be joined by a host of other stalwarts of the industry. Merrill Lynch, AIG, Royal Bank of Scotland, Fortis, Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac all teetered on the edge of collapse in 2008. These and many more stand to go off the cliff in the coming crisis.

    And they will not go with dignity. They will go out with a last-minute grab of as much of the deposits as they can manage. (Those who have taken part in a bank liquidation will know that what little the departing bankers leave behind on the table, the liquidators gobble up in fees. Depositors, at best, get the scraps.)

    Well. Pretty grim. If history repeats, as it generally does, more than 95% of depositors will lose most or all of their savings. But there will be those who are only impacted in a minor way—those who decided to get their wealth (no matter how large or small) out of the banks before the crash.

    How so? First, and most essential, remove all your wealth (except for a maximum of three months’ operating capital) from the bank. Second, move it to a jurisdiction that’s at a lesser risk than the jurisdictions stated above. (Pick the healthiest one you can find, with the lowest taxation rate and a reputation for stable government over decades.) Third, since banks in other jurisdictions may also be at risk, place your wealth in those forms of ownership that are least likely to be under attack from your home government (precious metals and real estate). Overseas real estate is the safest bet, as any attempt by a foreign government to confiscate it amounts to an act of war. However, real estate is not the most liquid means of holding wealth, so quite a bit must be held in precious metals—again in the overseas jurisdiction where it’s harder to confiscate.

    Should you need a sudden cash infusion at home, precious metals are always easy to sell quickly and the proceeds are easily repatriated (countries in economic trouble never complain about money coming in, only money going out.)

    Finally, if possible, create an overseas location for yourself, either where your wealth is or another location—one that’s likely to be peaceful to live in, when crisis reaches your home jurisdiction.

    In this game, the odds of being the lucky one who gets the last chair are very slim. The alternative requires more preparation, but is, by far, the safer choice.

  • America's Dangerous Game Of Intrigue Inside International Organizations

    Submitted by Wayne Madsen via Strategic-Culture.org,

    From the International Olympic Committee (IOC) and the Fédération Internationale de Football Association (FIFA) to the Southern Common Market (Mercosur) and the Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN), Washington has been playing a dangerous game of intrigue and deception with regard to steering these organizations in a pro-American direction. The Obama administration has decided that the halls, offices, and conference rooms of international organizations are acceptable battlefields to wage propaganda and sanctions wars.

    The first American target of note was the international football association, FIFA. Not content with trying to sully the reputation of the 2014 Sochi Winter Olympics with issues of gay rights and doping of athletes, the US disinformation boiler rooms began a full-scale attack on FIFA. The major reason is Russia’s hosting of the 2018 FIFA World Cup. The US Justice Department, in a major move toward the internationalization of domestic US law, began unsealing indictment after indictment of FIFA officials for financial crimes. The actual target of these indictments was Russia.

    The United States, continuing its economic and political pressure on Venezuela, decided to pressure its three right-wing allies in Latin America – Brazil, Argentina, and Paraguay – to deny the chair of the Mercosur customs union to Venezuela. After Uruguay, whose term was expiring, the next country in alphabetical order to assume the chair of the Latin American customs union was to be Venezuela. However, two countries where the Central Intelligence Agency arranged for constitutional coups to oust progressive presidents – Brazil and Paraguay – joined Argentina, ruled by a right-wing president narrowly elected in a dubious electoral process, in denying the chair to Venezuela.

    Venezuelan Foreign Minister Delcy Rodríguez said that what Argentina, Brazil, and Paraguay were doing to Venezuela was the restoration of the CIA’s Operation Condor against Venezuela. Condor was a 1970s operation concocted by Henry Kissinger, the CIA, and fascist governments in Argentina, Chile, Bolivia, Brazil, Paraguay, and Uruguay to target leftists throughout the Condor participants with assassination and torture. In a display of ultimate hubris, Argentina, Brazil, and Paraguay refused to recognize Venezuela as the chair of Mercosur, citing Venezuela’s economic, political and social crises, all of which were hatched by the CIA and its surrogates inside Venezuela.

    If Washington wanted to split Mercosur, it got its wish. Uruguay responded to the actions of Argentina, Brazil, and Paraguay by stating, “there are no legal grounds to prevent the handover of the pro tempore presidency to Venezuela”. Bolivian president Evo Morales tweeted that the Washington-inspired diplomatic assault on Venezuela was “Another attack on the economic integration by instruments of the capitalist system. We salute the Venezuelan pro tempore presidency of Mercosur.”

    The operation to oust progressive president Dilma Rousseff as president of Brazil and replace her with the proto-fascist Michel Temer was designed to prevent Rousseff from opening the 2016 Summer Olympics in Rio de Janeiro. Neither the Obama administration nor the CIA wanted to see South America’s first Olympics opened by a progressive leftist who had once been tortured by CIA-trained interrogators.

    The CIA’s nightmare scenario was a 2016 Olympics where Rousseff would have been joined in the VIP section of the Olympics stadium in Rio by Latin America’s other progressive leaders: Ecuador’s Rafael Correa, Bolivia’s Morales, Uruguay’s Tabare Vazquez, Venezuela’s Nicolas Maduro, Nicaragua’s Daniel Ortega, and Chile’s Michelle Bachelet. With Temer opening the Olympics, Rousseff and many of her political allies in Latin America will not be present in Rio. The United States had no problem ensuring the Rio Olympics became a total disaster just to guarantee that progressive Latin American leaders were denied a platform to show the world that Latin America was no longer under the colonialist boot heel of Washington. It was the same mindset that Washington had in mind for Sochi. The United States was more than willing to ensure disruption at the 2014 Winter Olympics through quiet support, much of it through George Soros-financed organizations, for gay rights and other pressure groups to damage the reputation of the Sochi games.

    Not content with disrupting the Rio Olympics by ousting Rousseff as president of Brazil, Washington doubled down by using its agents of influence to resurrect doping accusations against the Russian Summer Olympics team. Washington’s goal was to see Russia suspended from the Rio games.

    Resisting pressure from Washington, IOC president Thomas Bach wisely decided to avoid a blanket ban of Russian athletes. Bach called such a unilateral ban on Russia participating in the Rio games as a “nuclear option”. He also said that such a “nuclear option” would have resulted in “collateral damage” among innocent athletes. Bach’s use of two geopolitical military terms was no mistake and it bore the mark of someone responding to familiar American “shock and awe” pressure. The United States used its compliant stooges, Germany and Canada, as well as the dubious World Anti-Doping Agency, run by a Scottish lawyer, to call for a total ban on Russian athletes in Rio.

    Washington has also used its influence in ASEAN to ensure the organization became part of the US alliance against China in East Asia. Working behind the scenes within ASEAN, Washington attempted to get the organization, which does not include the United States among its members, to issue a statement backing the decision by the Permanent Court of Arbitration in The Hague rejecting China’s maritime claims to waters and islands in the South China Sea claimed by the Philippines. Cambodia blocked Washington’s maneuver and prevented an ASEAN statement in support of the Philippines against China.

    In 2012 and 2016, ASEAN failed to issue a joint statement following a foreign ministers’ summit. This has happened only twice in the 49-year history of the organization. In both cases, it was Cambodia that stood in the way of an ASEAN statement, initiated by American agents within the ASEAN Secretariat in Indonesia, in opposition to China’s maritime claims in the South China Sea.

    Across the globe, the United States has sought to expand its influence in international organizations. The United States, using Germany and a few right-wing countries in Eastern Europe as surrogates, has ensured the European Union does not weaken economic sanctions against Russia. The Arab League has become a tool of the United States in applying pressure on Syria, thanks mostly to jihadist-supporting regimes in Saudi Arabia, Qatar, Bahrain, the United Arab Emirates, and Kuwait. The African Union has become nothing more than a pathetic cheerleader for the US Africa Command (AFRICOM), which only seeks to undermine the sovereignty of African nations and the rights of ethnic and religious minorities.

    Through its neo-colonialist local partners, Australia and New Zealand, Washington ensures the Pacific Islands Forum remains nothing more than a powerless talking shop. To ensure that the forum never touches the issue of the colonial status of American Samoa, Guam, and the Northern Marianas Islands, Washington has permitted all three colonial territories to join the Pacific Islands Forum as observer states to advance America’s agenda. American nuclear weapons in the Pacific Ocean region are never discussed by the forum nor is the semi-colonial status of three full members of the forum that remain beholden to the dictates of Washington: Micronesia, Marshall Islands, and Palau.

    There is a bull in the china shop of international diplomacy and it wears the ugly and discredited attire of Uncle Sam.

  • "Coincidence?"

    Blame Trump…?

    Is it just us, or are cartoonists the only ones left in the mainstream media capable of even questioning the adminstration's newspeak?

     

    Source: Townhall.com

  • The Indexing End Game: The Wilshire 5000 Only Has 3,607 Stocks

    Submitted by Daniel Drew via Dark-Bid.com,

    Numbers and false advertising have a long history: 4.9% unemployment, 2.5% GDP growth, 72 virgins. Now we can add the Wilshire 5000 to the list.

    What started with good intentions ended with embarrassment as American economic dynamism collapsed in a cascade of falling profit margins, financial engineering, labor devaluation, and lopsided "free trade" agreements. In 1974, Wilshire Associates created the Wilshire 5000, an index of 5,000 stocks that represented nearly the entire stock market. As new companies went public, the index expanded over the years, reaching a peak of 7,562 on July 31, 1998. Since then, the number of companies has been cut in half to 3,607 as of March 31, 2016. Wilshire notes, "The last time the Wilshire 5000 actually contained 5,000 or more companies was December 29, 2005."

    Wilshire 5000

    The Wilshire 5000 is now 5000 in name only. Ben Carlson of the Common Sense blog calls it the "shrinkage effect" and blames it on the lackluster IPO market, which is a shadow of its former self. He notes, "From 1980 to 2000 there was an average of more than 300 companies every year that went public. Since then that number has dropped to an average of around 150 a year." It's yet further evidence of what I pointed out last year: The Stock Market Is Disappearing In One Giant Leveraged Buyout. The relentless pace of share buybacks and new highs in the S&P 500 point to nothing less than a slow-motion buyout of the entire market, which will widen the gap between the uber-rich and everyone else.

    Index investing was supposed to be the last hope of the small investor. Even Warren Buffett, the Baghdad Bob of capitalism, pitches index funds to the average investor, specifically the S&P 500. The premise is that a diversified portfolio will go up over time, and so far, it has worked for anyone who has stayed fully invested. However, there is one simple problem:

    What happens when we run out of stocks to index?

    Today, it's the Wilshire 5000 that runs out of stocks. In 10 years, the S&P 500 investment committee will be grasping for shares, urging Larry Page and Mark Zuckerberg to issue D shares and F shares of Google and Facebook just to maintain the facade of diversification in an increasingly undiversified world.

  • Oil Says the S&P 500 is Heading to 2,050

    The markets are beyond overbought and overstretched.

    The S&P 500 has been trading within a 1% range for three weeks. This range finally broke out to move an incredible 0.22% higher.

    Yes. 0.22%… less than half of one percentage point. This is what has got the bulls foaming at the mouth.

    Meanwhile, Oil, which lead the rally from the February lows… has broken down completely.

    Stocks are on borrowed time. The S&P 500 should retest 2,100 if not 2,050 in the near future.

    On that note, we are already preparing our clients for this with a 21-page investment report titled the Stock Market Crash Survival Guide.

    In it, we outline the coming crash will unfold…which investments will perform best… and how to take out “crash” insurance trades that will pay out huge returns during a market collapse.

    We are giving away just 1,000 copies of this report for FREE to the public.

    To pick up yours, swing by:

    https://www.phoenixcapitalmarketing.com/stockmarketcrash.html

    Best Regards

    Graham Summers

    Chief Market Strategist

    Phoenix Capital Research

     

  • "Sell Everything"… But Why: What Has The Smartest Investors So Spooked?

    Submitted by Nick Colas of Convergex

    Many of the smartest investors out there hate stocks.  Since May, we’ve heard negative equity calls from Stan Druckenmiller, George Soros, Carl Icahn, Jeff Gundlach and Bill Gross.  Wall Street lore says “Never argue about markets with a guy who is much richer than you”.  So we’ll take the discussion in a different direction: what do they know? 

    Successful investors are always more plugged in than the market as a whole – hence their success.  And while we can only guess at the lynchpins of their negative take on stocks, we do have some idea of how significant they must be.  For example, in 2016 the S&P 500 is up 5.9% on a price basis after 1) the Brexit “Leave” vote, 2) dramatically disappointing Q1 and Q2 U.S. GDP, 3) a correction of 20% in oil prices, 4) a Fed that has incorrectly calibrated its public stance on monetary policy, 5) Donald Trump as the Republican candidate for president, and 6) the U.S. 10 Year Treasury at near record low yields. 

    None of that has been enough to spook U.S. equity markets.  So whatever the big boys think they know, it must be really bad.  But what is it, and why is it so hidden from view?

    * * *

    Someone is getting this information before you.”  If you’ve ever worked at a hedge fund, you know this is the worst thing you can hear.  It means you are behind the curve, providing yesterday’s news into an investment process meant to predict the future.  “Titanic sinks!” or “man lands on the moon!” are the more playful retorts you’ll get from co-workers.  But it all means the same thing: up your game, or get a white box from the mail room.

    So when a cluster of high-profile hedge fund and long-biased managers go out of their way to give dire warnings about the U.S. equity market with stocks sitting at or near all-time highs, any sensible investor needs to pay attention.  These are people with access to information that most market participants could only dream of having.  Former heads of state and central bankers, private intelligence operatives, senior government officials, the best consultants in any industry…  It is like having an all access pass to anything, anywhere, any time.
    Here’s a partial list of bold faced names that have panned stocks and other financial assets in recent weeks:

    • Stan Druckenmiller (May 4th at the Ira Sohn Conference): “Get out of the stock market.”
    • George Soros (June 9th, as reported in the Wall Street Journal): “The billionaire hedge fund founder and philanthropist recently directed a series of big, bearish investments, according to people close to the matter.”
    • Carl Icahn (June 9th, on CNBC): “I don’t think you can have (near) zero interest rates for much longer without having these bubbles explode on you” while also saying it’s difficult to assess when exactly that might occur.
    • Jeff Gundlach (last Friday, in an interview with Reuters): “Sell everything. Nothing here looks good.”
    • Bill Gross (in his monthly investment letter, released last week): “I don’t like bonds. I don’t like most stocks. I don’t like private equity.”

    Fun fact: a group of bears is called a “sloth” or a “sleuth”.  We can safely ignore the first reference; none of these investors made their considerable fortunes through laziness.  That leaves us with “Sleuth” – as in, what have they discovered?

    Whatever it is, it has to be something weightier than the headlines we’ve faced so far in 2016. The S&P 500 is, after all, still up 5.9% on the year.  And none of these headlines have tanked U.S. equities:

    • Donald Trump wins Republican nomination for President of the United States against a field of well-funded and well established competition
    • U.S. GDP growth fails to deliver on 2% growth through first half; runs 1.0% average instead
    • After a good run earlier in the year, crude oil prices experience correction and break $40/barrel
    • One gold ETF draws the most fresh money of any exchange listed product YTD; yellow metal at +2 year highs
    • Global economic growth so sluggish that U.S. 10-Year Treasury yields reach 1.5%, far worse than even the depths of the Financial Crisis
    • Britain votes to leave the European Union
    • $13 trillion of global sovereign debt sports a negative yield, so great is the demand for “Safe haven” assets around the world
    • Federal Reserve guidance on future interest rate policy widely ignored. The U.S. central bank says 2 bumps to Fed Funds this year (25 bps apiece), but Fed Funds futures handicap less than one.

    There’s no getting around it: that’s a lot of unexpected news.  The connection between them and higher stocks has exactly one point: bad news drives interest rates lower, and as long as the S&P 500 earns +$115/share those lower rates support ever loftier valuations.

    A bearish call, such as the ones our “Sleuth” has made, must therefore convincingly pull the rug out from the “Lower rates = higher stocks” paradigm.  Don’t tell me that these big-money investors are just making a valuation call – they all know better than that.  Try walking into any of their offices and saying “U.S. stocks trade at 18x earnings… Time to short em…”  Your feet would barely touch the floor as security escorted you and your white mail room box out of the building.

    No.  It must be something larger.  But what?

  • CNN Host Slams America's Greatest Olympian Ever For Not Being Black, Muslim Woman

    Michael Phelps may be the greatest Olympian the world has ever known but for CNN host W. Kamau Bell, he is just a "tall, successful, rich white guy" who clearly didn’t "need the honor" of being chosen by his athlete peers as America's flag-bearer. Instead, Bell exclaims, Ibtihaj Muhammad, a woman, an African-American and a Muslim to boot, should have been chosen because "right now America has enough tall, successful, rich white guys hogging the spotlight trying to make America great."

    After Phelps was chosen by his fellow Olympians, the U.S. Olympic Team tweeted proudly….

    But, as BizPacreview.com reports, liberals wanted U.S. swimmer Michael Phelps to give up the honor of carrying the American flag and leading his country’s athletes at the opening ceremony for the Rio Olympic games Friday night.

    He’s the wrong color and the wrong sex.

    W. Kamau Bell, host of CNN's "United Shades of America," described the swimming sensation as a “tall, successful, rich white guy” who clearly didn’t "need the honor."

     

    “With 22 Olympic medals, you are already the most decorated athlete in Olympic history,” he said.

    But American fencer Ibtihaj Muhammad is a different story…

    …a woman, an African-American and a Muslim to boot.

    “Muhammad carrying the flag would be much bigger than your one moment,” Bell writes. “It would be a symbol for our country in this moment when we are mostly known for one of the most contentious, controversial, scandal-ridden, hateful, xenophobic, jingoistic, and just generally unlikable presidential elections in recent memory. This is at a time when we could use some more symbols of unity and togetherness.”

     

    Bell referred to Muhammad as “a one-stop inclusion shop due to her race, sex and religion. Phelps, on the other hand was something else entirely.

     

    “No offense, but right now America has enough tall, successful, rich white guys hogging the spotlight trying to make America great,” he said, in an obvious reference to Donald Trump.

    "No offense"… but sadly it appears the supposedly apolitical Olympic Games has been hijacked by the liberal agenda – under the guise of fairness, so you can't argue with that, right? – to further the divide in today's identity politics.

    Perhaps when Ibtihaj has won dozens of Olympic medals over a 20 year career, she will also get the opportunity… or perhaps a black, muslim swimmer will emerge who is gender-uncertain and slightly disabled to topple the crown of liberal queen?

    #WhiteSwimmersLivesMatter

  • The Trick To Staying Sane In The Market's New Normal Ponzi Narrative

    Authored by Mark St.Cyr,

    Just as there’s a scheme to pay old investors with new investors money (aka a Ponzi.) There’s another part of the scheme that rarely gets talked about: i.e.,The narrative that fuels the scheme to begin with.

    Much like the original structure which involves money, this too needs an ever-growing amount of gullible, willing participants. However, the currency here is narrative.

    And just like any Ponzi scheme once you lose the narrative – you’ve lost everything. One can not survive without the other. Yet, it is the narrative more often than not that is needed to drive the scheme ever higher. Without it, the scheme implodes via its own weight. The narrative regardless of how outlandish, bizarre, or full of nothing but outright lies must be maintained and vociferously defended by those who are already caught in the scheme.

    In my view the reason why many are finding the greatest confusion, as well as complete consternation is this: Too many are forgetting the “investors” in this scheme are governments (or proxy) with unlimited funding resources, as well as: they also control the narrative. i.e., any data point they wish to convey as what “is” good or bad. I would imagine if Charles Ponzi were alive today he’d argue “And you sent me to jail for?” But I digress.

    Why the scheme of today is far more troubling than those of any bygone era is as I iterated: the access to unlimited funds.

    As has been stated ad infinitum – central banks have the ability to print money ex nihlo. And what people forget is that ability retards the process for the scheme to collapse under its own weight. Remember: a Ponzi scheme works until you begin running out of suckers. And it’s in that math of exponentiation where once you see “a crack” the crumbling comes with near immediacy. There are only so many people, with enough money to swindle.

    However, if one has access to unlimited fund? “Cracks” can be repaired, hence the scheme can continue. The game is the same. The only difference with this one is the physical reality of needing more “bodies” with wallets is no longer a requirement. i.e., One central bank with the gumption to print equals how many investors wallets of yesterday? 10? 100? 10,000? 1,000,000,000,000? I hope you beginning to see my point.

    As long as the central bankers of the world are holding the print button down with both hands and feet – the scheme is going to last a lot longer than anyone ever dreamed possible. But, as I said, the “money” is only half of the equation. This is where the narrative must also match if not supersede. And it is here where those “cracks” are beginning to widen at a dramatic pace, and “money” alone can’t abate the damage. In fact more “money” seems to be exacerbating the problem.

    I have been inundated by notes from friends and family this past week as the “markets” once again hit never before seen in human history heights. However, this time was different from some of those in the past. I could discern two very distinct recollections as they tried to square a few circles. First: How can GDP be in the toilet at the same time they’re touting a “wonderful” employment report? And second: If the “markets” are a representation of the economy – then why does the economy stink? But it wasn’t only them…

    More than likely if you are reading this you are probably one of the few that have concluded via your own observations that this economy is not in any way, shape, manner, or form what it’s being represented or heralded via the main stream media or financial press and are looking for other objective viewpoints. Or, you don’t truly know which side to take for everything seems contradicting. Regardless of which camp you fall into, I commend you for looking as to form your own conclusion. However, with that said, I would venture to bet dollars-to-doughnuts you’ve also come across a phenom that’s growing absolutely louder by the day: Utter contempt that it has yet to fall apart.

    As usual I have been perusing many differing news sites, as well as financial blogs and more. What I’ve been noticing more, and more as of late is the utter despondence by some, and the absolute outrage by others that the markets are still being held captive by central bankers. i.e., “Why won’t this market go down?!”

    Well, it’s quite easy really, and it’s these very same people who understand this point deep down yet, are the one’s losing their minds the fastest: e.g., It’s not a market.

    For years now it’s been self-evident: market rules no longer apply. Technical analysis – useless. Fundamental analysis – useless. The only thing that now matters is whether or not a stock, bond, or ETF is favored by a central bank. Period. Yet, far too many veteran traders or seasoned business people are still viewing many aspects of these markets through a prism of 10 years ago. Those days are gone, long gone. Yet, people are acting (or hoping) that there is still some sense of normalcy still residing within. I’m sorry – there isn’t.

    The issue here is we may indeed be in what some have described as a final turning, much like that described in the brilliant work of Strauss-Howe in their seminal work “The Fourth Turning.” Whether or not one prescribes to this theory is for one’s own counsel. However, if there is one factor which helps put weight into where we are one can’t leave out one of the other most prominent tell-tale signs. To paraphrase Robert Prechter “Governments are the ultimate herd mentality.” And this latest “bull-run” shows just how “more money than sense” this latest bull#### run has become.

    The difference today is, where as in a traditional Ponzi like situation the narrative would break (i.e., people would begin openly complaining about not getting paid) where it would all but disintegrate overnight. That’s not going to happen with near unlimited funds. Even if the ruse is the same.

    The key to watch for (in my opinion) is when the narrative (i.e., everyone’s getting paid) is believed less and less, coupled with: the longer it goes on – the less it’s believed. I feel we are in these stages currently. Which via my thinking is an end-of-game stage.

    However, how long it can go on for is an open question. We’re now closing in on a decade, can it go longer? Again, who knows, but the issue is: if it does – how do you want to play knowing what you know?

    The issue today is not to “blame” what may, or may not, be happening to your psyche as it pertains to the markets. For there aren’t any. Only “markets” now exist. And they are in a complete bizzaro world of their own. The “rabbit hole” central bankers of today have created make the world of Alice look down right normal as compared to the modern Keynesian markets of today.

    The key to keeping one’s sanity (as well as account balance) is to stop waging a rational war with the irrational. Or, said differently: never try to teach a pig to sing. It will do nothing but frustrate you and annoys the hell out of the pig. Too many today are still trying to make this pig sing a tune of reality. It won’t – and it can’t.

    During this period what any prudent individual or business concern should be focusing on is how can they take advantage of the current craziness, and how can they be in the most opportune position when that crazy does indeed come forth. For it is my contention – opportunities of generational proportions will make themselves available to the prepared. Here are a few examples…

    If you are some form of a day trader in stocks you must know more about how to close and get paid on your position just as much, if not more so, than strategies for putting one on in the first place. If you own a business of any size what is just as important to understanding a competitor’s product strength is their strength or weakness should any disruptions within the “markets” occur. i.e., will they still be able to fund? Who is their funding source? Is their main supplier at risk if a currency move takes place in the Yen, Yuan, Dollar, etc., etc, overnight? And what can you do if so? Does it effect you?

    During this central bank influenced “house of crazy” have you taken advantage of these low rates as best you could? Or, have you left that up to your competitor?

    If you’re an investor – are you concentrating on gaining ever the more risk as these “markets” go higher? Or, are you pulling more and more off the table with a concern for the where’s and how’s to make sure there is a return “of” your capital as opposed to a return “on?”

    If you’re in a business or even employed by one – have you taken note as to if your company or competitors are the current “buy, buy, buy” of some central bank portfolio? Do you even know? If you think it’s all about “superior product” only today. I’m sorry – you’re not paying enough attention. A superior product means little if the competition’s bonds are being bought hand over fist – and yours are left vying for scraps. Of course there are myriads more however, this is the way one needs to view today’s current environment.

    As was stated many years ago but is now turned up to 11: The markets can stay irrational much longer than one can remain solvent. Add to that “irrational central bankers?” 11 goes to 11².

    Time is of the essence to ensure one is planning for the correct probabilities, along with watching ever the closer for more tell-tale signs that things are getting closer to a conclusion rather than a continuation. And narrative is the thing to watch vigorously in my opinion. The money is no longer affording the continuation of near religious faith in the omnipotence of central bankers. For the higher the market goes – the louder the questioning is becoming.

    The key today is to not think as Cypher (played by Joe Pantoliano) did in “The Matrix” (1999) when he longed for the option to change his decision and take the blue pill as opposed to the red. No, that’s not an option no matter how much one would like. You can’t un-know what you now know to be true. No, the trick to keeping one’s sanity, as well as wallet in tact is know what games are rigged and which are not. Then decide as in another movie tag line made famous by a computer named “Joshua” (depicted in the movie War Games 1983) when it stated…

    “A STRANGE GAME. THE ONLY WINNING MOVE IS NOT TO PLAY.”

    If you watch the ‘markets” closely what you’ll find is that line is picking up ever the more steam the higher these “markets” go.

    That’s how you know the narrative is coming unglued. Just when it has a catastrophic failure event? That’s anyone’s guess. And it’s all a guess at this point.

  • The S&P Is Now Set To Report Its Second Consecutive Annual Earnings Drop Since The Financial Crisis

    With 86% of the companies in the S&P 500 reporting earnings to date for Q2 2016, Q2 earnings season is almost over. 69% of companies have reported earnings above the mean estimate and 54% have reported sales above the mean estimate. Still, despite the beat (on the back of what may be Reg-FD busting leakage of company earnings to sellside analysts just so companies can beat EPS in the last moment as described on Friday), earnings growth, or lack thereof, for Q2 2016 is expected to be -3.5%. This will make the first time the index has recorded five consecutive quarters of year-over-year declines in earnings since the financial crisis.

    As the chart below shows, the forward PE of the S&P500 has now been flat for two years, even as the actual index has surged to record highs on the back of even greater multiple expansion, as both the economy and profit growth has slowed down: a Finance 101 paradox.

    How lofty is that? Moments ago Goldman said that “The median S&P 500 stock trades at a forward P/E of 18.2x, ranking in the 98th percentile since 1976.” It’s also the reason why Goldman unveiled a tactical sell on stocks one week ago.

    It gets worse. Whereas one week ago, Q3 consenus earnings for the first time dipped negative, as of Friday sellside analysts now expect third quarter earnings to decline a substantial -1.7% Y/Y as every sector has seen its forecast earnings drop substantially.

    Which means that earnings growth is now not expected to return until Q4 2016, and also means that if consensus is accurate, S&P500 EPS are on pace to decline for a record 6 consecutive quarters.

    A few months ago, when Q3 consensus EPS was still well in the green, we predicted that Q3 would ultimately be revised to negative. It was. Now we predict that over the next 2-3 months Q4, EPS which is currently expected to grow 5.7% will likewise be dragged into negative territory.

    Finally, as a result of the recent cuts to Q3 earnings consensus, and the slowdown to Q4 EPS growth, one can forget about 2016 full year earnings growth. According to Factset, year-over-year earnings are now set to decline -0.3% for the full year, after starting off the year at +6%. This would mark the second time the S&P has reported 2 consecutive years of earnings declines since 2008 and 2009.

    More from FactSet:

    For the first quarter of 2016, the actual, year-over-year earnings decline reported by the S&P 500 was -6.7%. For the second quarter of 2016, the blended (combines actual results for companies that have reported and estimated results for companies yet to report), year-over-year earnings decline for the S&P 500 stands at -3.5%. For the third quarter of 2016, the estimated earnings decline stands at -1.7%. For the fourth quarter of 2016, the estimated earnings growth rate is 5.7%.

     

    Given that the index is expected to report earnings declines for the first three quarters of 2016, what are analyst expectations for year-over-year earnings for all of 2016? Do analysts believe earnings will decline for all of 2016 also?

     

    The answer is yes. As of today, the estimated earnings decline for the S&P 500 for CY 2016 stands at -0.3%. However, expectations for earnings growth for CY 2016 have been falling not just over the past few weeks, but over the past several months. On December 31, the estimated earnings growth rate for CY 2016 was 5.9%. By March 31, the estimated earnings growth rate had declined to 1.3%. By June 30, the estimated earnings growth rate had decreased to 0.1%. Today, it stands at -0.3%.

     

    If the index reports a year-over-year decline in earnings for CY 2016, it will mark the first time the index has reported two consecutive years of earnings declines since CY 2008 (-25.4%) and CY 2009 (-8.0%).

     

    At the sector level, four sectors are projected to report a year-over-year decline in earnings for CY 2016, led by the Energy sector (-72.0%). The Energy sector is expected to the largest contributor to the year-over-year earnings decline for the index for the full year. If the Energy sector is excluded, the estimated earnings growth rate for the S&P 500 for CY 2016 would improve to 2.8%.

    Translation: expect even higher record highs in the S&P 500 this coming week.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 7th August 2016

  • On This "Atom Bomb"-Anniversary, You're Being Lied To About Hiroshima (And Much More..)

    Via The Daily Bell,

    Japan marked the 71st anniversary of the atomic bombing of Hiroshima on Saturday by renewing calls for a nuclear weapons free world and urging leaders to follow the example of President Barack Obama and visit the bomb sites.  –Washington Post

    It is the anniversary of dropping an atom bomb on Hiroshima. But the Hiroshima narrative is a lie.

    We’ve reported at considerable length about how the whatever was dropped on Hiroshima and Nagasaki didn’t have the kind of immediate destructive impact that is portrayed.

    Crawford Sams who ran the Atomic Bomb Casualty Commission in Japan had this to say about the bombing of Hiroshima and Nagasaki (Transcript HERE.) :

    When the bomb went off, about 2 thousand people out of 250 thousand got killed [in Hiroshima] – by blast, by thermal radiation, or by intense x-ray, gamma radiation … You see, it wasn’t “Bing” like the publicity here [said]: a bomb went off and a city disappeared. No such thing happened. That was the propaganda for deterrent …

     

    When I came back to this country, I was appalled, from a military standpoint, to find that our major planners in the War Department were using their own propaganda, 100 thousand deaths, Bing! …

     

    You don’t hear much about the effects of Nagasaki because actually it was pretty ineffective. That was a narrow corridor from the hospital … down to the port, and the effects were very limited as far as the fire spread and all that stuff. So you don’t hear much about Nagasaki.

    We’ve reported that a squadron of 66 bombers were launched on August 6th (666) to bomb the municipality of Imabari, even though Imabari. had been bombed already, twice.

    This bombing squadron may well have fire-bombed Hiroshima instead, as Hiroshima was not far away.  HERE is a video on the squadron and also a narrative from a book by Edwin Hoyt entitled Inferno, the Firebombing of Japan.

    Here is some narrative from a PERTINENT PAGE in the actual book.

    “Suddenly,  one day, I was told something unexpected,” Manabe said. “When I was looking at the train timetable, I found that no trains stopped at Imabari station … I wondered why the third largest city in the province had no train service. It  sounded ridiculous…

     

    The other guy said, “Wow! No Imabari Station. But … all the trains pass by Imabari Station.”

     

    A third guy stepped up … “It’s not strange at all. There’s no stop because there’s no Imabari City anymore. It got burned up last April in the air raid … No buildings, no houses, no people … The whole city burned up and the people ran away …”

     

    A fellow soldier explained to Manabe. “The air raids came on the 26th of April and the 8th of May. Imabari was burned up. My father was in business there. We had a wholesale draper business. All gone. All burned up.”

    The attacks on Hiroshima and Nagasaki were horrible and tragic. But whether they were results of “atom” bombs (certainly in the sense that people understand them today) is at least seriously questionable.

    More from the Post:

    Quoting part of Obama’s speech in Hiroshima in May, Mayor Kazumi Matsui urged countries with nuclear weapons to “have the courage to escape the logic of fear, and pursue a world without them …

     

    “I once again urge the leaders of all nations to visit the A-bombed cities.”  Like Obama’s, he said that such visits “will surely etch the reality of the atomic bombings in each heart.”

    Visiting Hiroshima and Nagasaki won’t etch anything into your heart but lies.

    And the sickening falsehoods allow politicians a faux rhetorical nobility that they don’t deserve.

    Whatever happened at Hiroshima and Nagasaki is nothing like what is being recited today.

    Bikini Atoll, where additional atomic bombs were tested following the Hiroshima and Nagasaki attacks, was repopulated by 1968, even though radiation estimates suggested the island would be uninhabitable for a thousand years.

    The actual bomb blasts seem to have been faked. Two years ago, the controversial but prolific investigator Miles Mathis – an artist and mathematician – published a debunking HERE entitled, The Bikini Atoll Nuclear Tests were Faked.”

    …For more proof, we can go to Google. You can get a picture of the Bikini Atoll today from Google Earth. That’s dated 2013, not 1945. We are told the locals can’t live there now because of radioactivity, but we see at least three proofs against that.

     

    …We see lots of plant life both on and offshore. Radioactivity affects plants just as it .affects animals, so the island should be barren.

     

    Remember, the Bikini Atoll wasn’t said to be blasted by only Able and Baker. It was blasted 23 times, including three of the biggest blasts ever from US testing: the 4.5 megaton Navajo and the 5 megaton Tewa, in 1956; and the 15 megaton Bravo in 1954.

    Why would Bikini Island tests have been faked if the bombs dropped on Hiroshima and Nagasaki were real?

    Did the US suddenly run out of bombs?

    And what about Russia? How did the USSR make nuclear bombs while the Pentagon was faking theirs?

    Mathis writes some photographs of USSR nuclear explosions appear fake.

    When did the USSR get the “bomb?” And even more importantly, when did the US finally create the weapons of mass destruction that so frighten us today?

    When did the Cold War really start? Did both sides know that nuclear weapons were not as powerful as advertised? Or maybe that they didn’t exist at all as described?

    Hiroshima and Nagasaki themselves are thriving small cities and there is no appreciable difference in radiation between these two municipalities and other cities in Japan.

    Additional issues (See sources at the end of this article.):

    • Death rates at Hiroshima and Nagasaki are not higher than elsewhere.
    • Three days after the Hiroshima bombing, a trolley was running again.
    • The bank at “ground zero” remains standing to this day.
    • Eight Jesuits hiding in their church survived the blast at ground zero to tell the tale – spared only by the intervention of the Virgin Mary.
    • Outside of the Jesuits, and one communist reporter who hated the US, there was no significant reporting from either Hiroshima or Nagasaki for at least a month.
    • For years in both Japan and the US, it was a crime punishable by death to speak or write about the bombings.
    • The entire atom bomb narrative created by the Pentagon was delivered to the public via a single writer from the New York Times who later turned out to be on the Pentagon payroll.

    The narrative of the bombings was surely shaped just as the Pentagon and its controllers wished for it to be. It was acquiesced to by the Japanese government that had its own reasons for promoting nuclear untruths.

    Whatever happened at Hiroshima and Nagasaki has not been accurately reported. In fact, it is probably not too strong to say that what has been reported may constitute (in aggregate) one of the most profound lies of the 20th century.

    It calls into question further “truths” about Western society that we live with to this day.

    Nuclear weapons are a perfect propaganda for the state.

    -Their tests cannot be ascertained at close range because they are too powerful.

     

    -Their inner workings cannot be disseminated because they are “top secret.”

     

    -Their programmatic elements cannot be observed by the normal media because too much information available to the public can stimulate adversarial or even terrorist activity.

    Modern Western society is a virtual tissue of lies designed to make you believe you are living in a “civil society” (no, it’s not civil) faced by life-threatening challenges that only Western governments and the shadowy powers behind them can overcome.

    The world is not running out of food, nor water. It’s not going to burn to a cinder because the air is clogged with “carbon.”

    The economic disasters we face are purely man-made. Absent monopoly central banking, they would not exist.

    Now we are facing “radical Islam” – another false narrative put in place by the same banking elite that has tortured the West for centuries.

    This follows on the heels of numerous, serial US wars and the obscene, manufactured Hell of World Wars One and Two.

    Thank goodness for the Internet and what we have called the Internet Reformation.

    Thanks to information that has emerged from secret recesses (and the patterns they portray), we know more about the Way the World Really Works  than any single group of individuals in recorded history.

    Conclusion: It has been a great privilege to live in these unusual times. However, please take note: The reality of the world has revealed a titanic struggle between good and evil. Which side are you on? And just as importantly, what are you going to do about it?

    *  *  *

    Some Nuclear Anomalies and Sources Pertaining to Questionable Hiroshima and Nagasaki Events

    • The dreaded mushroom cloud presented by the Hiroshima memorial is actually a photo of Hiroshima on fire. HERE.
    • A squadron of 66 bombers was directed to Imabari. in the early morning of August 6 (666) – the morning of the A-bomb – but Imabari. had been bombed already, twice. This bombing squadron might have fire-bombed Hiroshima instead. HERE.
    • Initial reports in Japan were that Hiroshima was firebombed. AP filed the same report. HERE.
    • In the aftermath of the explosion, Hiroshima (and Nagasaki) look no different than Tokyo after it was firebombed. HERE and HERE.
    • In Hiroshima numerous buildings are standing along with erect tree stumps. HERE.
    • Limited trolley service was revived in Hiroshima after only three days. HERE.
    • The Hiroshima bank at the epicenter of the bomb is fully functional and can be seen HERE.
    • Predictions of endless radiation poisoning for thousands of years proved untrue. Today, Hiroshima and Nagasaki’s radiation levels are normal.  HERE.
    • Outdoor shadows and other dramatic evidences of the Hiroshima bombing seem to be faked. HERE.
    • The initial American reporting on Hiroshima and Nagasaki bombs  came from Wilfred Burchett and William L. Laurence. One was a communist (Burchett) who hated America and reportedly ended up on the Kremlin’s payroll. HERE.
    • The other was secretly a paid employee of US armed forces. He was the man who rode with the crew to witness the nuke dropped on Nagasaki. His report on the attack is painful to read for all the wrong reasons. HERE.
    • Laurence was also the only reported to cover the development of the atomic bomc, see the initial bomb testing (from 20 miles away) and to report from Nagasaki. In other words, only one reporter, paid by the US war dept, provided the entirety of the initial civilian narrative for the testing of nuclear devices and then bombing of Nagasaki. Just one. It was roughly the same at Hiroshima and Nagasaki. Reporters were not allowed to visit. HERE.
    • Military officers were asked to exaggerate the injury count.
    • Hiroshima and Nagasaki were apparently shut down for months. There was no influx of Western reporters. The nuclear narrative was developed by the Pentagon from what we can tell. HERE.
    • It was immediately made a crime punishable by death in both the US and Japan to discuss nuclear attacks and the technology  that created them. (“The restricted dataclauses of the US Atomic Energy Act specifies that all nuclear weapons-related information is to be considered classified unless explicitly declassified, and makes no distinction about whether said information was created in a laboratory by a government scientist or anywhere else in the world by private citizens.”) HERE.
    • As for Little Boy, the bomb dropped on Hiroshima, photos show it seems to lack the necessary antennas to function. HERE.
    • There were apparently several Little Boys of various sizes, not just one. HERE.
    • The narrative surrounding the dropping of the Hiroshima bombing is reportedly inaccurate. “Levers” were “pulled” to drop the bomb, but the automatic system did the job. HERE.
    • The automatic targeting system itself was an inaccurate device that reportedly might drop bombs miles from where the pilot hoped to deliver them. The odds that both bombs ended up delivering effective blasts are surprisingly low.
    • The Nagasaki bombing narrative was confused for decades. The story kept changing. Even the pilot was misidentified. The crews were switched. HERE.
    • The photos of the Nagasaki mushroom cloud are suspicious. They appear to be composite images with cloud cover inserted to ensure that identification of Nagasaki is impossible. HERE.  Other Nagasaki photos appear fake.
    • One of the two famous and supposedly identical photos of the Nagasaki mushroom cloud includes part of a plane. One of the photos is thus fake, or at least retouched. HERE.
    • For events of such magnitude, there are surprisingly few eyewitness accounts of the actual blast. Many eyewitness accounts start the day after the blast or during the firestorm. Only a few Japanese survivors have stepped forward to become regular “faces” of the blast.
    • There don’t seem to be any civilian photos of either mushroom cloud taken by Japanese civilians or even military facilities. This one HERE looks evidently faked.
    • Much of the Western Hiroshima narrative regarding the blast was developed by a single Jesuit priest who, along with other Jesuits, had survive at the epicenter of the blast through the intervention of the Virgin Mary. HERE.
    • The eyewitness accounts of the blast itself have a repetitive and artificial quality to them, at least the ones we read. One doctor claims to have treated 2000-3000 injured on the first day. HERE.

    There are other disturbing elements to the Nagasaki and Hiroshima bombings, and if you are interested, you can see more documents calling many elements of the attacks into question HERE.

    See information on an alternative theory regarding nuclear weapons HERE:

    Additional DB Nuclear Articles to Share (With Links)

    North Korea Nuclear Hoax Heightens Alternative Media Skepticism March 10

    The Trillion Dollar Nuclear Weapons Fraud April 15

    NASA and Nuclear Activities: More Scrutiny Needed May 25

    NY Times Uses Hiroshima to Justify Gun Control, Even as More Evidence Questions A-Bomb Scenario June 15

    NY Times: Hiroshima Mushroom Cloud Actually ‘Smoke from Raging Firestorm’ June 20

    Brexit’s Modern Manipulation and Its A-Bomb Beginnings June 29

    Pentagon’s Not Properly Funding Its Trillion-Dollar Nuclear Costs July 1

    More Nuke Questions: Lies About Trident, Hiroshima, Nagasaki and Now Bikini, Too July 25

    North Korea Nuclear Tensions Said to Increase – But How Do We Know It’s True?
     
    July 28 

    North Korea Has Missiles, but Does It Have Nuclear Weapons? August 3

    How Dangerous, Really? Trump Now Denies Asking Why US Does Not Use Nuclear Weapons August 3

     

  • 14% Of Americans Have Negative Wealth

    According to the New York Federal Reserve, 14% of the U.S. population lives in households that have “negative” wealth. In other words, these are households that have more debts piled up than assets, which puts their net worth in minus territory.

    But what does a negative wealth household look like?

    In the following chart, VisualCapitalist’s Jeff Desjardins compares the data on negative wealth households with the data on their positive counterparts. There are some obvious and stark contrasts…

     

    Courtesy of: Visual Capitalist

    Households that are deep in the red have the majority of their wealth in the family car – automobiles make up 45% of the value of their total assets. Housing makes up 20% of their assets by value.

    For positive wealth households, it is the reverse: 40% of wealth is in the home, and 15% in vehicles.

    The composition of debt is also very telling. Negative wealth households have a whopping 47% of debt in student loans, while positive houses have just 6%.

  • The Propaganda War With Putin

    Submitted by Renee Parsons via Strategic-Culture.com,

    If it had not already been apparent, the net effect of the DNC email hack has been to kick open the door to a deep American antagonism towards Russian President Vladimir Putin.

    In what has become an old fashioned American pile-on, President Barack Obama, Presidential candidate Hillary Clinton, the Democratic Party and what seems the entire political establishment as well as the MSM, have united to undermine Putin as if to prime the American public for war with Russia.

    War is, after all, more successful when the people have been thoroughly programmed. For instance, for a war-weary American public ‘we are bombing civilians out of a humanitarian necessity’ may work well. If necessary, a little hysteria wouldn’t hurt but most of all, a necessary requirement is to efficiently tutor the public consciousness to despise the adversary. In this case, Clinton has identified Putin as the adversary and that he is one evil reincarnation of Adolf Hitler.

    Among media outlets, Politico, once considered a ‘liberal’ magazine ran “Inside’s Putin’s Information War” whose author has found a lucrative book deal on the subject and yes, this is the same Politico that requested DNC permission to publish re the Sanders/Clinton primary. The Times of London joined the effort to demonize Putin with several anti Russian articles over the weekend including “Putin’s Information War” which ran on July 30th followed by “Inside Putin’s Info War on America’ in the Wall Street Journal on July 31st.   Keep your eyes peeled as the “Putin Info War” concept is sure to catch on.

    As part of the effort to synchronize public antipathy to an appropriately belligerent level, the Associated Press recently published an article for wide distribution entitled “Clinton v. Putin: Russian television shows what Kremlin thinks of her.” Perhaps the AP presumed to rouse the American public in defense of Hillary Clinton.

    The first paragraph began with the admission that Clinton’s entire acceptance speech had been broadcast live on nationwide television in Russia.   If anyone yearns for the day when a Putin speech will be broadcast across American television, forgetaboutit. A good guess is that the intellectually-lazy American public including many liberals who have forgotten how to think, would not make the effort to inform themselves of world events.

    Thereafter, the AP article followed with a series of assertions that dazzled the reader with its irony such as:

    “Viewers were told that Clinton sees Russia as an enemy and cannot be trusted” and “the Democratic convention was portrayed as proof that American democracy is a sham.” The story added that Channel One introduced Clinton “as a politician who puts herself above the law, who is ready to win at any cost and who is ready to change her principles depending on the political situation.”

    If the AP reporter wrote with the intention that the American public would rise up en masse and demand satisfaction; how unfair of those Russkies to write like that about our Gal Hill – that reporter was dead wrong.

    What the reporter did not mention was that a significant number of Americans, including some of those who plan to hold their collective noses while voting for Clinton in sheer terror of Trump, agree with those quotes. What the reporter did not mention was that the Sanders and Trump campaigns have been largely based on those sentiments giving Clinton an unexpected run for the money which explains why she has had to pull out all the stops to beat Trump, a candidate who, by any standard, should have been a piece of cake.

    Giving a wink and a nod to the MSM, Clinton formalized her accusations on Sunday Fox News that ‘Russian intelligence” was responsible for the DNC hacking and linked her opponent Donald Trump to Vladimir Putin.

    Using the DNC hack issue as an opportunity to further hammer on Putin, Clinton asserted during the Fox interview that ‘we KNOW that Russian intelligence services hacked into the DNC and we KNOW that they arranged for a lot of those emails to be released and we KNOW that Donald Trump has shown a very troubling willingness to back up Putin, to support Putin.”

    A good follow up by an engaged journalist might have been what does Clinton know, how does she know it and when did she know it? If the proof exists, why the reluctance to provide specifics to the American public – but that might require initiative, transparency and some candor? While challenging Trump on his commitment to the Constitution (who clearly could use an Intro 101 class), wasn’t Clinton trained, as an attorney, to understand that evidence comes before the accusation?

    This is not the first time that Clinton has personally attacked Putin. In March, 2014 before a University of California audience, she said he was “thin-skinned,” was trying to “re-sovietize Europe while threatening instability and the peace of Europe.” In citing ‘Russian aggression,” she is smart enough to know the difference between protecting ethnic Russians who have centuries of deep cultural roots in Ukraine and Crimea as compared to Hitler’s invasions of eastern Europe.

    An impartial observer can only assume Clinton has knowingly skewed the chronology of events in the Ukraine which began with the US-initiated overthrow of a democratically elected President on February 22, 2014; followed by an overwhelming vote on March 16th by Crimean citizens to reunite with Russia which was then followed by the legal annexation of the Crimean peninsula to Russia on March 18th.   What is so difficult to understand?

    Thanks to Clinton’s repetitive disinformation campaign, accusations of ‘Russian aggression’ are now widespread; repeated without regard to the evidence throughout the mainstream media and by Members of Congress, many of whom choose to remain uninformed.

    Back to the Fox interview, she could not resist adding, with mock indignation, that “I think laying out the facts raises serious issues about Russian interference in our elections, in our democracy.” And as if the rest of us were asleep at the wheel and could not distinguish fact from fiction, she further added that “For Trump to both encourage that and to praise Putin despite what appears to be a deliberate effort to try to affect the election I think raises national security issues.”

    Does she not see that ‘interference in our elections, in our democracy’ is exactly what the DNC did to the Bernie Sanders campaign?

    And has no bright eyed, eager beaver staff person yet pointed out to Clinton that if Russia and Putin had been intent on disrupting the American presidential election, why wouldn’t they have gone after Clinton’s ‘classified’ State Department emails on her personal server that were subject to an FBI investigation and with the potential of criminal charges? Then again, an educated assumption might be that Russian intelligence does have those emails in their possession. Now there’s a real national security issue.

    In her eagerness to further aggravate US – Russian relations, apparently Clinton is not only unfamiliar with the State Department’s Foreign Service Protocol for the Modern Diplomat guidelines for rules and process of diplomatic protocol (or perhaps it does not apply to her), but appears she did not receive the memo from the Director of National Intelligence (DNI) James Clapper.

    Responding to the DNC-Russian furor in a more blasé and introspective manner than might be expected, Clapper stepped in as a calm voice of reason stating that he was ‘somewhat taken aback by the hyperventilation on this” and that the US was in “reactionary mode” regarding cyber-attacks. Clapper further indicated he was ‘not ready’ to identify Russia as the hacker “I don’t think we are quite ready yet to make a call on attribution.”

    Interestingly, Clapper commented that “cyber warfare is not ‘terribly different than what went on during the Cold War” suggesting that it is ‘just a different modality.” He further suggested that the American people ‘need to accept’ and ‘become more resilient’ since cyber threats are a major long term challenge. Americans should ‘not be quite so excitable when we have yet another instance.”  Hmm…wonder to whom he was referring.

    In other words, we spy on them, they spy on us – all’s fair in love and war and that there is a certain level of honor among (cyber) thieves.

  • Visualizing 31 Incredible Facts About Gold

    No metal can claim a legacy comparable to gold.

    As VisualCapitalist's Jeff Desjardins notes, gold has been used to show affectionate love, but it has also represented power, status, and riches for the greatest kings of antiquity. Gold’s history is truly legendary, ripe with colorful tales and anecdotes from people ranging from William Shakespeare to Christopher Columbus.

    But gold doesn’t just “talk the talk”.

    Gold also walks the walk, because its grandeur is backed up by impressive chemical properties and uses. As we documented in our extensive Gold Series, it’s been used as a monetary metal for thousands of years by ancient civilizations such as the Lydians, Greeks, Chinese, and Romans. It’s the most malleable and ductile metal, and it doesn’t tarnish or corrode. Over time, these properties have helped people to associate gold with concepts such as immortality or royalty.

    Even today, people are still finding new uses for gold that are impressive in their own right. For example, scientists recently discovered a gold alloy that is four times tougher than titanium.

    Without further ado, here are 31 incredible facts about gold…

    Courtesy of: Visual Capitalist

  • Establishment Tries To Suppress "Dissident Actuaries" Explosive Report On Public Pensions

    Submitted by Walter Russell Mead via The American Interest,

    America’s slow-motion public pension train-wreck (by some estimates, the shortfall currently exceeds $3 trillion) has been kept in motion for years by deeply dishonest accounting practices employed by state and local governments, which presume unrealistically that pension funds can consistently earn white-hot annual returns approaching eight percent. So it’s disappointing, but not particularly surprising, that the actuarial establishment moved to suppress a report pointing this out.

    Pensions and Investments reports:

    The American Academy of Actuaries and the Society of Actuaries Monday abruptly disbanded its longtime joint Pension Finance Task Force, objecting to a task force paper challenging the standard actuarial practice of valuing public pension plan liabilities.

     

    “This paper (is) being censored by the AAA” and SOA, said Edward Bartholomew, who was a member of the former task force, in an interview. “They didn’t want it to get out.”

     

    Others who were members of the task force also said in interviews the two actuarial groups are trying to suppress publication of the paper.

    There are powerful interests that don’t want public pensions to be governed by the same kinds of accounting principles used in the private sector because… well, because if they were, public pensions would go from seriously underfunded to catastrophically underfunded.

    Union officials and state legislators (in both parties) seem to believe that it makes more sense to allow public pension funds to play “let’s pretend” with public money. To be sure, the sudden imposition of a tougher standards would cripple business as usual in many state and local governments, so there can and should be some reasonable accommodations made to allow the adjustment to take place in a less disruptive fashion. Governing by catastrophe is almost never a good idea, and a series of small and incremental changes is usually (though not always) a better way to manage public affairs.

    In the long run, shifting to a more portable system of public pensions—defined contribution, rather than defined-benefit—wouldn’t just help save states and municipalities from fiscal ruin. It would also do much to improve the performance of the civil service. The current system creates a jobs-for-life mentality in public employment because workers need to stay at their positions for decades to collect the full value of their pensions. Somebody who was a good teacher at 30 but wants to leave and should leave at 40 is currently trapped. Also, one of the reasons the unions fight quality evaluations so fiercely is that the loss of job and pension is so much more draconian than simply losing a job.

    The report from dissident actuaries might have helped push state and local pension systems down a more sustainable path. And the conduct of American actuarial leaders—disbanding a reputable task force that had prepared a report that the bureaucracies didn’t like, and then hinting at legal action if the report is published—is irresponsible at best and corrupt at worst. Is it any wonder that Americans are fed up with experts and the institutions they manage?

  • Why Oil Under $40 Will Bring It All Down Again: That's Where SWFs Resume Liquidating

    After several months of aggressive selling of stocks in late 2015 and early 2016, the culprit for the indiscriminate liquidation and concurrent market swoon was revealed when it emerged that the seller was not only China (which was forced to sell USD-denominated reserves to offset a surge in capital outflows following the Yuan devaluation), but also Sovereign Wealth Funds belonging to oil-exporting countries, who were dumping billions in risk assets to offset the collapse of the price of oil, which in turn exacerbated current account and budget deficits.

    Among the prominent sellers was Norway and Saudi Arabia, arguably the biggest casualties of the death of the Petrodollar to date, as well as Abu Dhabi, Kuwait and most other SWFs, listed on the tabel below.

     

    As JPM calculated back in January, the SWF equity selling was inversely proportional to the price of oil: according to the bank, SWF’s would liquidate some $75 billion in equities in 2017 assuming oil at $31 per barrel. Needless to say, the lower oil goes, the more selling there would  be. 

    “This prospective $75bn of equity selling by SWFs in 2016 is not huge but becomes significant after taking into account the potential swing in equity fund flows,” JPM continued, in an attempt to discuss the impact this will have on markets. “Last year retail investors bought $375bn of equity funds globally. This year we expect an amount between 0 and $200bn. Subtracting $75bn of selling from SWFs would leave the overall equity flow from Retail+SWF investors barely positive for 2016.”

    Then starting in February, oil – which had just tumbled to the low-$20s, its lowest price in over a decade – underwent a miraculous surge catalyzed by erroneous, if constantly reiterated, narrative of an imminent OPEC supply cut, a short squeeze, an algo stop hunt, an unprecedented Chinese importing spree to replenish its now almost full Strategic Petroleum Reserve, and even speculation of central bank intervention to prop up the “black gold.” In fact, just a few months after February, oil had doubled, reaching $50 even as we and many others warned, that there simply is not enough demand and far too much supply to sustain such a price.

    No matter the cause, the biggest benefit of this oil surge is that the same SWFs which were actively selling stocks in early late 2015 and early 2016 put their liquidation on hold as oil rose above $40. And in this illiquid, low volume market, the absence of a determined seller is all that it took to push the S&P to all time highs, and as of Friday’s close, just shy of 2,200, a level which even sellside brokers such as Goldman believe is effectively in bubble territory and in the 99% percentile of all overvalued metrics. 

    However, just a few weeks later we are now back in a crude bear market, with oil briefly dipping under $40, on the back of concerns about a gasoline glut and fears that the resurgent dollar will further pressure oil. Worse, with oil returns back to the $40 range and threatens to accelerate the move to the downside, it also brings back with it the specter of SWF liquidations, because as JPM’s Nikolaos Panigirtzoglou points out in his latest weekly note, that’s where the wealth fund selling returns. 

    Here is why as oil approaches $40, the price of crude suddenly matters a lot to equity bulls:

    We had noted in F&L April 22nd what the impact would be of a $45 average Brent oil price on SWF behavior. At the time, we noted that the stability in oil prices meant that the pressure on SWFs to abruptly sell assets would diminish over time. In addition, we argued that SWF selling should focus more on fixed-income securities during the last three quarters of the year, given that SWFs mostly liquidated equity and HF mandates during last year and the first quarter of this year. However, given recent declines in oil prices, we revisit the analysis assuming an average oil price of $40 for 2016 vs $45 before. The YTD average has already fallen to $42.

     

    In our previous analysis based on a $45 average oil price for 2016, we projected the current account balance for oil-producing countries to worsen from around -$70bn in 2015 to -$140bn in 2016. This estimate is based on the same sensitivity of the current account balance to the change in oil prices as last year, i.e. between 2014 and 2015. However, the depletion of official assets could be higher than the current account deficit if these countries also experience capital outflows as it happened last year. If we assume $80bn of capital outflow for 2016, the same level as last year, we project a depletion of $150bn in FX reserves and a depletion of $50bn in SWF assets.

     

    If we assume an average oil price of $40 for 2016 instead, using a similar sensitivity analysis and assumptions as described above, we project the current account balance for oil-producing countries to worsen from around -$70bn in 2015 to -$183bn in 2016. This would imply depletion of $170bn in FX reserves and a depletion of $75bn in SWF assets.

     

    The differences in the SWF selling using the two different average oil price assumptions can be seen in Figure 9.

     

     

    A $40 average oil price, and assuming that these reserve managers and SWFs sell in accordance to their average allocation, would imply selling of $118bn of government bonds and $45bn of public equities. If we assume reserve managers and SWFs are mostly done with selling equities and that they are more likely to liquidate fixed-income mandates, this would imply selling of around  $120bn-$160bn of government bonds and $10bn-$15bn of corporate bonds. However, should oil prices continue to fall further below $40 on a sustained basis, SWFs would face greater pressure to sell equity mandates, similar to the end of last year and the beginning of this year.

    Indeed: the lower the price of oil drops, the faster what until recently had been a paradoxical disconnect (and even a negative correlation between oil and risk assets as we showed earlier), will recouple. And it’s not just the SWF selling: recall that earlier this week, JPM’s head quant Marko Kolanovic warned that should oil return back to the $30s, it would also trigger program selling of stocks.

    CTA signals for oil recently turned from strongly positive to moderately negative. This has contributed to past-month divergence between S&P 500 and oil (~1.5 standard deviations) and is closely monitored by equity and high yield credit investors. It is our view that the risk of CTAs significantly increasing oil shorts over the next 1 month is low. For oil momentum to further deteriorate, oil would need to drop to ~$30 at which point the medium term momentum (strongest signal) would turn negative and trigger selling.

    To summarize, if oil were to drop back under $40, not only would it precipitate even more selling of oil as momentum strategies flip, but it would catalyze a liquidation by those SWFs who thought they were done selling equities, leading to a return of the same sellers that pushed the S&P back to the low 1,900s a short 6 months ago.

    So for all those curious where stocks are going next, the simple answer is: keep an eye on what oil does next.

  • Hillary Clinton: "I May Have Short-Circuited The Truth" About The Email Scandal

    One of the biggest surprises over the past week was Donald Trump’s dramatic meltdown, and subsequent escalation, with the family of Humayun Khan, the US Muslim captain killed in Afghanistan in 2014, who during the DNC, tangentially accused Trump and his potential policies of being responsible for their son’s death (he wasn’t). What is most striking is that instead of ignoring this attempt to bait the Republican candidate in public, to which he most gladly obliged, he should have simply moved on and stayed on the offensive, pressing Hillary over the recent Wikileaks disclosure revealing the cronyism and corruption within the Democratic Party, as well push the familiar narrative of her email scandal.

    Conveniently, Hillary helped him do just that yesterday, when she acknowledged on Friday afternoon that she may have “short-circuited” when she claimed in recent interviews that FBI Director James Comey said she was “truthful” about her use of a private email server as secretary of state.  In doing so Hillary once again shifted the news spotlight away from Trump and back on to herself, as she once again revealed that the only consistent thing about Hillary Clinton are the constant lies.

    Following a heavily covered interview with Fox News’ Chris Wallace, Hillary stated that Comey had found her statements “truthful” and “consistent” with what she has said publicly. Clinton’s lying led The Atlantic to publish an article titled “ Why Can’t Hillary Clinton Stop Lying?” and the Washington Post’s fact checker Glenn Kessler awarded her four “Pinocchios”, adding that “Clinton is cherry-picking statements by Comey to preserve her narrative about the unusual setup of a private email server. This allows her to skate past the more disturbing findings of the FBI investigation.” Notably, the NYTimes did not publish anything related to this flop and it took the Public Editor, whose job it to be the readers’ advocate at The NYT, to write an op-ed titled The Clinton Story You Didn’t Read Here.

    After an almost universally bad week for her opponent Donald  Trump, Hillary went out of her way once again to explain away her home-brew server, only this time it led to a less than favorable outcome.

    Clinton insisted in two televised interviews aired this week, including one with Fox News’ Chris Wallace aired Sunday, that Comey had found her statements “truthful” and “consistent” with what she has said publicly. The Democratic nominee, speaking at a joint convention for African-American and Hispanic journalists, remarked that she was “pointing out in both of those instances that the Director Comey had said that my answers in my FBI interview were truthful.”  She then reiterated the “truthful” assessment in an interview with a Colorado television station later in the week.

    According to Politico, Hillary stressed that “that’s really the bottom line here. And I have said during the interview and many other occasions over the past months, that what I told the FBI, which he said was truthful, is consistent with what I have said publicly,” Clinton explained Friday. “So I may have short-circuited it and for that, I, you know, will try to clarify because I think, you know, Chris Wallace and I were probably talking past each other because of course, he could only talk to what I had told the FBI and I appreciated that.”

    “But I do think, you know, having him say that my answers to the FBI were truthful and then I should quickly add, what I said was consistent with what I had said publicly. And that’s really sort of in my view trying to tie both ends together,” she added.

    Notice the difference between her original statement and revision. In the first one, James Comey confirmed her statements about her email setup were consistent and truthful. In her revision, the FBI director confirmed that what she told the FBI was truthful. Perhaps because lying to the FBI is a crime but lying to the American population is not?

    Her word choice of “short-circuiting” confirms what many voters in this election feel about Hillary. Her answers are memorized, poll tested and scrutinized by hundreds of staffers, almost in a robotic fashion, to ensure she does not “bend” the truth. This is why Hillary does a press interview every 240 days at best

    Finally, having finally found a new opening to dig itself out of the hole it has found itself in, Donald Trump’s campaign laced into Clinton over her latest “pretzel-like response.”

    “Hillary Clinton’s habitual lying about the use of her secret server to send and receive classified, top secret information shows her blatant disregard for national security and a continued pattern of bad judgment,” senior communications adviser Jason Miller said in a statement. “Clinton knows the actions she has taken are disqualifying for someone wishing to become commander-in-chief, and that is why today’s painful, pretzel-like response to a simple question about her illegal server was obvious to everyone watching.”

    Now the only question is whether Trump can keep his mouth shut long enough to give Hillary more chances to stick her foot in hers, and do to her own polling what Trump has been so eager to do to his over the past two weeks.

  • Saving The System: Exposing The 4 Fallacies Of Modern Monetary Policy

    Submitted by Alasdair Macleod via GoldMoney.com,

    Monetary policy, we are told, is all about staving off recession and stimulating economic growth.

    However, not only is monetary debasement in any form counterproductive and destroys the personal wealth of the masses, but the economists who devised today’s monetarism have completely lost their way.

    This article addresses the confusion surrounding this subject, and concludes the real reason for today’s global monetary policies is an ultimately futile attempt to prevent a systemic and economic crisis.

    Wrong tools for wrong targets

    Central banks set themselves targets, such as unemployment that is deemed to be “full”, in other words the optimal low rate that will not lead to a pick-up in price inflation. CPI is the second target, typically set at 2% per annum. The hope is that these targets will lead to sustainable growth in GDP.

    Unfortunately, estimates of unemployment do not tell us whether or not people are being employed productively. The term productive conjures up questions as to whether or not a government employee who is not customer-driven is economically productive, or whether or not a temporary barman should be deemed properly employed. There is also considerable tension between low rates of official unemployment, and near-record levels of the labour force not in work.

    Recorded price inflation is even more flaky, with large discrepancies between official CPI and independent estimates, such as those of Shadowstats.com and the Chapwood Index in America. Their independent statistics record a far higher rate of price inflation in the US than the official CPI, and there is little doubt people are experiencing the higher rate. Assuming the GDP deflator should approximate to the actual rate of price inflation, independent estimates tell us that the US economy has been in recession every year since the dot-com bubble burst.

    The statistical tools are obviously useless, and so is the principal target. GDP is a money-total, no more, no less. Imagine an economy where the total quantities of money and credit never vary, and all credit is fully backed by money instead of conjured up out of thin air. Prices for individual goods and services are free to change, but the total money deployed cannot. Credit shifts from the failures to the successes. But because credit is wholly backed by sound money, if the credit is extinguished, the money lives on. Therefore, GDP does not increase or decrease.

    Alternatively, imagine you construct a balance sheet of the economy, and you introduce some more money. The balance sheet totals will increase accordingly, but it does not tell you how productively the extra money is deployed. What we seek in GDP is not found there: what we really want to know is whether or not economic conditions for the vast majority of people are improving. The only evidence of this would be increasing average wealth for all employed classes, and we are not talking about measures of wealth denominated in unsound currencies, nor are we talking about the apparent wealth that results from credit inflation. It has to be real.

    Equally, it cannot be measured, but framed that way, we can begin to get a better sense of perspective as to what economic policy should attempt to achieve.

    Take the example of helicopter money, which is increasingly talked about. It would undoubtedly boost nominal GDP. But if we think in terms of economic progress, we quickly realise that helicopter money is actually economically destructive as can be easily demonstrated.

    Let us assume that a central bank distributes money through the banking system to the bank accounts of consumers, who will undoubtedly spend most of this windfall. The immediate effect will be to increase the GDP total, as described above. But it creates a shortage of goods, so prices can be expected to quickly rise, nullifying any perceived benefit. And because the distribution is so well telegraphed, no sensible manufacturer is going to respond by increasing his production significantly for a one-off benefit. Therefore, as the money is spent its purchasing power will decline fairly rapidly, the costs of production will rise, and a slump will ensue. Unless, that is, there are continuing helicopter drops, but that, everyone can agree, is the path to wealth destruction through hyperinflation, and therefore the end of all economic progress.

    Just by rephrasing the question, from fostering GDP growth to fostering economic progress, leads to some diametrically opposed answers, as the helicopter money example illustrates. In this vein, I shall now address four of the most destructive fallacies about the relationship between money, credit, and economic progress.

    Fallacy 1: Monetary debasement benefits the economy

    Modern economists mistakenly ignore the intertemporal effects of changes in the quantity of money. When money or credit is expanded, the first receivers of it get to spend it on existing products before anyone else. Therefore, they benefit from the extra money before prices have risen to reflect its addition into general circulation. The second receivers have a similar advantage, but incrementally less so. Therefore, after this new money has progressed through many hands with a tendency to drive up prices every time, the last receivers of the additional money find that prices for nearly all goods have already risen and the purchasing power of their wages and savings has effectively fallen.

    This is known as the Cantillon effect. It amounts to a wealth transfer from the poorest in society, the unskilled workers, pensioners and small savers, to the government and its agents. Bankers, licensed to produce credit out of thin air at no cost, thrive. The second receivers, the businesses that benefit from bank credit and unfunded government contracts, do almost as well. The result is government, banks and their close supporters enjoy a wealth benefit at the expense of ordinary people.

    It is therefore hardly surprising the establishment and its lobbyists strongly favour monetary expansion, but the Cantillon effect cannot be denied, in theory or empirically. It is the single most important reason why inflating money and credit will always be counterproductive. We see this effect today, with the gap between rich and poor widening dramatically. It is monetary policy that impoverishes the masses, more surely than anything else.

    Fallacy 2: Low interest rates are beneficial

    The emotional appeal of low interest rates has its origin in the old religious association of interest with usury. Keynes promoted this view, not expressed so blatantly in moral terms, but by conjuring up an image of work-shy capitalists profiting from the deployment of their money for interest. His term for these capitalists, rentiers, condemned them in his followers’ minds.

    Keynes’s view is consistent with the idea that it is the rentiers who set the price for money, holding the entrepreneur to ransom, when in fact it is the other way round. In a free market where interest rates are set by consenting parties, it is the entrepreneur that sets the savings rate by bidding up the interest rate. It is this phenomenon that resulted in the long-held correlation between the price level and interest rates, demonstrated in Gibson’s paradox, which Keynes, Fischer and Friedman were all unable to explain.

    The fact that this correlation demonstrably existed from 1730 up to the 1970s is clear evidence that entrepreneurs were prepared to pay a rate of interest that related to the one thing they knew better than anything else, and that was the price they expected to obtain for their product in the market. There can be no other credible explanation. Equally, it shows that central bank attempts to manage price inflation by varying the interest rate are doomed to fail, because there is no natural correlation between the two. 

    This was certainly the case until the late 1970s, when the Fed raised interest rates to the point where normal business activity could not be financed profitably. Since then, monetary policy has taken over control of interest rates to the point where they ignore market forces entirely. The idea that central banks can manage unemployment, price inflation and GDP by varying interest rates has also been disproved by experience, yet they still persist in this crazy quest. 

    The expansion of bank credit that accompanies suppressed interest rates will increase GDP, assuming the credit expansion is not aimed at non-GDP items, such as financial assets. But that is a very different matter from fostering economic progress, which requires an interest rate that correlates with the price level, and not the rate of price inflation.

    Fallacy 3: Expanding money and bank credit stimulates business

    In a sound-money environment, some businesses prosper and others fail. The ones that prosper do so through success, not subsidy, and there is no subsidy for the failures. The business environment is of necessity one of constant change, as mistakes are quickly rectified. Capital resources for profitable enterprises are released from those that are less so or even unprofitable. Assuming a steady savings rate, the release of inefficiently deployed capital is vital for successful enterprises to flourish. Importantly, there can be no credit-driven business cycle to disrupt economic progress.

    This is not a happy environment for legacy industries, unwilling to face the change progress imposes, or no longer relevant to the future. Often these businesses dominate communities, and are costly and inefficient compared with their modern competitors operating in lower-cost conditions. They lobby hard and successfully for subsidies. And if there is free money and credit in the offing, all businesses well-connected to political circles want their share of the largesse.

    This is why today’s monetary environment is of unsound money, the expansion of money and credit designed to increase GDP. The result is good businesses no longer have to attract capital resources from the less profitable and the failures. All businesses, the successful and the failures, draw on freely available credit, either for genuine production or to avoid failure. The consequence is a growing accumulation of unproductive debt, whose default is continually deferred.

    As the bad businesses compete with the good for scarce labour and raw materials, which unlike unsound money cannot be conjured out of thin air, prices begin to rise. And as higher prices work through to final products, easy money encourages consumers to alter their money-preferences in favour of goods. After all, unemployment is low and things are booming, so why go without?

    At this point, central banks are forced to interrupt their expansionary policies and raise interest rates to curb unforeseen price inflation, and to only stop raising rates when widespread bankruptcies are threatened.

    For anyone interested in promoting economic progress as opposed to just growing the GDP numbers, inflating money and credit is obviously not the way to go about it. Those who do not grasp the difference between real economic progress and raising GDP are likely to persist in trying to grow GDP, putting the lessons of experience behind them. Welcome to the world of central banking.

    Fallacy 4: Lower exchange rates benefit the economy

    This is a policy of giving preference to exporters at the expense of everyone else, and in that sense is another variation of the Cantillon effect. It is a deliberate policy of reducing the value of the wages of exporters’ employees and other domestic costs, a wealth-transfer that eventually affects everyone. It destroys personal wealth, particularly for those who can least afford it.

    Economic planners appear to be blind to the true origin of trade deficits. In a sound money environment, everyone is forced to pay their bills. If you buy something, whatever its origin, you will have earned or borrowed sound money from someone else to pay for the goods purchased. Therefore, trade deficits, other than those arising from self-correcting timing differences on settlements, cannot exist. Attempts to correct trade deficits by manipulating the exchange rate, while pursuing unsound monetary policies, are in consequence futile.

    It is no accident that a trade deficit is often accompanied by a government budget deficit, because the latter is bound to lead to the first, assuming the savings rate remains unchanged. The reason has already been stated above: the private sector pays its bills, so trade deficits can only arise from unsound money and unfunded government deficits. 

    Empirical evidence and analysis of national accounts support this analysis, yet nearly everyone automatically subscribes to the fallacy that reducing the exchange rate is a good thing for the economy. Devaluing the currency does not correct trade deficits, and the policy amounts to an ongoing destruction of a currency’s purchasing power for no gain.

    Devaluations, which go hand in glove with unsound monetary practices, can be expected to lead to an increase in the money-total of GDP, but they hinder economic progress by destroying the wealth central to the financing of market-driven industrial investment. The post-war experience of Germany with its strong mark, compared with that of Britain with its weak sterling, refers.

    The real reason behind unsound money policies

    The neo-classical economists that populate government and central banks are finding out the hard way that their fallacies and their dishonest use of the state’s seigniorage of money and credit have lead everyone into a dead-end debt trap. They show no understanding of how they got us all here, but are becoming acutely aware of the consequences.

    Unsound monetary practices favour debt financing over financing from genuine savings, because of the wealth-transfer effect that benefits debtors. The result of decades of unsound monetary policies is that the major welfare economies have become overloaded with an accumulation of government debt, which can never be repaid, only devalued. Additionally, escalating welfare liabilities have to be financed, which means that the welfare-states’ need for low-cost financing through the expansion of bank credit and raw money has now become more or less infinite.

    It is obvious that a government can only discharge its welfare liabilities by acquiring yet more of the private sector’s wealth. The wealth destruction suffered by the private sector simply detracts from its ability to fund future government spending. <b/p>

    Not only are the private sectors in welfare states burdened with increasing state depredations on their wealth, they themselves have accumulated large amounts of unproductive debt as a result of decades of easy under-priced bank credit. The result is evident in very low rates of genuinely productive employment, and the impoverishment of the masses. While these problems are more evident in some nations than in others, all welfare states are affected. 

    Some countries like France conceal their unemployment problem by socialising large swathes of the economy, either directly or indirectly. Unemployment is officially recorded at about 10%, the state accounts for the majority of economic activity, and there is a large agricultural sector of predominantly subsistence-farming smallholders. The whole economic structure is inherently unproductive. In other welfare nations, the unemployment problem is more obvious.

    Italy is a good example, with a youth unemployment rate of 37%. The state accounts for about 52% of GDP, and non-performing loans on the banking sector’s balance sheets are recorded at 18% of GDP. Stripping out the state, NPLs are 37.5% of private sector GDP. It is therefore clear that not only is the private sector collapsing under the weight of its own debt, but there must be a growing incentive for companies which can service their debt not to do so, because their banks might not be around in the future to reward them by extending more credit. Those that see the Italian crisis as a banking problem miss the point. It is the Italian economy that’s the problem, and the banks are merely the prosciutto in the sandwich.

    Italy is in the vanguard of welfare state failures. Central banks formulating monetary policy are becoming increasingly aware of this fact and the similarities with their own position. Their priority now is to avoid a global debt-induced economic crises. They see this being staved off by increasingly desperate attempts to promote GDP growth. They will pursue this policy at accelerating speed right into the buffers at the end of the line. 

    The partying is over. The days of transferring wealth from the middle-classes and the poor through monetary debasement to benefit the welfare states, the banks and their preferred customers, are now numbered. The implications for future monetary policy are simple: the Fed, Bank of Japan, European Central Bank and Bank of England are working together to keep their respective GDPs from falling. The Bank of Japan is leading the way into deepening negative interest rates and more asset-supporting quantitative easing, and the others are all set to follow its example.

  • MF Global 5 Years Later: PWC Set To Take The Fall As Corzine Still Untouched

    Jon Corzine, former Governor of New Jersey and CEO of Goldman Sachs, took over the helm of MF Global in March 2010.  When revenue at the bank failed to live up to expectations, Corzine developed a scheme to place a massive $6BN bet on the sovereign debt of the aptly named PIIGS (Portugal, Italy, Ireland, Greece, Spain) through a financial structure known as a “Repo to Maturity”.  To summarize the strategy for all you aspiring CEO’s, when you find it difficult to generate organic revenue growth sometimes the better option is to just bet your entire firm on a single, massively-levered trade on the sovereign debt of countries on the verge of insolvency. 

    Well, not so much.  Deterioration of the Eurozone economies in mid-2011 resulted in massive margin calls on Corzine’s trade and a liquidity crisis at MF Global.  By the time the dust settled there was $1.6BN of cash “missing” from customer accounts which should have been segregated.  And with that, less than 2 years after Mr. Corzine took the CEO seat, MF Global filed for bankruptcy protection on October 31, 2011 in the Southern District of New York. 

    We know what you’re thinking…sounds reckless to risk an entire firm on the highly volatile sovereign debt of a group of countries labeled the “PIIGS”, right?  Well apparently it’s not that big of a deal unless you’re the scapegoat accountants.

    Yesterday, U.S. District Court Judge Victor Marrero of New York denied PwC’s motion for dismissal of a $1 billion professional malpractice suit filed by MF Global against the accounting firm saying that the administrator had “presented sufficient evidence to create a material factual dispute” as to whether advice from PwC ultimately played a role in the bankruptcy filing.  According to the WSJ:

    MF Global sued PwC in March 2014 for at least $1 billion, alleging that the firm’s accounting advice helped cause MF Global’s 2011 collapse. Officials in charge of MF Global’s liquidation claimed PwC gave “flatly erroneous” advice on how to account for the European sovereign debt that tipped MF Global into bankruptcy.

     

    MF Global’s lawsuit against PwC claims the accounting firm’s advice is what allowed Mr. Corzine to make such a big bet in the first place, a charge PwC has denied.

     

    In a 69-page decision, the judge said the administrator “has presented sufficient evidence to create a material factual dispute” as to whether PwC’s accounting advice played a role in MF Global’s bankruptcy in the fall of 2011.

     

    “This is a major victory for the MF Global estate,” said Nader Tavakoli, MF Global’s lead director. “It sends a strong message concerning the need for responsibility and accountability, and we hope to secure a substantial recovery for MF Global’s stakeholders.”

     

    Daniel Fetterman, a lawyer from Kasowitz Benson Torres & Friedman LLP who is representing MF Global, called the ruling a “significant victory” in the legal fight.

     

    “We look forward to presenting at trial the evidence concerning PwC’s extraordinary and egregious malpractice alleged in the complaint and its role in causing MF Global’s demise,” he said.

    For its part, PwC has maintained that reckless trading decisions and “adverse market conditions” were the real cause of the bankruptcy filing, not faulty accounting of the trades.

    In response, James P. Cusick, PwC’s lawyer, said the accounting firm stands by its work for MF Global, and that the commodity broker correctly accounted for the so-called repo-to-maturity transactions at issue in the lawsuit.

     

    MF Global’s collapse was caused by its own business decisions and adverse market events, not any accounting determination” said Mr. Cusick, a litigator at King & Spalding.

    Lesson learned.  If you commit a murder it’s the gun’s fault, if you gain 20 lbs it’s the fork’s fault and if you place a massively levered trade that blows up your firm then it’s the accountant’s fault.  After all, it’s not the losses of a failed trade that caused the liquidity crisis at MF Global but rather the timing of the realization of those losses that are truly to blame.

    As for Jon Corzine, last we heard he was trying to raise capital for a new hedge fund (one which may have trouble getting a primary dealer designation) and we are confident he will succeed for two reasons.

    Reason #1:

     

    And Reason #2:

    * * *

    For those interested, the full decision can be read below:

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 6th August 2016

  • Connecting The Nuclear 'Dots'

    With Iran back in the headlines once again thanks to the US government's shady cash payments surrounding the nuclear deal and hostage release, we thought it worth considering the warnings of GeoStrategic Analysis' Dr. Peter Huessy:

    • Iran seeks to do us grave harm, potentially with ballistic missiles and nuclear weapons. The threat warnings are clear and we have strong evidence — Iran has attacked us repeatedly over the past 30 years.

    • Instead of heeding the nuclear missile "dots" that are emerging all around us, we are busy promoting trade with Iran, downplaying its violations of the nuclear deal, simply ignoring its ballistic missile developments and dismissing the growing evidence of its terrorist past.

    After the attacks on September 11, 2001, Congress, the Bush administration, and terrorist experts complained that the country had simply not "connected the dots" provided by prior terrorist threats.

    The 9/11 Commission also concluded that the attacks "should not have come as a surprise," as "Islamist extremists had given plenty of warning that they meant to kill Americans indiscriminately and in large numbers."

    The Commission then listed 10 Islamic terror plots against the US prior to 9/11:

    "In February 1993, a group led by Ramzi Yousef tried to bring down the World Trade Center with a truck bomb.

     

    "Plans by Omar Abdel Rahman and others to blow up the Holland and Lincoln tunnels and other New York City landmarks …

     

    "In October 1993, Somali tribesmen shot down US helicopters, killing 18 and wounding 73…

     

    "In early 1995, police in Manila uncovered a plot by Ramzi Yousef to blow up a dozen U.S. airliners while they were flying over the Pacific.

     

    "In November 1995, a car bomb exploded outside the office of the US program manager for the Saudi National Guard in Riyadh, killing five Americans and two others.

     

    "In June 1996, a truck bomb demolished the Khobar Towers apartment complex in Dhahran, Saudi Arabia, killing 19 US servicemen and wounding hundreds.

     

    "In August 1998, al Qaeda, carried out near-simultaneous truck bomb attacks on the US embassies in Nairobi, Kenya, and Dar es Salaam, Tanzania. The attacks killed 224 people, including 12 Americans, and wounded thousands more.

     

    "In December 1999, Jordanian police foiled a plot to bomb hotels and other sites frequented by American tourists…

     

    "…US Customs agent arrested Ahmed Ressam at the US-Canadian border as he was smuggling in explosives intended for an attack on Los Angeles International Airport.

     

    "In October 2000, an al Qaeda team in Aden, Yemen, used a motorboat filled with explosives to blow a hole in the side of a destroyer, the USS Cole, almost sinking the vessel and killing 17 American sailors."

    Despite the overwhelming indications that an attack like 9/11 was around the corner, as former Secretary of State Condoleezza Rice told the country in her April 2004 testimony to the 9/11 Commission, "The terrorists were at war with us, but we were not yet at war with them. For more than 20 years, the terrorist threat gathered, and America's response across several administrations of both parties was insufficient."

    Are we now better equipped to "connect the terrorist-threats by dots" than we were prior to 9/11? Certainly we are not still echoing the testimony of Richard Clarke when he told the Emerging Threats Subcommittee in the summer of 2000 that the administration "had not yet" determined how to spend homeland security funds even some eight years after the first World Trade Center bombing of February 1993.

    Unfortunately, not only are we not connecting the terrorist dots, we are actively downplaying their significance. Nowhere else is this more apparent than in the virtually complete failure, on the part of the US, to hold Iran responsible for the terror attacks that have killed and maimed thousands of Americans since 1979. This failure is all the more disturbing after the numerous court decisions that have found Iran accountable for nearly $60 billion in damages owed to the victims and survivors of these attacks, including the 9/11 attacks.

    The outstanding news analyst and author Melanie Phillips wrote nearly a year ago that Iran had been "…perpetrating acts of war against Western interests for more than three decades — including playing a key role in the 9/11 attacks on America." Phillips noted that a Revolutionary Guard-Iranian Intelligence (MOIS) task force

    "designed contingency plans for unconventional warfare against the US… aimed at breaking the American economy, crippling or disheartening the US, and disrupting the American social, military and political order — all without the risk of a head-to-head confrontation which Iran knew it would lose."

    She explained that the court testimony from former Iranian agents illustrates that Iran "…devised a scheme to crash hijacked Boeing 747s into the World Trade Center, the White House and the Pentagon. … The plan's code name was 'Shaitan dar Atash' ('Satan in flames')." Further, the court evidence revealed that Iran obtained "a Boeing 757-767-777 flight simulator which it hid at a secret site where the 9/11 terrorists were trained."

    In December 2011, Judge George B. Daniels found that Iran, with the participation of its Supreme Leader Ayatollah Ali Khamenei, was directly and heavily involved in the 9/11 atrocities. Khamenei instructed intelligence operatives that while expanding collaboration between Hezbollah and al-Qaeda, they must restrict communications to existing contacts with al-Qaeda's second-in-command Ayman al Zawahiri and Imad Mughniyeh — Hezbollah's then terrorism chief and agent of Iran.

    Iran's Supreme Leader, Ayatollah Ali Khamenei (center), is shown meeting in May 2014 with Iran's military chief of staff and the commanders of the Islamic Revolutionary Guards Corps. (Image source: IRNA)

    While the 9/11 Commission found solid evidence Iran aided the 9/11 hijackers in their travels from Iran, the "Extensive cooperation in major global terrorist activities," between Iran, Hezbollah and Al Qaeda, including the 1996 bombing of the Khobar Towers housing complex in Saudi Arabia and the 1998 East Africa US embassy bombings, escaped the 9/11 Commission's detailed attention. Notably, as long ago as in 2000, a US Defense Intelligence Agency analyst was alerting the government to a web of connections between al-Qaeda, the Iranian intelligence agencies controlled by Khamenei, and other terrorist groups.

    Many press reports and analysts, cognizant of Iran's terrorist history and aware that Iran has been designated by the US Department of State as the world's premier state sponsor of terror, choose to believe the 2015 Iranian nuclear deal should not be derailed over concern of Iran's possible future terrorist plans. Especially when it is often assumed these plans are aimed primarily at Israel and groups in Syria, Iraq and Lebanon, and thus not of real concern to the United States.

    Is the nuclear deal with Iran thus a good trade? We get to slow Iran's pursuit of nuclear weapons, but any serious sanctions or military effort to stop Iran's terror agenda are off the table. Let's connect the new nuclear-related Iran dots.

    First, the world's expert on Iran ballistic missiles, Uzi Rubin, revealed on July 15 that Iran has five new missile capabilities: they can strike the middle of Europe, including Berlin; they can target with GPS accuracy military facilities in Saudi Arabia; they can launch missiles from underground secret tunnels and caves without warning; they have missiles that are ready to fire 24/7; and they have developed other accurate missiles whose mission is to strike targets throughout Gulf region.

     

    Second, the Associated Press revealed that a side agreement under the Joint Comprehensive Plan of Action (JCPOA) nuclear "deal" actually allows Iran to break out of the agreement in year 11, not 15, at which point Iran will not even be six months away from having sufficient nuclear fuel to arm a nuclear warhead, and Iran will be able to install nuclear centrifuges five times more efficient than the ones they have today.

     

    Third, according to German intelligence reports, Iran has, a few dozen times since the July 2015 nuclear agreement, sought to purchase nuclear ballistic missile technology, a violation of previous UN resolutions.

    As Americans wonder who will be behind the next terrorist attacks on our country — "lone wolf" terrorists inspired by social media from Islamist groups; organized cells of ISIS, Al Qaeda, Islamic Jihad, Hezbollah; states such as Iran and Syria; or a combination of all three — we would do well to be reminded of the long-term use of terrorism by the former Soviet Union as one of their trademark elements of "statecraft."

    Iran's pursuit of nuclear weapons has not been stopped and at best has been delayed. Add to that Iran's enhanced ballistic missile capability, its growing partnership with North Korea and its history of terrorist attacks on the United States, and connecting the dots reveals a stark reality — nuclear terrorism by missile may be on its way.

    During the spring and summer of 2001, US intelligence agencies received a stream of warnings that Al Qaeda was determined to strike. The specific information pointed to threats from overseas. The Bush administration began developing a strategy in early 2001 to eliminate Al Qaeda in three years. The 9/11 attacks happened "too soon."

    Iran seeks to do us grave harm, potentially with ballistic missiles and nuclear weapons. The threat warnings are clear and we have strong evidence — Iran has attacked us repeatedly over the past 30 years

    But instead of heeding the nuclear missile "dots" that are emerging all around us, we are busy promoting trade with Iran, downplaying its violations of the nuclear deal, simply ignoring its ballistic missile developments and dismissing the growing evidence of its terrorist past.

    In short, we are not connecting these dots; we are erasing them…America is apparently bent on repeating — yet again — the historic wrong turn it took in 1979 by once again embracing the radical Islamic regime in Iran. Why would the U.S. administration think doing the same thing again will have a different outcome?

  • 3 Simple Charts That Help Explain Why 9,000 Businesses Have Left California In Just 7 Years

    We recently came across some simple charts from the Tax Foundation that simply and effectively illustrate why businesses are fleeing states like California by the 1,000s

    In the first chart, the Tax Foundation presents data from The Bureau of Economic Analysis to compare purchasing power of $100 depending which state you live in.  Ironically, the map turned out to look eerily similar to recent electoral college maps of Presidential elections with the Democrat-leaning northeast and west coast areas getting less bang for their buck compared to the southeast and mid-west.  Could it be that rather than voting their desires to cling to “guns and religion,” to quote President Obama, that Americans in the southeast and mid-west are actually voting to preserve a higher standard of life that doesn’t require them to spend $2mm on an 800 square foot apartment?  But we digress.

    Relative Value of Dollar

     

    Ironically, the second chart which illustrates tax rates by state looks very similar to the first.  The highest taxed states (dark blue) are in the northeast and west coast with lower tax structures in the southeast and mid-west. 

    Taxes by State

     

    And finally a map of minimum wage by state.  Note that this doesn’t reflect California’s recent minimum wage hike to $15 which will be phased in over the next 5 years.  At the risk of sounding like a broken record we’ll spare you our additional commentary.

    Minimum Wage by State

     

    Could it be that these charts have something to do with the mass exodus of businesses from the State of California to more “friendly” locations like Texas and Nevada?  As pointed out by the Dallas Business Journal, a study conducted by Joseph Vranich, a site selection consultant and president of Irvine, California-based Spectrum Location Solutions, found that roughly 9,000 California companies moved their headquarters or diverted projects to out-of-state locations in the last seven years due to the Golden State’s “hostile” business environment.  As the DBJ points out, companies are fleeing California to escape escalating costs and regulations and states like Texas and Nevada with no income tax and high relative purchasing power are the key beneficiaries:

    It’s typical for companies leaving California to experience operating cost savings of 20 up to 35 percent, Vranich said.  He said in an email to the Dallas Business Journal that he considers the results of the seven-year, 378-page study “astonishing.”  “I even wonder if some kind of ‘business migration history’ has been made.

     

    Companies continue to leave California because of rising costs and
    concerns over the state’s “hostile” business environment, according to the study, which also names companies and provides details of business disinvestments in the state.

     

    Here are some highlights of the study:

    • Texas ranked as the top state to which businesses migrated, followed by: (2) Nevada, (3) Arizona, (4) Colorado, (5) Washington, (6) Oregon, (7) North Carolina, (8) Florida, (9) Georgia and (10) Virginia. Texas was the top destination for California companies each year during the seven-year study period.
    • Los Angeles led the Top 15 California counties with the highest number of disinvestment events, followed by: (2) Orange, (3) Santa Clara, (4) San Francisco, (5) San Diego, (6) Alameda, (7) San Mateo, (8) Ventura, (9) Sacramento, (10) Riverside, (11) San Bernardino, (12) Contra Costa tied with Santa Barbara, (13) San Joaquin, (14) Stanislaus and (15) Sonoma.

    Turns out you really do get what you vote for.

    For those who would like to review the full study, which the author summarizes as “California’s Forty Year Legacy of Hostility to Business,” by Spectrum Location Solutions, it can be viewed below:

  • Only In China: Companies Become Banks To 'Solve' Financial Difficulties

    Submitted by Valentin Schmid via The Epoch Times,

    China is desperate to solve several problems it has due to its debt to GDP ratio being north of 300 percent. It may have found a pretty unconventional one by letting companies become banks, according to a report by the Wall Street Journal.  

    With profits headed south, heavily indebted Chinese heavy-machinery giant Sany Heavy Industries said this week it won approval to set up a bank in the Hunan Province city of Changsha. With 3 billion yuan ($450 million) of registered capital, it will be a relatively large institution as Chinese city-based banks go. Sany plans to join forces with a pharmaceutical company and an aluminum company.

    Sany already operates an insurance and finance division with the goal of internal financing and insurance services for clients.

    Sany Heavy Industries already operates a Finance and Insurance arm, although it's unclear what gold has to do with it. (Company Website)

    Sany Heavy Industries already operates a Finance and Insurance arm, although it’s unclear what gold has to do with it. (Company Website)

    Debt Problem

    One problem is that companies are defaulting on bond payments and there is no adequate resolution mechanism for bad debts, at least according to Goldman Sachs.

    “A clearer debt resolution process (for example, how debt restructuring on public bonds can be achieved, how valuation and recovery on defaulted bonds are arrived at, the timely disclosure of information and clarity on court-sanctioned processes) would help to pave the way for more defaults, which in our view are needed if policymakers are to deliver on structural reforms,” the investment bank writes in a note.

    By becoming or owning banks, the companies can just shift debt around different balance sheets to avoid a default, although this is probably not the resolution that Goldman Sachs had in mind when talking about structural reforms.  

    Another problem is that the regime has more and more difficulties pushing more debt into the economy to grease the wheels and keep GDP growth from collapsing entirely.

    China needs 11.9 units of new debt to create one unit of GDP growth. At the same time, the velocity of money or the measure of how often one unit of money changes hands during a year has fallen to below 0.5, another measure of how saturated the economy is with uneconomical credit. If the velocity of money goes down, the economy needs a higher stock of money to keep the same level of activity.

    (Macquarie)

    (Macquarie)

    So if companies can’t pay back loans, old banks don’t want to give out loans, and consumers don’t want to circulate the money, you can just let some companies become banks to prevent them from defaulting and maybe even issue new loans to themselves.

    It would not be the first time China has tried a circular financial arrangement to solve some structural issues.  

    Sany Not Alone 

    According to the Wall Street Journal report, the Sany Heavy Industries case is only one of a few. Other companies in the tobacco and travel sectors, for example, have taken over banks or formed new ones. 

    ChinaTopix reports that the China Banking Regulatory Commission (CBRC) has already awarded five licenses for private banks and received another 12 applications during the past year. It also mentions that industrial firms are behind this move:

    “One bank, Fujian Huatong Bank, which has a registered capital of Rmb3 billion ($450 million), was promoted by 10 Fujian-based companies in different sectors, including retail, manufacturing and real estate.”

    We don’t know if the regulator had this in mind when they launched the initiative to boost private banks in China in 2014 in order to improve lending to the technology sector, but it did explicitly mention that private companies should form banks.  

    “Qualified private enterprises shall be encouraged to set up private banks. The innovation of products, services, management, and technology by private banks will inject new vitality into the sustainable and innovative development of the banking sector,” the CBRC states in an undated report.

    *  *  *

    It remains to be seen whether this is a long-term sustainable solution.

  • Politicians Gone Wild: Underage Strip Poker, Meth For Sex, & White Males Need Not Apply

    Just when you thought the Presidential election was spiraling out of control and politics couldn’t get any more surreal, we present to you a trio of lesser-known politicians that took things to a whole new level this week…

    Strip Poker with Mayor Silva:

    Silva

    Our first Politician Gone Wild is Mayor Anthony Silva of Stockton, California, who was arrested on Thursday on charges of playing strip poker and providing alcohol to minors at a youth camp he runs for impoverished children.  An FBI investigation of Silva led to the discovery of a video saved on Silva’s cell phone which the District Attorney’s office discussed with NBC:

    “The audio of the surreptitious recording clearly indicates that the participants did not want to be recorded. Witnesses also informed FBI agents that Silva provided alcohol to the participants, all of whom were underage, including a minor.”

    Mayor Silva has since been released on bail and intends to plead not guilty.

     

     

     

    Meth for Sex with Mayor Silverthorne:

    Silverthorne

    Next there is Fairfax City, Virginia Mayor R. Scott Silverthorne, a supporter of Hillary Clinton, who was arrested Thursday after allegedly giving methamphetamine to an undercover police officer in exchange for sex, according to HeatStreet.

    According to Fairfax County police, they encountered Silverthorne after learning of an individual who was distributing meth through a website used to arrange male-on-male sexual encounters.

    An undercover detective created a profile on the site and was contacted by Silverthorne, who said he could provide meth in exchange for sex. They arranged to meet at a hotel, where Silverthorne was arrested for felony distribution of methamphetamine.

    As if that wasn’t bad enough, Mayor Silverthorne is apparently also a substitute teacher in the Fairfax County Public School system

     

    White Males Need Not Apply:

    Ellison

    Our final case comes from the Daily Caller which pointed out a job posting on Minnesota House of Representatives Member Keith Ellison’s (D) website seeking interns for the fall.   Within the posting the Democrat describes that he’s seeking “interns who are curious, hardworking, and passionate about serving Minnesota’s 5th district.”  But there’s one small catch, per the posting:

    People of color, LGBTQ individuals, women, and people with disabilities are strongly encouraged to apply.”

    Well that pretty much covers anyone that isn’t a straight, able-bodied, white, male.  Got it.  

  • Fissures In The Empire

    Authored by Paul Craig Roberts,

    If you have been wondering what all the terror events in France and Germany are about, here is the answer: (via Strategic-Culture)

    A delegation of 11 French lawmakers and senators arrived in Crimea on July 28 to take part in celebrating Russian Navy Day in Sevastopol.

     

    There are no grounds to keep anti-Russian sanctions in place, said the head of the delegation Thierry Mariani, addressing the Crimean Parliament in Simferopol. Republican MP Jacques Myard also emphasized the importance of lifting the sanctions.

     

    In July 2015, a group of 10 French deputies visited Crimea for the first time despite domestic and European criticism. Back then the lawmakers said that what they saw was completely different from the picture painted by Western media. They say the same thing now after having seen the situation with their own eyes.

     

    The recent visit of French MPs is part of a trend taking place in Europe.

     

     

    Several EU countries, including Austria and Hungary, have expressed interest in lifting, or at least softening, sanctions, as they can no longer afford to miss out on trade with Russia. Having failed to influence Russia’s foreign policy, the sanctions are useless anyway. Nobody gains and everybody loses in this sanctions war – it’s a no-win policy.

     

    All summed up, it looks like opposition within the EU to the sanctions further renewal may now be close to achieving critical mass. All the indications are that the sanctions would not be extended anymore. The French lawmakers visit to Crimea is just another event to confirm this fact.

    Washington has raised the cost of being a member of its Empire too high. Vassals such as France and Germany are beginning to exercise independent policies toward Russia. Observing the cracks in its Empire, Washington has decided to bind its vassals to Washington with terror. Most likely what we are witnessing in the French and German attacks is Operation Gladio.

    Washington’s policy toward Russia, which has been imposed by Washington on all of Europe, benefits no one but the handful of American ideologues known as neoconservatives. Neoconservatives are crazed psychopaths willing to destroy Earth in behalf of American hegemony.

    A delegation of members of the French National Assembly and Senate went to Crimea to participate in Russian Navy Day on July 28. Thierry Mariani, the head of the French delegation, addressed the parliament in Crimea and said that there are no reasons for France to continue to support Washington’s illegal sanctions on Russia.

    As the Strategic Culture Foundation reports, this “is part of a trend taking place in Europe.”

    “On June 8, the French Senate voted overwhelmingly to urge the government to gradually reduce economic sanctions on Russia amid growing opposition to the punitive measures across Europe. The French National Assembly voted for lifting the sanctions in late April.”

    Politicians in Italy, Belgium, and Cyprus are taking the same tack. Politicians in Greece and Hungary have also questioned the sanctions.

    So does Donald Trump, and that is why the servile American press is trying to drive him into unacceptability and out of the race.

    Democratic websites are spreading the rumor that Trump never intended to win the nomination. His goal was to come in second. His campaign was just an elevation of his name recognition to help him in his deals. But he and his advisors misjudged the disaffection of the voters from the Establishment parties and Trump won.

    Democratic websites claim that Trump is trying to get himself so opposed by criticizing Muslim families of war heros and women for abortions that he can withdraw, thus allowing the RNC to select a candidate that can rival Hitlery in appeal to the ruling oligarchs and pressitute media.

    Considering the degeneration of America, this could possibly be true.

    But for now we must doubt it and ascribe it to the effort to undermine Trump with his supporters. The evil that rules in America is determined to have in the White House its own servant, and that servant is Hitlery.

  • Rigged Game: Ever Wonder How Wall Street Analysts Are So Good At Forecasting? Hint, It's Not Their Excel Skills

    Our readers should have little doubt at this point about our view on the integrity of wall street and equity markets.  In fact, we just spoke yesterday about all the little accounting games that companies play to “beat” earnings estimates in a post entitled “Mind The “GAAP” (Or How The Game Is Really ‘Rigged’).” 

    Well, CFOs can’t bear the full burden of earnings management, they need complicit “independent” counterparts on wall street as well.  A recent article in the Wall Street Journal points out how public companies use wall street analysts to manage quarterly earnings expectations and ultimately their stock prices.  The article summarizes the quarterly dance played out between wall street analysts and investor relations teams to “manage” earnings down to a level that is ultimately “beatable” and thus produces a nice stock bounce on earnings day.  Analysts, of course, are willing partners in the game because being a “team player” means better access to management teams, better attendance at bank-hosted conferences and the added benefit of very “accurate” forecasting for hedge fund clients that pay handsomely for their efforts.  As the WSJ points out:

    Analysts whose forecasts are far from what companies end up reporting risk losing credibility with clients and could get less access to company management. Those are reasons to listen if a company calls with a suggestion, according to analysts.

     

    Roger Freeman, who left the stock-research industry in 2014 and now works at a technology startup, says: “If someone is trying to get your numbers down, they will highlight all the negatives and not positives, and you’ll come away thinking: ‘Gee, that sounds pretty bad,’ and sometimes take your numbers down.”

    To prove the point, the WSJ reviewed over 6,000 earnings reports from 1Q13 through 1Q16 to see just how frequently companies manage to “beat” earnings estimates.  “Shockingly” an overwhelming number of companies manage to report earnings that are exactly in-line or slightly above analyst expectations.  But hey, maybe the analysts are just really good at modeling.

    Managing Expectations

    The WSJ went on to provide a couple of recent examples of “managed” earnings, with AT&T’s 1Q16 numbers being the first, saying:

    AT&T’s finance chief said last year’s fourth quarter included “a slowdown in the handset upgrade cycle.”  He added that he “wouldn’t be surprised to see that continue.”  Near the end of the first quarter, AT&T steered analysts back to Mr. Stephens’s comments at a Deutsche Bank AG conference on March 9, say five analysts who spoke to the telecom company.

     

    Jeffrey Kvaal of Nomura Securities says AT&T’s investor-relations team “is very diligent” before earnings releases “about making sure that the comments from the executives are reflected in the commentary from the sell side.”

     

    A week before the announcement, Mr. Kvaal cut his first-quarter sales estimate by $837 million to $40.54 billion, citing lower equipment sales. Two days before the results, the William Blair analysts cut their sales estimate by about $1 billion. With one day to go, Buckingham Research Group reduced its sales estimate by more than $1.1 billion, also noting the slower pace of upgrades.

     

    Analyst James Breen of William Blair says he talks to investor-relations personnel at AT&T “all the time.” He adjusted his forecast because the previous estimate hadn’t taken into account the comments from AT&T’s management at several investor conferences. Mr. Breen says he also didn’t want to be an outlier compared with other analysts who follow AT&T.

     

    Mr. Viola, AT&T’s investor-relations chief, says “companies can and do talk with analysts about their latest, publicly available information. That’s the job of investor relations, and it benefits the investing public.

     

    He adds: “Analysts change their estimates for many reasons, and do so throughout the quarter.” About half the changes in the first quarter were made a week or less before the April 26 earnings announcement.

    We would agree with AT&T that providing earnings guidance could provide “benefits [to] the investing public.”  But that’s not what’s happening here because the “investing public” does not get access to research reports published by investment banks unless they happen to be clients which is a status reserved for hedge funds and super-wealthy individuals. 

    But we digress.  To conclude the AT&T discussion, in the ~25 days leading up to AT&T’s 1Q16 earnings release, the WSJ found that analysts cut AT&Ts revenue forecast by ~$1BN.  And wouldn’t you know it…when earnings were finally released AT&T managed to “beat” on revenue by 0.19%.

    AT&T Earnings

    And, not to leave out our favorite investment banking operation, the WSJ also commented on Goldman Sachs’ 1Q16 earnings:

    This spring, many analysts were struggling to figure out how Goldman Sachs Group Inc. would fare amid the first quarter’s market turbulence. From mid-March to mid-April, 16 analysts cut their earnings estimates by an average of 41%.

     

    Around the end of the first quarter, the bank’s investor-relations staff answered calls from analysts, many of whom routinely check in with the firm when updating their financial models and targets.

     

    Some conversations included discussions about comments from rival executives at investor conferences during the first quarter, some analysts say.

     

    Michael DuVally, a Goldman spokesman, says the discussions were appropriate, partly because analysts “are overloaded with data.” He adds: “Serving as a resource for public information is a sensible market practice.”

     

    When Goldman released results April 19, it had $2.68 a share in
    earnings, more than 10% higher than the lowered target. The stock rose 2.3%.

    Goldman Earnings

    The bottom line is that the game is rigged and retail investors are the losersWe fail to understand how companies can consistently work within the confines of the law yet still “manage” analysts’ estimates to within fractions of a percent of a company’s actual quarterly results.  How is it possible that a call with investor relations of AT&T convinces an analyst to take down quarterly revenue estimates by $1BN (a reduction that puts the revised “forecast” within a small fraction of actual results) yet the contents of that call are not “material” under SEC guidelines?  Why do investment banks and their clients deserve better access to management teams and information?  Why can’t all management presentations at conferences be open to the public?  Why do wall street investors spend $1,000’s of dollars attending investment bank conferences at remote beach destinations if they’re not receiving something they deem valuable in return?

    The fact is that a couple of small changes could be made to level the playing field.  Corporate conferences are fine but why not require that all presentations and Q&A sessions be webcast with a transcript of discussions posted for public consumption?  Same thing with quarterly update calls with analysts.  If there is nothing nefarious in these discussions then why not make the process transparent and prove it?  These issues are easy to solve but they never will be because the banks and corporations behind them are willing participants with economic interest in maintaining the status quo so we won’t hold our breadth waiting for change.

  • "Jobs Data Nowhere As Strong As Headline" – Analysts Throw Up On Today's Seasonal Adjustment

    One week ago, the BEA admitted that it had “found a problem” when it comes to calculating GDP numbers. Specifically it blamed “residual seasonality” adjustments for giving historical GDP numbers a persistent optimistic bias. This came in the aftermath of last week’s shocking Q2 GDP report which printed at 1.2%, less than half of Wall Street’s consensus.

    Today, seasonality made another appearance, this time however in the much anticipated July jobs number, which unlike the woeful Q2 GDP number, was the opposite, coming in far higher than expected. In fact it was higher than the top Wall Street estimate.

     

    And, just like in the case of GDP, it appears that seasonal adjustments were the culprit for today’s blowout headline print which excluding the Arima X 13 contribution to the headline number, would have been notably weaker.

    As Mitsubishi UFJ strategist John Herrmann wrote in a note shortly after the report, the “jobs headline overstates” strength of payrolls. He adds that the unadjusted data show a “middling report” that’s “nowhere as strong as the headline” and adds that private payrolls unadjusted +85k in July vs seasonally adjusted +217k.

    In Herrmann’s view, the government applied a “very benign seasonal adjustment factor upon private payrolls to transform a soft private payroll gain into a strong gain.”

    He did not provide a reason why the government would do that.

    Courtesy of Southbay Research, which also blasted today’s seasonal adjustment factor, this is how the seasonal adjustments look like relative to history.

    We leave it up to readers to decide just why the government may want to represent what would otherwise have been a far weaker than expected report, into a blowout number, one which merely adds to the economic “recovery” narrative, which incidentally will come in very useful to Hillary’s presidential campaign.

    Yet even assuming the market has no doubts about the seasonally adjusted headline number, as appears to be the case, the other problem that has emerged for the Fed is how to ignore this strong number. As Bank of Tokyo’s Chris Rupkey writes, “Let’s see Yellen get out of this one and find something in the data to once again not raise rates in September.” (We assume he did not see the unadujsted numbers.)

    As he adds, slowing 2Q GDP growth of 1.2% took Sept. rate hike “off the table” and now “the million dollar question” is whether 255k payroll jobs in July, 292k in June put it back on.  As a reminder, Yellen speaks exactly in three weeks time at Jackson Hole on Aug. 26; “let’s see if she provides some guidance.” But while rate hike odds may have spiked after today’s report, it is almost certain that, as we said last night, the Fed will not dare to hike the rate in September and potentially unleash market turmoil in the most sensitive part of the presidential race.

    As for a December rate hike, there are 4 months until then, and much can happen: who knows, maybe the BLS will even undo the significant seasonal adjustment boost that send July jobs soaring.

  • Sheriff Raids House To Find Anonymous Blogger Who Called Him Corrupt

    Authored by Naomi LaChance, originally posted at TheIntercept.com,

    After a watchdog blog repeatedly linked him and other local officials to  corruption and fraud, the Sheriff of Terrebone Parish in Louisiana on Tuesday sent six deputies to raid a police officer’s home to seize computers and other electronic devices.

    Sheriff Jerry Larpenter’s deputies submitted affidavits alleging criminal defamation against the anonymous author of the ExposeDAT blog, and obtained search warrants to seize evidence in the officer’s house and from Facebook.

    The officer, Wayne Anderson, works for the police department of Houma, the county seat of Terrebone Parish — and according to New Orleans’ WWL-TV, formerly worked as a Terrebone Sheriff’s deputy.

    Anderson was placed on paid leave about an hour and a half after the raid on his house, Jerri Smitko, one of his attorneys, told The Intercept. She said that he has not yet been officially notified about why.

    Smitko said Anderson denies that he is the author of ExposeDat.

    But free speech advocates say the blogger — whoever he or she is — is protected by the First Amendment.

    “The law is very clear that somebody in their private capacity, on private time, on their own equipment, has a First Amendment right to post about things of public concern,” Marjorie Esman, director of the ACLU of Louisiana, told The Intercept.

    Larpenter told WWL: “If you’re gonna lie about me and make it under a fictitious name, I’m gonna come after you.”

    Esman said the Sheriff and his deputies were forgetting something.  “The laws that they’re sworn to uphold include the right to criticize and protest. Somehow there’s a piece in the training that leads to them missing that.”

    ExposeDAT calls itself a “watchdog group,” posting articles that use public records to identify institutional corruption in the Parish. Since it launched in late June, it has accused various public officials and business owners of nepotism, tax evasion, polluting and misuse of government funds.

    It promises to “introduce articles that explore the relationship between certain Public Officials and the flow of money in South Louisiana.”

    The Sheriff’s office, in order to obtain the warrants, said the blog had criminally defamed the Parish’s new insurance agent, Tony Alford, WWL reported.

    One ExposeDAT blog post titled “Gordon Dove and Tony Alford’s Radioactive Waste Dumping,” briefly describes the relationship between Alford and the parish’s president, who jointly own a Montana trucking company that has been cited for dumping radioactive waste in Montana. That citation was originally reported in the Missoula, Mont., newspaper The Missoulian.

    In a post titled “You Scratch Mine and I’ll Scratch Yours,” the blog uses public records to call attention to the fact that Sheriff Larpenter gave Alford a parish contract despite that fact that his wife manages Alford’s office.

    “When decent, law abiding citizens try to speak out on matters of public importance, they’re treated like criminals,” Smitko said. “If this is what happens to a police officer with 12 year of impeccable service what the hell kind of justice do criminals get?”

    The Sheriff’s office, the police department and the district attorney’s office did not return requests for comment.

    This isn’t the first time that Louisiana law enforcement officers have challenged those who criticize them. In 2012, Bobby Simmons, a former police officer, was arrested and jailed on a charge of criminal defamation for a letter he wrote to a newspaper regarding another police officer. The charge was later dropped, and Simmons filed a civil suit alleging that his civil rights were violated.

  • Carl Icahn Has Never Been More Short The Market, Is Pressing For A Crash

    Three months ago, when looking at the 10-Q of Carl Icahn’s hedge fund vehicle, Icahn Enterprises, L.P. (IEP) we found something striking: Carl Icahn had put his money where his mouth was. Recall that over the past year, Carl Icahn had become one of the most vocal market bears with a series of increasingly escalating forecasts. At first, he was mostly pessimistic about junk bonds, saying last May that “what’s even more dangerous than the actual stock market is the high yield market.” As the year progressed his pessimism become more acute and in December he said that the “meltdown in high yield is just beginning.” It culminated in February when he said on CNBC that a “day of reckoning is coming.”

    Some skeptics thought that Icahn was simply trying to scare investors into selling so he could load up on risk assets at cheaper prices, however that turned out to be wrong when IEP revealed that as of March 31 it had taken its net short position from a modestly bearish 25% net short to an unprecedented for Icahn 149% short position, a six-fold increase in bearish bets.

    However, even as other prominent billionaires piled onto the bearish side, the market soared. And then, after Q1, it soared some more to the point where as of the end of June, following the brief Brexit dump, it was just shy of all time highs (where it is now). So there was renewed speculation if Icahn had given up on his record bearish bet. So when overnight IEP released its latest 10-Q, we were eager to find out if Carl had unwound his record short, or perhaps, added more to it. What we found is that  one quarter after having a net short position of -149%, as of June 30, Icahn’s net position was once again -149%, or in other words, he has once again never been shorter the market.

     

    This is the result of a relatively flat long gross exposure of 174% (up 10% from the previous quarter) resulting from a 166% equity and 8% credit long, and another surge soaring short book which has  grown even more from -313% as of March 31, 2016 to a gargantuan 323% as of the last quarter, on the back of 301% in gross short equity exposure and 22% short credit.

    This is what IEP added as detail:

    Of our short exposure of 323%, the fair value of our short positions represented 24% of our short exposure. The notional value of our other short positions, which primarily included short credit default swap contracts and short broad market index swap derivative contracts, represented 299% of our short exposure.

     

    With respect to both our long positions that are not notionalized (167% long exposure) and our short positions that are not notionalized (24% short), each 1% change in exposure as a result of purchases or sales (assuming no change in value) would have a 1% impact on our cash and cash equivalents (as a percentage of net asset value). Changes in exposure as a result of purchases and sales as well as adverse changes in market value would also have an effect on funds available to us pursuant to prime brokerage lines of credit.

     

    With respect to the notional value of our other short positions (299% short exposure), our liquidity would decrease by the balance sheet unrealized loss if we were to close the positions at quarter end prices. This would be offset by a release of restricted cash balances collateralizing these positions as well as an increase in funds available to us pursuant to certain prime brokerage lines of credit. If we were to increase our short exposure by adding to these short positions, we would be required to provide cash collateral equal to a small percentage of the initial notional value at counterparties that require cash as collateral and then post additional collateral equal to 100% of the mark to market on adverse changes in fair value. For our counterparties who do not require cash collateral, funds available from lines of credit would decrease.

    There was little incremental detail. One quarter ago, when asked about this unprecedented bearish position, Icahn Enterprises CEO Cozza said during the earnings call that “Carl has been very vocal in recent weeks in the media about his negative views” adding that “we’re much more concerned about the market going down 20% than we are it going up 20%. And so the significant weighting to the short side reflects that.”

    Considering that since then the market has soared higher on wave after wave of central bank intervention, which has brought the monthly total amount of global QE to just shy of $200 billion, after the latest QE increase by the BOE…

     

    … perhaps Icahn’s directional fears were displaced.  On the other hand, since Icahn has shown no interest in unwinding his bearish position, and has kept it identical to a quarter ago, one can conclude that the financier-rapidly-turning-politician, has merely delayed his bet for a day of reckoning for the S&P500.  Perhaps this time he will be right.

    Source

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 5th August 2016

  • How Europe Is Getting Rich by Fueling Its Own Terror Epidemic

    Submitted by Darius Shahtahmasebi via TheAntiMedia.org,

    Though Europe does not have the rates of gun violence the United States continues to grapple with, European governments have made over a billion euros by fueling gun violence in the Middle East and North Africa.

    A report conducted by a team of reporters from the Balkan Investigative Reporting Network (BIRN) and the Organized Crime and Corruption Reporting Project (OCCRP) found a group of European nations has been funneling arms into the Middle East region since 2012, making at least 1.2 billion euros in the process.

    According to the report, 68 flights that took place within 13 months transported weapons and ammunition to the Middle East, including to NATO member Turkey, which in turn “funnelled arms into brutal civil wars in Syria and Yemen.” The report also notes that these flights make up only a small portion of the 1.2 billion euros in arms deals between Europe and the Middle East since 2012.

    The report’s conclusions are horrifying, to say the least. The report states:

    Arms export licenses, which are supposed to guarantee the final destination of the goods, have been granted despite ample evidence that weapons are being diverted to Syrian and other armed groups accused of widespread human rights abuses and atrocities.”

    Considering Europe is battling a continually rising terrorist threat, they seem to be going about tackling this issue the wrong way.

    Surely the best way to counter terrorism is to cease funding it in the first place.

    One astounding aspect of the report is that the lucrative war-profiteering business involves nations the world would not usually regard as overly-interested in war. The countries contributing to the rising terror threat, as identified by the report, are Bosnia and Herzegovina, Bulgaria, Croatia, the Czech Republic, and Romania, among others.

    This report adds to the already glaring problem of European countries making billions of dollars off the death and destruction of Middle Eastern civilian life. The Stockholm International Peace Research Institute (SIPRI) found the United Kingdom was second only to the United States in arms sales, making up 10.4 percent of the total $401 billion worth of arms sold around the world for the 2014 period.

    Although these figures refer directly to companies selling arms, the fact remains that European governments do nothing to deter this. In fact, former U.K. Prime Minister David Cameron insists the U.K. has one of the strictest regimes anywhere in the world for sales of defence equipment but we do believe that countries have a right to self-defence.”

    Shamefully, the United Kingdom’s billion dollar arms sales have been fueling the conflict in Yemen — the poorest and most disadvantaged country in the Arab region — by arming the aggressive Saudi Arabian regime. Saudi Arabia’s ongoing intervention in Yemen merely benefits al-Qaeda.

    Arms sales from Britain to human rights abusers are only increasing. The idea that European governments want to prevent terrorist attacks on the European mainland is ludicrous given the fact European governments continue to directly arm terrorist groups and brutal regimes that export jihadist philosophies.

    But hey, at least they made a billion dollars, right?

  • Musical Chairs

     

     

     

     

    Musical Chairs
    Posted with permission and written by Jeff Thomas (CLICK HERE FOR ORIGINAL)

     


     

    You’re familiar with the children’s game of musical chairs. Ten children walk around nine chairs whilst listening to music. When the music stops, each must quickly find a chair and sit in it. One child is out of luck and is out of the game. Then a chair is removed and the nine remaining children walk around the eight remaining chairs, waiting for the music to stop again.

     

    Economics is a bit like musical chairs. In a recession, the economy takes a hit and there are some casualties. Some players fail to get a chair in time and are out of the game. The game then goes on without them. The economy eventually recovers.

     

    But a depression is a different game entirely. Since 2007, the world has been in an unacknowledged depression. A depression is like a game of musical chairs in which ten children are walking around, but suddenly nine of the chairs are taken away. This means that nine of the children will soon be out of the game. But it also means that all ten understand that the odds of them remaining in the game are quite slim and that desperate times call for desperate measures. It’s time to toss out the rule book and do whatever you have to, to get the one remaining chair.

     

    Of course, the pundits officially deny that we have even been in a depression. They regularly describe the world as “in recovery from the 2008-2010 recession,” but the “shovel-ready jobs” that are “on the way” never quite materialize. The “green shoots” never seem to blossom. So, what’s going on here?

     

    Depressions do not occur all at once. It takes time for them to bottom and, if an economy is propped up through economic heroin (debt) the Big Crash can be a long time in coming.

     

    In that regard, this one is one for the record books. As Doug Casey is fond of saying, a depression is like a hurricane. First there are the initial crashes, then a calm as the eye of the hurricane passes over, then, we enter the trailing edge of the other side of the hurricane. This is the time when things really get rough – when even the politicians will start using the dreaded “D” word. We have entered that final stage, as the economic symptoms demonstrate, and this is the time when the game of musical chairs will evolve into something quite a bit nastier.

     

    In normal economic times, even including recession periods, we observe financial institutions maintaining their staunchly conservative image. For the most part, they deliver as promised. But, as we move into the trailing edge of the second half of the hurricane, we notice more and more that the bankers are rewriting the rule book in order to take possession of the wealth that they previously held in trust for their depositors.

     

    And they don’t do this in isolation. They do it with the aid of the governments of the day. New laws are written in advance of the crisis period to assure that the banks can plunder the deposits with impunity. Since 2010, such laws have been passed in the EU, the US, Canada and other jurisdictions.

     

    Trial balloons have been sent up to ascertain to what degree they will get away with their freezes and confiscations. Greece has been an excellent trial balloon for the freezes and Cyprus has done the same for the confiscations. The world is now as ready as it’s going to be for the game to be played on an international level.

     

    So what will it look like, this game of musical chairs on steroids? Well, first we’ll see the sudden crashes of markets and/or defaults on debts. Shortly thereafter, one Monday morning (or more likely one Tuesday after a long weekend) the financial institutions will fail to open their doors. The media will announce a “temporary state of emergency” during which the governments and banks must resolve some difficulties in order to “assure a continued sound economy.” Until that time, the banks will either remain shut, or will process only small transactions. (This latter announcement is a nice way of saying that the depositors will be on an allowance from the bank until further notice.)

     

    Much as Greeks may now withdraw €420 per week, much of the rest of the world will be operated under a similar allowance. What about a business that would need to pay that amount for even one salary? What of a restaurant that would pay that amount for even a small food delivery? That remains to be seen – but business will not be robust.


    Of one thing we can be sure. The banks will part with no more than they absolutely have to in order to avoid riots. Their wish will be to confiscate as much as possible themselves, and the new laws allow them to do just that.


    And that’s when we’ll discover that nine chairs have disappeared.


    Remember, what we’re looking at is the end-game. The banks will no longer maintain the ruse of client-concern beyond this point. Each player grabs as much as he is able, because banking as we know it will come to an end.


    To be sure, a new banking system will rise from the ashes in a few years, but for now, the wealth that’s on the table will be swept up by those who have the laws on their side.


    Many of the most august names in banking may well disappear over the next few years. Some institutions folded in 2008, but re-opened under new names (minus the debt that sank them in the first place). Others, like Bear-Stearns and Lehman Brothers are gone for good. They will be joined by a host of other stalwarts of the industry. Merrill Lynch, AIG, Royal Bank of Scotland, Fortis, Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac all teetered on the edge of collapse in 2008. These and many more stand to go off the cliff in the coming crisis.


    And they will not go with dignity. They will go out with a last-minute grab of as much of the deposits as they can manage. (Those who have taken part in a bank liquidation will know that, what little the departing bankers leave behind on the table, the liquidators gobble up in fees. Depositors, at best, get the scraps.)


    Well. Pretty grim. If history repeats, as it generally does, more than 95% of depositors will lose most or all of their savings. But there will be those who are only impacted in a minor way – those who decided to get their wealth (no matter how large or small) out of the banks before the crash.


    How so? First, and most essential, remove all your wealth (except for a maximum of three months’ operating capital) from the bank. Second, move it to a jurisdiction that’s at a lesser risk than the jurisdictions stated above. (Pick the healthiest one you can find, with the lowest taxation rate and a reputation for stable government over decades.) Third, since banks in other jurisdictions may also be at risk, place your wealth in those forms of ownership that are least likely to be under attack from your home government (precious metals and real estate). Overseas real estate is the safest bet, as any attempt for a foreign government to confiscate it amounts to an act of war. However, real estate is not the most liquid means of holding wealth, so quite a bit must be held in precious metals – again in the overseas jurisdiction where it’s harder to confiscate.


    Should you need a sudden cash infusion at home, precious metals are always easy to sell quickly and the proceeds are easily repatriated (countries in economic trouble never complain about money coming in, only money going out.)


    Finally, if possible, create an overseas location for yourself, either where your wealth is, or another location – one that’s likely to be peaceful to live in, when crisis reaches your home jurisdiction.


    In this game, the odds of being the lucky one who gets the last chair are very slim. The alternative requires more preparation, but is, by far, the safer choice.

     

     

    Please email with any questions about this article or precious metals HERE

     

     

     

     

     

    Musical Chairs
    Posted with permission and written by Jeff Thomas (CLICK HERE FOR ORIGINAL)

  • War Or Peace: The Essential Question Before American Voters On November 8th

    Submitted by Gilbert Doctorow via Russia-Insider.com,

    In the 1992 presidential election, the campaign team of Bill Clinton had the remarkable insight to simplify the choice before the American electorate in November, encapsulating the whole thought process in the phrase “it’s the economy, stupid.”  Following this advice, voters ignored the foreign policy triumphs of President George W. Bush’s administration, including the recently won war against Iraq to liberate occupied Kuwait, and the slightly more remote “victory” in the Cold War, which Bush recalled to the nation in the forlorn hope of eliciting gratitude. Indeed, going into the elections, the economy was anemic, for cyclical reasons, and it was not to the incumbent’s advantage that this fact be highlighted.

    Today, as another Clinton faces off with an unconventional and widely demonized Republican candidate, the economy is once again anemic, though this time under the stewardship of a Democratic administration, and again for cyclical reasons, but the economy and the domestic welfare programs that are so dependent on vibrant performance are not what the election is all about.

    Voters will not confront a typical Right-Left choice, although supporters of Hillary Clinton would like to play it that way. It will not be about who gets more of the economic pie and who gets less, who is more equal than others and who is less equal.

    Charges that Hillary is in the pocket of Wall Street and big business, who have generously financed her campaign, were first brought against her very effectively and persistently by her opponent in the Democratic primaries, Bernie Sanders, who embodied the Left by his persona and points in his platform. He lost to Hillary, the Centrist. Meanwhile, across the court, notwithstanding the support he has consistently received from Tea Party Republicans for his anti-establishment rhetoric, Trump is in many ways more of a Nelson Rockefeller Republican on domestic economic issues, that is to say a Centrist, who, unlike that quintessential Tea Party campaigner, Ron Paul, has no desire to tear down the Federal Reserve and deconstruct the federal government.

    In matters of substance as opposed to character assassination that both parties’ candidates have engaged in freely, what separates the candidates and makes it worthwhile to register and vote on November 8th is the domain of international relations. This, as a general rule, is the only area where a president has free hands anyway, whatever position his party holds in the Congress.  Here the choice facing voters is stark, I would say existential:  do we want War or Peace?

    Do we want to pursue our path of global hegemony, which is bringing us into growing confrontation with Russia, meaning a high probability of war, (the policy of Hillary Clinton), or do we want a harmonious international order in which the U.S. plays its role at the board of governors, just like other major world powers (the policy of Donald Trump).

    Let me go one step further and explain what “war” means, since it is not something that gets much attention in our media, whereas it is at the top of the news each day in Russia.

    “War” does not mean Cold War-II, a kind of scab you can pick to indulge a pleasure in pain that is not life threatening. War means what our military like to call “kinetics” to mask the horror of it all. It means live ammunition, ranging from conventional to thermonuclear devices that can devastate large swathes of the United States if we play our hand badly, as would likely be the case for reasons I explain below should Hillary and her flock of Neocon armchair strategists take the reins of power in January 2017.

    Let us consider the following:

    1.  Where we are presently in relations with the world’s only other nuclear superpower, Russia, which, I remind you, together with the United States, has 50:50 ownership of 95% of all nuclear warheads on earth.

    Briefly, we are in an escalating confrontation with the Russians, who have said openly and clearly that they view our ongoing build-up of NATO forces at their borders in the Baltics and Poland as posing an unacceptable threat to their security. They have also said openly and clearly that our completion this spring of what is called an anti-missile defense base in Romania and construction of a similar base in Poland, due for completion in 2017, threatens to upset the strategic nuclear balance by giving the United States a first strike capability. Whether they are right or wrong in their assessment of our words and deeds is beside the point. They are laying down their response based on their view of us, not our view of us.

    For the past year or more, the Kremlin has said vaguely that host countries of the missile defense bases would be in their “crosshairs.”  Russian positions have become more specific and more threatening following the NATO summit in Warsaw in early July that approved an American led program of provocative military exercises near Russia’s borders and stationing in the Baltic States of 4 brigades with mixed NATO Member State contingents. This has forced the Russian military to move to the previously ‘safe’ and undefended Western frontier region near St Petersburg large masses of troops and equipment from the center of their country, east of Moscow. By their public statements, the Russians have made no secret of their intention to act preemptively, as necessary, to wipe out the US bases in Romania and Poland and restore what they see as strategic parity.

    Just a couple of weeks ago, on a widely watched Russian state television run political talk show, Duma deputy and leader of the nationalist LDPR party Vladimir Zhirinovsky said that Germans risked utter destruction if they continued on their present track of operating Bundeswehr forces in the Baltics. Zhirinovsky would never make such threats without tacit Kremlin backing.

    Vladimir Zhirinovsky explaining that NATO's current course will result in war

    For his part, in a recent press conference, President Vladimir Putin asked rhetorically why Western leaders “don’t get it” – why they are not heeding Russia’s warnings on its determination to protect vital security interests, including by means of preemptive strikes.

    In this press conference from June 2016, Putin explains in detail why Russia sees NATO's behavior as threatening, and why Russia will be forced to react unless NATO changes course.  Strongly recommended!

    Indeed, why are we tone deaf when our very survival is at risk?

    2.  Why is it that the American political Establishment, of which Hillary Clinton is the standard bearer in this presidential election, does not take the Russians seriously?

    Back in the 1960s and 70s, when the bard Tom Lehrer was touring college campuses with his irreverent song devoted to the nuclear Armageddon “We’ll all go together when we go,”  Americans feared and even respected the USSR for what its military arsenal signified.

    Our sense that we had “won” the Cold War when the USSR collapsed in 1992 was followed by our witnessing the economic collapse of Russia as it struggled to make a transition from directed to market economy in the 1990s. Meanwhile Russia’s national wealth was siphoned off by newly emerged “oligarchs.” The vast majority of the population was pauperized in that period, as we plainly understood when our religious communities sent assistance packages to the Russian people.

    And Russia’s political infrastructure fell apart, replaced by regional satrapies and would- be successor states from among minority nationalities. The net result is that the United States Establishment’s respect for Russia degraded into open mockery. The fact that Russia was led in the 1990s by a confirmed alcoholic with multiple health problems that took him away from his desk for weeks at a time, only contributed to the sense that Russia had become the “Sick Man of Europe” both literally and figuratively.

    This image of Russia has persisted in the thinking of our Establishment, when it is not jostled by images of a tin-pot dictator named Vladimir Putin who holds onto power by making frightening poses against foreign powers, in particular, against the United States. For our establishment, Russia remains, as Barack Obama said a couple of years ago, “just a regional power,” “ a bully” in its neighborhood who has to be put in his place, and also a country that produces nothing that anyone wants, to which no one willingly emigrates (all patently false statements). In sharing all of these views, Hillary is no different from the rest of our political Establishment.

    It is Donald Trump and his questioning the wisdom of poking the Russian bear in the eye who is the odd man out. What makes Hillary different from her Establishment peers is the opportunity she has had in the Obama administration to act on her beliefs with all the powers of Secretary of State.

    We should have given our view of Russian capabilities a serious rethink following their military action in Crimea in March 2014, when they engineered a bloodless takeover of the peninsula notwithstanding the local presence of nearly the same number of Ukrainian armed forces (20,000) as their own. Another jolt back to present reality could have emerged from Russian military action in Syria as from October 2015, which they used as a proving ground for their most up-to-date military gear and troops.

    However, the U.S. response, with Hillary as cheerleader, has been to double down, ignore the potential risks of conflict, and continue to drive the Russians to the wall, so as to “negotiate from a position of strength” if indeed we have any intention of negotiating with the Russians at all.

    3.  Why do I say that Hillary Clinton is the War Party candidate?

    The record of  Hillary Clinton on foreign policy issues has been very well documented in a recent article that appeared in Consortium News, entitled, The Fear Of Hillary's Foreign Policy, and was republished in Russia Insider. The author, James Carden, is a former State Department employee with concentration in Russia who left the service in the George Bush Jr. years to become a journalist and now is a regular contributor to The Nation.

    I will not repeat blow for blow Carden’s chronology of Hillary's terrible foreign policy baggage, going back to the decisions taken in Bill's second term that brought us more US military interventions abroad than any other similar period in the country's history while also setting up the dangerous confrontation with Russia, the New Cold War, that dominates headlines today. As James Carden shows, the baggage carries through to Hillary's consistent behavior as Secretary of State in the Obama Administration, where she was always among the most hawkish, pro-military action voices, working hard to overcome the passive resistance of Obama to anything resembling policy decisions.

    Here I will focus on one non-Russian issue, for the sake of simplification and clarification:  Libya.  No, not the Libya of the Benghazi catastrophe and the killing of our US consul. That has been discussed endlessly in our media, but misses the point entirely regarding Hillary's culpability and why she will be a disastrous president.  

    The Libyan intervention to remove Colonel Gaddafi had the full support of Hillary within the Administration. She was a cheerleader in this exercise of American global (mis)management and regime change leading to chaos.  It was fully in line with her basic instincts, call it all-American hubris or arrogance.  And the most revealing proof of her unfitness to be Commander in Chief is the now widely publicized video sequence of Hillary, face distorted in glee, celebrating (!) the savage murder of Gaddafi following his being sodomized and grievously wounded:  "we came, we saw, he died."

    It is not for nothing that the Neocon vultures that took control of US foreign and military policy under Bush-Cheney are now avid supporters of Hillary's candidacy.

    As regards Russia, Hillary has been pouring oil on the flames of potential conflict for years now.  She has publicly likened Vladimir Putin to Adolf Hitler, an insult that no one dared to apply to Russian (Soviet) leaders during the 50 years of the Cold War.  That coming from our nation’s senior diplomat virtually closes the door on diplomacy and reason, leaving us with brute force to settle our differences. She has called repeatedly for providing lethal weapons to Ukraine, which, if implemented would put us on a direct collision course with Russia.  She has called for establishing a no-flight zone in Syria well after the Russians introduced their air force assets, including a highly advanced air defense system covering all of Syrian air space/ The result of implementing her recommendations in Syria would be direct armed conflict with the Russian forces in the region if we attempted to enforce an interdiction. And de jure, we  would be in the wrong, because Russian presence has the express support of the Syrian government, whereas ours does not.

    Hillary’s public statements on Russia are highly irresponsible and make sense only if we were prepared to launch a war on that country here and now.  I doubt that is the case.  Meanwhile, the asymmetrical structures of political decision making in the USA and Russia, whereby the Russian President can act with full authority far more quickly than his American counterpart, render this kind of US bluffing and posturing extremely dangerous. Russia is not Iraq. Russia is not Libya. The Russian leadership is tough, experienced and…brave.

    For reasons of Hillary’s past record of ill-considered adventurism abroad and for reasons of the mad advisers from the Neocon camp whom she has in her inner circle today, it could be a fatal mistake to vote Hillary Clinton on November 8th.  

    About Trump’s past record in power, there is not much to say.  About his present promises on foreign policy, one may have doubts.  However, the bad blood between him and the Neocons ensures us that a Trump presidency would finally put them out on the curb, where they belong. And if we step back from our present policies on Russia, Moscow will surely reciprocate and seek accommodation. After all, even as late as 2008 Vladimir Putin harbored hopes of his country joining NATO.

  • The Bank of England Just Provided Us With More Reasons to Own Gold and Silver

    Yesterday the Bank of England cut its main interest rate from 0.5% to 0.25% for the first time, marking its first interest rate change since March 2009, and provided all of us with more reasons to keep converting fiat currencies into physical gold and physical silver. In addition the BOE announced an increase in its QE bond-buying program of £60bn to £435bn. And in response, the British pound immediately fell by 1% to the USD and traders added to their British pound longs, exceeding previous record net long positions in the pound recorded three years ago. I understand that traders are seeking a stronger rebound in the British pound after its plunge post-Brexit, and since the process for the UK to exit the EU has not even begun since the yes referendum vote, traders may be right to assume that the British pound will eventually rebound significantly in strength following this rate cut after people realize that a Brexit yes referendum vote may translate into an indefinite stay of limbo for the UK within the EU.

     

    However, believing that any strengthening of any global fiat currency will be sustained over time is folly as all Central Bankers have aptly illustrated for years that they have already moved beyond the point of no return from their indefinitely low-interest rate, weak currency purchasing power policy years ago and can not raise interest rates to anything close to a free market interest rate. Thus, even if the British pound rebounds much more significantly from its post Brexit and post BOE interest rate cut, and it should, the spiraling weakening of its purchasing power will resume long-term without a doubt. The same knee-jerk trader reaction happened in response to the US Federal Reserve raising their Fed Funds interest rate by a paltry amount from a 0.00% to 0.25% range to a 0.25% to 0.50% range on 16 December 2015. The very next day, traders responding by dumping precious metals due to the silly Central Banker Janet Yellen’s talk of a strengthening economy spurring their interest rate raise. When she publicly announced this interest rate hike decision, Yellen stated that their decision was based upon “the committee’s confidence that the economy will continue to strengthen. The economic recovery has clearly come a long way, though it is not yet complete…but with the economy performing well and expected to do so, the committee judged that modest increase in the Federal Funds rate is now appropriate.”


    In response, gold and silver both dumped in price, with silver suffering an especially hard fall of more than 3.5% the next trading day. This undeserved weakness in gold and silver prices persisted for a couple of weeks in gold and for an entire month in silver, even though this paltry raise in the Fed Funds interest rate was the first hike in over 9 ½ years since 29 June, 2006, simply because this interest rate “hike” (if one can call a measly ¼ of 1% increase a hike) was accompanied by silly claims of a strengthening, robust US economy made by Fed Reserve Chairman Janet Yellen. I, for one, have never understood why traders lose their minds over such policy announcements, instigating sharp asset price spikes and falls depending upon the announcement, that are often very sharply reversed in the near future. Certainly the gold and silver price dumps that occurred in reaction to Yellen’s announcement of a 0.25% raise in the Fed Funds rate has been sharply reversed through all of 2016. Of course, I understand that traders don’t care about fundamentals and only care about profiting from any strong movement in asset price, even if the price move is very short-lived and counterintuitive.

     

    However, does a 0.25% Fed Funds rate increase really change the Central Banker fiat currency destruction policy adopted for decades, and provide an impetus to sell one’s gold and silver in exchange for devaluing paper and digital fiat currencies? We’ve all seen massive spikes and falls in crude oil spikes happen within a span of days in recent years. Is it really possible for a trader to be on the right side of every unexpected intraday spike higher and lower, especially when sharp movements higher are often reversed just days later and vice versa? Why not just understand the long-term picture, and position yourself to be on the right side of this equation? I guess that may be too much to ask of a trader, however, and it may be tantamount to asking a newborn duckling not to take to water. In other words, during that press conference, Yellen stated the same bunk that Federal Reserve bankers had stated in their minutes eight times a year, for 7 years in a row in which they implied an interest rate hike could be coming, only to never raise interest rates. And after 7 years of deception in which they finally made good on their threat to raise interest rates, the interest rate “hike” turned out to be a measly 0.25% raise, because that’s all they could afford to raise it without risking greater ripples and sell-offs in the financial markets. In other words, bankers released somewhere around 55 statements in a row about possibilities of raising interest rates without actually raising interest rates, before executing what amounted to the lowest possible “hike” they could possibly execute. And today, analysts incredibly still wait upon the public statements of Central Bankers with unbridled anticipation, and still incredibly use their statements to guide their investment strategies.

     

    For example, I randomly pulled a FOMC minutes statement from January 2011, more than five years ago, and that statement contained Central Banker affirmations of “strong” consumer spending, “improvements in household and business confidence and in labor market conditions [that] “would likely reinforce the rise in domestic demand”, talk of “gains” in employment and anticipation of “stronger growth” in the US economy for FY2011, with “gradual acceleration” of US economic growth in 2012 and 2013. In fact, one can pull any Federal Reserve FOMC statement from their archives over the past 5-½ years and you will find the same bunk and nonsense that they used to further inflate the US stock market bubble and to control gold and silver prices time after time after time. As I review the content of these statements every year, if one could go back and review years prior to 2011, though the Feds do not keep statements archived prior to 2011, one would discover that the Feds were using this same deceitful language since 2009.  I, for one, at a complete loss for why big bank analysts still talk about “normalization” of interest rates and parrot Janet Yellen’s frequent press statements in regard to this topic as if this were even a remote, much less, a realistic possibility. If we stop and think about the definition of “normalized” interest rates, how high of a level should normalized rates be when Bank of Japan bankers adopted ZIRP (Zero Interest Rate Policy) for 16 years before deciding ZIRP was inadequate enough to stimulate their economy and plunged interest rates into negative territory this year, and US Federal Reserve bankers maintained ZIRP for 7 years before finally “raising” interest rates for the first time in nearly 10 years on 16 December 2015?

     

    Thus, we’ve had 16 consecutive years of zero interest rate policy (and now negative interest rate policy) in Japan and 7 years of ZIRP (and now a paltry 0.25% to 0.50% Fed Funds rate) in the US to understand that normalization of interest rates is never happening, yet analysts from JP Morgan, Goldman Sachs, Citibank, etc. still frequently discuss the timeline for “normalized” interest rates in the mass media as if they will happen. That’s a whole lot of exhibited foolishness in not being able to read between the lines, especially when the lines are so clearly demarcated for all to see. Furthermore, my definition of “normalized” interest rates is the reinstatement of free market interest rates, which we all know will never happen during any of our lifetimes without Central Bankers being expelled out of nations. But what if we consider the Central Bankers’ definition of “normalized” interest rates, likely within a 0.50% to 1.00% interest rate range? Given the fact that the Fed Funds interest rates was as high as 20% in the early 1980s and consistently around 5% throughout most of the 1990s, a “normalized” 050% to 1.00% interest rate is not normal at all. Furthermore, if we understand how a rate hike today to 1.00% might cause a meltdown in the BIS last-reported figure of $493 trillion of global derivatives contracts and cause TPTB banks to fail, then we know that even an abnormally-low “normalized” interest rate is likely never to happen (furthermore, the amount of global derivatives contracts still outstanding in the world today, is in reality, still close to a quadrillion dollars and not the misleading figure reported by the BIS. Years ago, to arrive at their current figure of $493 trillion, the BIS cut the existing figure in half overnight by changing the metric to measure notional derivative contract valuations, which was tantamount to an Enron-like cooking of the books simply to significantly lessen the appearance of risk inherent in the global financial system.)

     

    In the end, there is no end in sight to the fiat currency purchasing power devaluation objectives of Central Bankers, and for this reason, we should stop taking our cues from traders that try to profit on every single short-term move in asset prices. Rather, we need to understand that the global currency wars still firmly remains a race to the bottom in purchasing power, and that converting fiat currencies into wealth preserving physical gold and physical silver still makes a whole lot of sense.

     

    To receive news about SmartKnowledgeU articles when we first release them, please subscribe to our article rss feed here. Click here for more information on the best junior gold and silver mining stocks and wealth preservation strategies.

  • In Rare Interview, Jailed Jihadist Warns ISIS Plans "Loads Of Concurrent Attacks In England, Germany, & France"

    It has been a dreadful 12 months for Europe, where last November, Islamic radical refugees unleashed a terrorist first in Paris in a dramatic suicide bombing and mass execution, and proceeded from there to Belgium and ultimately Germany in a trail of terror that gets worse by the week, if not day. And it’s about to get worse, because a jailed former Islamic State jihadist, German-born Harry Sarfo, has revealed that the terrorist group is actively seeking volunteers in Germany and the UK to carry out “loads of attacks at the same time in England, Germany and France.”

    Members of the Islamic State’s intelligence service, called Emni in Arabic, told Sarfo they were first and foremost interested in waging terrorism across the globe. In an interview with the New York Times, Sarfo, who is currently serving a three-year term on terrorism charges at a maximum security prison near Bremen, recalled what one masked commander once told him.

    “He was speaking openly about the situation, saying that they have loads of people living in European countries and waiting for commands to attack the European people. And that was before the Brussels attacks, before the Paris attacks.”

     

    Almost approaching the sophistication of its western peers, according to French, Belgian, German and Austrian intelligence and interrogation records cited by the Times, Emni is a fundamental part of IS, made from an “internal police force and an external operations branch.” It is led by IS spokesman and propaganda chief Abu Muhammad al-Adnani, who has a range of operatives authorized to plan attacks worldwide, including a “secret service for European affairs,” a “secret service for Asian affairs” and a “secret service for Arab affairs,” the former jihadist told the Times.

    Although Sarfo had initially desired to fight in Syria and Iraq, when he arrived in Syria to join the extremists there, IS operatives said they had a different plan for him. “They said, ‘Would you mind to go back to Germany, because that’s what we need at the moment,’” Sarfo told the Times. “And they always said they wanted to have something that is occurring in the same time: they want to have loads of attacks at the same time in England and Germany and France.

    “They told me that there aren’t many people in Germany who are willing to do the job,” the newspaper quoted Sarfo as saying shortly after his arrest last year, citing the transcript of his interrogation by German detectives. “They said they had some in the beginning. But one after another, you could say, they chickened out, because they got scared — cold feet. Same in England.”

    Following the recent spike in ISIS terrorist attacks on German soil, one can conclude that Emni has had success with its German recruiting. As for France…

    “My friend asked them about France. And they started laughing,” Sarfo said, recalling a conversation that took place seven months before the coordinated killings in Paris in November last year. “They said, ‘Don’t worry about France.’ ‘Mafi mushkilah’ — in Arabic, it means ‘no problem.’”

    According to the accounts of the arrested operatives, Emni’s members played a major role in the Paris attacks and built the suitcase bombs used in a Brussels airport and subway, adding that the secret group’s soldiers have also been sent to Austria, Germany, Spain, Lebanon, Tunisia, Bangladesh, Indonesia and Malaysia.

    There is much more to come. According to Sarfo, Emni has been actively recruiting potential terrorists from across the globe. The group has sent “hundreds of operatives” back to the European Union, with “hundreds more in Turkey alone,” according to a senior United States intelligence official and a senior American defense official, both of whom spoke on the condition of anonymity to discuss intelligence.

    The good news for the US is that one region where the secret service appears to have not sent its trained jihadists so far is North America, Sarfo said, with intelligence documents reportedly backing his words.

    Though dozens of Americans have become members of the Islamic State, and some have been recruited into the external operations wing, “they know it’s hard for them to get Americans into America” once they have traveled to Syria, he said.

    “For America and Canada, it’s much easier for them to get them over the social network, because they say the Americans are dumb — they have open gun policies,” Sarfo said.

    “They say we can radicalize them easily, and if they have no prior record, they can buy guns, so we don’t need to have no contact man who has to provide guns for them.”

    Although some details of Sarfo’s account cannot be verified, German prison officials and intelligence agents who debriefed him said they found him credible.

  • China Regulator Tells Banks To Evergreen Loans Of Troubled Companies

    From yesterday:

    And now the follow up by Valentin Schmid of Epoch Times

    China Banking Regulator Tells Banks to Evergreen Loans of Troubled Companies

    On the surface, China is talking the reform talk. But is it also walking the walk? There are many examples to demonstrate it isn’t. The most recent one is a directive from the China Banking Regulatory Commission (CBRC) to not cut off lending to troubled companies and evergreening bad loans. This first reported by The Chinese National Business Daily on Aug. 4.

    “A Notice About How the Creditor Committees at Banks and Financial Institutes Should Do Their Jobs” tells banks to “act together and not ‘randomly stop giving or pulling loans.’ These institutes should either provide new loans after taking back the old ones or provide a loan extension, to ‘fully help companies to solve their problems,'” the National Business Daily writes. 

    “It’s big news. A couple of weeks ago they were threatening Liaoning Province to cut off all lending to them if they didn’t tighten loan standards,” said Christopher Balding, a professor of economics at Peking University in Shenzen. “This is a pretty significant turn-around for them to do and it indicates how significant the problem is.”

    The official reform narrative is espoused in this Xinhua piece which claims China has to reform because there is no Plan B. “Supply-side structural reform is also advancing as the country moves to address issues like industrial overcapacity, a large inventory of unsold homes and unprofitable ‘zombie companies.'” Clearly resolving the bad debt of zombie companies is not high on the priority list.

    Goldman Sachs complained in a recent note to clients that companies can default on payments and often nothing happens. The investment bank notes that companies like Sichuan Coal default on payments of interest and principal for weeks or months and then maybe pay creditors later. The company in question defaulted on 1 billion yuan ($150 million) worth of commercial paper in June but made full payments later during the summer, a somewhat arbitrary process.  

    Another case is Dongbei Special Steel, which missed at least five payments on $6 billion of debt since the beginning of the year, but has done nothing to resolve the problem. This is why creditors wrote an angry letter to the local government to help resolve the issue.

    According to Goldman Sachs, Dongbei was the reason Liaoning Province came under pressure:

    “A bondholders meeting took place … with bondholders requesting that the [regulators] halt fundraising by the Liaoning provincial government and the enterprises in Liaoning province, and that institutional investors should stop purchasing bonds issued by the Liaoning government and the enterprises in Liaoning province. According to news reports, this demand stems from disappointment in progress by the provincial government in resolving Dongbei Special Steel’s debt problems, with a lack of information and no clear resolution plan.”

    “Going forward, we do expect this trend to continue, with more defaults given our expectation of slower growth in the second half, and continued uncertainties on how these defaults are resolved.”

    With the blessing of the regulator, Goldman’s prediction is probably correct. The investment bank notes that 11 out of 18 high-profile defaults have not been resolved since the first official default of a Chinese company by Chaori Solar in 2014.   

    (Goldman Sachs)

    (Click to enlarge. Source: Goldman Sachs)

    Christopher Balding thinks the directive shows how serious the debt situation has gotten. “This does indicate that there is a relatively significant pressure on the system and people aren’t making their payments. ‘Look, don’t rock the boat and push people into default.’ To say it so publicly or bluntly is amazing.”

    The notice did include a modifier stating that the companies to be supported “must have a good outlook in terms of either their products or services and have restructuring values,” and that the “the development of the companies should be in line with the macro-economic policy, industrial policy and financial supporting policy of the country.” How serious banks will take this modifier is open to debate. 

    Overall bankruptcies in China have surged 52.5 percent in the first quarter of 2016 compared to a year earlier with 1028 cases being reported by the Supreme People’s Court. Most cases that are resolved involve small companies with few employees. The small firms are liquidated rather than restructured, according to the Financial Times. As we have seen there is another measure applied to larger companies, much to the dismay of Goldman Sachs:

    “A clearer debt resolution process … would help to pave the way for more defaults, which in our view are needed if policymakers are to deliver on structural reforms.” If they want to deliver.

  • "It's A Sad Time In History" Clint Eastwood Rages “We're Really A Pussy Generation… F##king Get Over It"

    Submitted by Mac Slavo via SHTFPlan.com,

    The following requires no further commentary.

    Actor, former mayor and true American legend Clint Eastwood nails it perfectly:

    Excerpted from The Wrap via Drudge Report:

     

    [Trump’s] onto something, because secretly everybody’s getting tired of political correctness, kissing up.

     

    We’re really in a pussy generation. Everybody’s walking on eggshells. We see people accusing people of being racist and all kinds of stuff. When I grew up, those things weren’t called racist.

     

     

    I’d have to go for Trump … you know… because she’s declared that she’s gonna follow in Obama’s footsteps.

     

    There’s been just too much funny business on both sides of the aisle. She’s made a lot of dough out of being a politician. I gave up dough to be a politician.

    On Trump’s “racist” comments to a Judge of Mexican descent presiding over a Trump University legal challenge:

    Yeah, it’s a dumb thing to say. I mean, to predicate your opinion on the fact that the guy was born to Mexican parents or something. He’s said a lot of dumb things. So have all of them. Both sides.

     

    But everybody — the press and everybody’s going, ‘Oh, well, that’s racist,’ and they’re making a big hoodoo out of it. Just fucking get over it. It’s a sad time in history.

    Full interview at Esquire

    Related:

    “You see… in this world there’s two kinds of people my friend… those with loaded guns … and those who dig.”

  • Previewing Tomorrow's Payrolls: Watch Out For Short-End Fireworks

    As the world awaits the next in the series of "most important jobs numbers ever," which has now been shown as only relevant to the degree by which it moves the S&P 500 higher (or god forbid lower), consensus expectations are for a goldilocks 180k gain in jobs and flat 4.9% unemployment rate. The market will be looking to see if the Fed's recent optimism surrounding labor market conditions (despite a collapse in their own LMCI) are justified and if the employment figures of July and August demonstrate a new trend in conjunction with June ahead of the September meeting… and of course the 'election adjustment'.

    Consensus Expectations:

    • US Change in Nonfarm Payrolls (July) M/M Exp. 180K (Prey. 287K, May. 11K) – close to the average of 172K for the first half of the year.
    • US Unemployment Rate (July) M/M Exp. 4.8% (Prey. 4.9%, May. 4.7%)
    • US Average Hourly Earnings (July) M/M Exp. 0.2% (Prey. 0.1%, May. 0.2%)

    So just ignore this… It's probably nothing…

     

    Goldman expects a 190k increase in nonfarm payroll employment in July, slightly above consensus expectations for a 180k gain.

    Most labor market indicators were roughly in line with their recent trends, though a couple of key indicators were somewhat stronger in July.

    Arguing for a stronger report:

    • Job availability. The Conference Board’s labor differential—the difference between the share of consumers saying jobs are plentiful vs. hard to get—moved back into positive territory in July, rising 1.2pt to +0.7. The index remains below the highs reached in the last few expansions.
    • Jobless Claims. The four-week moving average of initial jobless claims leading into the payroll reference week fell 9k to just 258k in July, and claims during the survey week were just 252k. While seasonal adjustment is often challenging in July due to the annual auto plant shutdowns, we nonetheless take some positive signal from the very low recent level of jobless claims.

    Neutral factors:

    • Service sector surveys. The employment components of the service sector surveys were mixed in July. The ISM non-manufacturing survey (-1.3pt to 51.4) and the Richmond Fed survey (-5pt to +12) declined, while the Markit PMI, NY Fed (+3.9pt to +6.9), and Dallas (+1.8pt to +3.8) surveys improved. Service sector employment rose 256k last month and has increased 166k on average over the last six months.
    • Manufacturing surveys. The employment components of the manufacturing surveys were also mixed in July. The Markit PMI, Chicago PMI, Philly Fed (+9.3pt to -1.6), Richmond Fed (+5pt to +6), and Dallas Fed (+8.9pt to -2.6) surveys improved, while the ISM manufacturing (-1pt to 49.4), NY Fed (-4.4pt to -4.4), and Kansas City Fed (-1pt to -5) surveys worsened. Manufacturing employment growth declined by an average of 4k over the last six months, but rebounded to +14k in June.
    • ADP. ADP reported a 179k gain in private payroll employment in July, roughly in line with the increases seen in May and June. Service-sector job gains softened a bit to 185k, manufacturing employment rebounded by 4k, construction employment fell 6k, and energy-sector employment appeared to fall by 4k, the smallest reported decline in that sector since 2014.
    • Online job ads. The Conference Board’s Help Wanted Online (HWOL) report showed increases in both new and total online ads in July, though to levels that remain below those seen earlier this year. We put only limited weight on this indicator at the moment in light of recent research by Fed economists that argued that the HWOL ad count—which had departed significantly from the job openings figures in the official Job Openings and Labor Turnover Survey (JOLTS)—has been influenced by price increases for online job ads.
    • Job cuts. According to the Challenger, Gray & Christmas report, job cuts fell a touch on a seasonally adjusted basis in July. Announced job cuts in the energy sector spiked to 18k in July, indicating that energy job losses likely have a bit further to go.
    • Weather. Weather effects on the monthly payroll numbers were a big story in the first half of this year, as we noted last month. At this point, however, the large swings in weather-sensitive industries are likely behind us, and we have found in past research that weather does not have a statistically meaningful effect on payroll growth from June to October.

    We expect the unemployment rate to remain at 4.9% in July from an unrounded 4.899% in June, but see the risks as tilted to the downside. The headline U3 rate rose 0.2pp in June, while the broader U6 underemployment rate fell 0.1pp to 9.6% as a result of a very large drop in involuntary part-time employment. In our recent labor market status report, we estimated that there is about 0.5pp of broad slack remaining in full-time equivalent terms. With trend employment growth still running at roughly double our 85k estimate of the breakeven rate, we expect the labor market to reach full employment by early 2017 and to surpass it thereafter.

    Average hourly earnings for all workers are likely to rise 0.3% in July, in part reflecting favorable calendar effects. This should leave the year-on-year rate unchanged at 2.6%, though we see the risks as tilted to the upside. Our wage tracker—which aggregates four measures of wage growth—has accelerated to 2.8% year-on-year in our preliminary Q2 estimate, a sign that diminishing slack is boosting wage growth.
     

    Market Reaction

    As ever with the NFP release, the headline is likely to garner much of the initial focus with algorithms and fast money moves jumping on any large discrepancies. Participants are likely to view the jobs report with a wide context, as recent months have seen two extreme numbers on either side of the spectrum, and any substantial revision to last month's large beat could weigh on the USD. However, how the report is received will ultimately be decided on whether it can justify more of the few calling for a September hike and to do so a very strong report must be seen.

    And BNP's strategists Timothy High and Daniel Tangho warn risks to short-end yields appear underpriced…

    Markets continue to discount the possibility of a rate hike in September; the Fed funds market estimates there is a 20% chance.

     

    A strong NFP could push 2y Treasury yields higher by 20bp or more, which would match yield levels seen before the May NFP report derailed the odds of a hike in June or July.

     

    The 2y Treasury yield was 0.90% in mid-May when market participants assigned a 55% probability of a July rate hike. While a weak NFP report could derail a September hike, a strong report is likely to force the markets to re-evalute the situation, in which case a 20% probability of a September rate hike is too low: 55% is more appropriate, and the 2y Treasury yielding about 0.90% is also appropriate.

  • As Obama Slams Iran "Ransom" Allegations, He Refuses To Answer One Simple Question

    Unable to keep the $400 million cash drop to Iran off the front pages, the Obama administration came out swinging today with denials, conspiracy-theory-accusations, and allegations of biased reportingas the mainstream media was forced by the striking actions of The White House to ask uncomfortable questions.

    Bloomberg reports that critics of Obama’s nuclear deal with Iran say the payment was ransom, a contention the White House has strongly denied; that it will encourage Iran to take more Americans hostage; and that it’s likely the money will be funneled into terrorist groups.

    “If true, this report confirms our longstanding suspicion that the administration paid a ransom in exchange for Americans unjustly detained in Iran,” House Speaker Paul Ryan, a Wisconsin Republican, said in a statement.

     

    “It would also mark another chapter in the ongoing saga of misleading the American people to sell this dangerous nuclear deal.”

    Obama administration officials have, of course, dismissed the controversy as old news, noting that the settlement was fully disclosed by the White House and State Department at the time the Iran nuclear deal was announced.

    “The United States of America does not pay ransom and doesn’t negotiate ransoms with any country — we never have and we’re not doing that now,” Secretary of State John Kerry said Thursday in Buenos Aires.

    As The Hill reports, President Obama chastised the press for their coverage of the payment, noting that the deal with Iran was announced months ago as part of a larger diplomatic settlement.

    “This wasn’t some nefarious deal,” Obama said.

     

    “It’s been interesting to watch this story surface,” the president said. “Some of you may recall, we announced these payments in January. Many months ago. There wasn’t a secret, we announced them to all of you.”

     

    “What we have is the manufacturing of outrage on a story that we disclosed in January,” he added later.

     

    “The notion that we would somehow start now in this high-profile way, and announce it to the world, even as we’re looking in the faces of other families whose loved ones are being held hostage and say to them, ‘we don’t pay ransom,’ defies logic,” Obama said.

    Defies logic indeed, like the logic of “keeping your doctor if you like him” or the logic of “no boots on the ground in Syria”? But to summarize, today we got “look over there at Donald Trump”-distractions and “We do not negotiate ransoms with any country” jabbed Kerry; “We do not pay ransom for hostages” lambasted Obama; “it defies logic” snapped Earnest.

    *  *  *

    Still, one big question has yet to be answered, for the second day in fact. It’s a simple question: did the hostages’ plane leave before or after the plane arrived carrying pallets full of $400 million worth of non-USD-denominated cash?

     

    Yesterday the question was asked by James Rosen… and not answered: “I might be able to you an answer on that…”

     

    ,,, and today, none other than The Associated Press’ Matt Lee asked again: “we’re still looking into it”

    Still no answer: Odd for the “most transparent adminstration ever” not to have this kind of basic, flight information at their fingertips: tracking $400 million worth of US taxpayer money – in cash – and the lives of four members of the American military?

    Of course, we suspect the explanation is simple and the two planes just happened to coincidentally arrive on the tarmac at the same time and the hostages and the money carriers merely discussed grandkids and golf games.

    * * *

    And then, later today, we may have stumbled what really happened.

    As a reminder, the four hostages that were allegedly exchanged for the $400 million ransom are the following.


    L to R: Matt Trevithick (Photo Credit Robin Wright) Amir Hekmati, Jason Rezaian
    (Photo Credit AP), Saeed Abedini (News 4).

    Today, one of the US Iranian hostage shown above, Saeed Abidini, spole to FOX Business and explained that the Iranian regime would not let his plane leave Tehran until the ransom plane arrived, Gateway Pundit reports.

    They waited on the tarmac for hours.

    Saeed Abidini: I just remember the night at the airport sitting for hours and hours there and I asked police— why you not letting us go — And he told me we are waiting for another plane and if that plane take off we gonna let you go.

     

    Trish Regan: You slept there at the airport?

     

    Abidini: Yes, for a night. They told us you going to be there for 20 minutes but it took hours and hours. And I ask them why you don’t let us go, because the — was there, pilot was there, everyone was there to leave the country. And he said we are waiting for another plane so if that plane doesn’t come we never let us go.

     

    Hopefully, this can jog Mr. Toner’s memory if the hostage plane left before or after the “non-rasom” cash arrived.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 4th August 2016

  • 10 Facts The Mainstream Media Won’t Tell You About The War In Syria

    Submitted by Darius Shahtahmasebi via TheAntiMedia.org,

    Corporate media regularly attempts to present Bashar al-Assad’s regime in Syria as solely responsible for the ongoing conflict in the region. The media does report on events that contradict this narrative — albeit sparingly — but taken together, these underreported details shine a new light on the conflict.

    10: Bashar al-Assad has a higher approval rating than Barack Obama

    Despite Obama’s claims Assad is illegitimate and must step down, the fact remains that since the conflict erupted in 2011, Assad has held the majority support of his people. The elections in 2014 – which Assad won by a landslide with international observers claiming no violations – is a testament to the fact that although Assad has been accused of serious human rights violations, he continues to remain reasonably popular with the Syrian people.

    Obama, on the other hand, won elections in 2012 with a voter turnout of a mere 53.6 percent of the American public; only 129.1 million total were votes cast. This means approximately 189.8 million American people did not vote for Obama. His current approval rating sits at about 50 percent.

    9: The “moderate” opposition has been hijacked

    There is no longer such a thing as “moderate” opposition in Syria – if there ever was. The so-called Western-backed Free Syrian Army (FSA) has been dominated by extremists for years. The U.S. has known this yet has continued to support the Syrian opposition, despite the fact the New York Times reported in 2012 that the majority of weapons being sent to Syria have been ending up in the hands of jihadists. A classified DIA report predicted the rise of ISIS in 2012, stating:

    “If the situation unravels, there is the possibility of establishing a declared or undeclared Salafist principality in eastern Syria… and this is exactly what the supporting powers to the opposition want, in order to isolate the Syrian regime.”

    Further, an FSA commander went on record not only to admit his fighters regularly conduct joint operations with al-Nusra (al-Qaeda in Syria), but also that he would like to see Syria ruled by Sharia law.

    Apparently, moderate can also mean “al-Qaeda affiliated fanatic.”

    8: Assad never used chemical weapons on his own people

    A U.N. investigation into the first major chemical weapons attack committed in early 2013 — an atrocity the West immediately pinned on Assad — concluded the evidence suggested the attack was more likely committed by the Syrian opposition. A subsequent U.N. investigation into the August 2013 attack never laid blame on anyone, including Assad’s forces. In December 2013, Pulitzer prize-winning journalist Seymour Hersh released an article highlighting deficiencies in the way the situation was handled:

    “In the months before the attack, the American intelligence agencies produced a series of highly classified reports…citing evidence that the al-Nusra Front, a jihadi group affiliated with al-Qaida, had mastered the mechanics of creating sarin and was capable of manufacturing it in quantity. When the attack occurred al-Nusra should have been a suspect, but the administration cherry-picked intelligence to justify a strike against Assad.”

    7: Toppling the Syrian regime was part of a plan adopted shortly after 9/11

    According to a memo disclosed by 4-star General Wesley Clark, shortly after 9/11, the Pentagon adopted a plan to topple the governments of seven countries within five years. The countries were Iraq, Lebanon, Libya, Somalia, Sudan, Syria, and Iran.

    As we know, Iraq was invaded in 2003. American ally Israel tried its hand at taking out Lebanon in 2006. Libya was destroyed in 2011. Prior to this intervention, Libya had the highest standard of living of any country in Africa. In 2015, alone, it dropped 27 places on the U.N. Human Development Index rating. U.S. drones fly over Somalia, U.S. troops are stationed in South Sudan — Sudan was partitioned following a brutal civil war — and Syria has been the scene of a deadly war since 2011. This leaves only Iran, which is discussed below.

    6: Iran and Syria have a mutual defense agreement

    Since 2005, Iran and Syria have been bound by a mutual defense agreement. The Iranian government has shown they intend to fully honor this agreement and has provided the Syrian regime with all manner of support, including troops, a $1 billion credit line, training, and advisement. What makes this conflict even more dangerous, however, is the fact Russia and China have sided with Iran and Syria, stating openly they will not tolerate any attack on Iran. Russia’s military intervention in Syria in recent months proves these are not idle threats – they have put their money where their mouth is.

    Iran has been in the crosshairs of the U.S. foreign policy establishment for some time now. George W. Bush failed to generate the support needed to attack Iran during his time in office — though not for lack of trying — and since 2012, sanctions have been the go-to mantra. By attacking and destabilizing Iran’s most important ally in the region, the powers that be can undermine Iranian attempts to spread its influence in the region, ultimately further weakening Iran.

    5: Former Apple CEO is the son of a Syrian refugee

    The late Steve Jobs, founder of Apple, was the son of a Syrian who moved to the United States in the 1950s. This is particularly amusing given the amount of xenophobia, Islamophobia, racism and hatred refugees and migrants seem to have inspired — even from aspiring presidents. Will a President Donald Trump create the conditions in which future technological pioneers may never reach the United States? His rhetoric seems to indicate as much.

    4: ISIS arose out of the U.S. invasion of Iraq, not the Syrian conflict

    ISIS was formerly known as al-Qaeda in Iraq, which rose to prominence following the U.S.-U.K. led invasion of Iraq in 2003. It is well-known that there was no tangible al-Qaeda presence in Iraq until after the invasion, and there is a reason for this. When Paul Bremer was given the role of Presidential Envoy to Iraq in May 2003, he dissolved the police and military. Bremer fired close to 400,000 former servicemen, including high-ranking military officials who fought in the Iran-Iraq war in the 1980s. These generals now hold senior ranking positions within ISIS. If it weren’t for the United States’ actions, ISIS likely wouldn’t exist.

    ISIS was previously known by the U.S. security establishment as al-Qaeda in Iraq (AQI), but these fighters ultimately became central to Western regime change agendas in Libya and Syria. When the various Iraqi and Syrian al-Qaeda-affiliated groups merged on the Syrian border in 2014, we were left with the fully-fledged terror group we face today.

    3: Turkey, Qatar, and Saudi Arabia wanted to build a pipeline through Syria, but Assad rejected it

    In 2009, Qatar proposed a pipeline to run through Syria and Turkey to export Saudi gas. Assad rejected the proposal and instead formed an agreement with Iran and Iraq to construct a pipeline to the European market that would cut Turkey, Saudi Arabia, and Qatar out of the route entirely. Since, Turkey, Qatar, and Saudi Arabia have been staunch backers of the opposition seeking to topple Assad. Collectively, they have invested billions of dollars, lent weapons, encouraged the spread of fanatical ideology, and helped smuggle fighters across their borders.

    The Iran-Iraq pipeline will strengthen Iranian influence in the region and undermine their rival, Saudi Arabia — the other main OPEC producer. Given the ability to transport gas to Europe without going through Washington’s allies, Iran will hold the upper-hand and will be able to negotiate agreements that exclude the U.S. dollar completely.

    2: Leaked phone calls show Turkey provides ISIS fighters with expensive medical care

    Turkey’s support for hardline Islamists fighting the Syrian regime is extensive. In fact, jihadists regularly refer to the Turkish border as the “gateway to Jihad.” In May 2016, reports started emerging of Turkey going so far as to provide ISIS fighters with expensive medical treatment.

    Turkey is a member of NATO. Let that sink in for a moment.

    1: Western media’s main source for the conflict is a T-shirt shop in Coventry, England

    This is not a joke. If you follow the news, you most probably have heard the mainstream media quote an entity grandiosely called the “Syrian Observatory for Human Rights” (SOHR). This so-called “observatory” is run by one man in his home in Coventry, England — thousands of miles away from the Syrian conflict — yet is quoted by most respected Western media outlets (BBC, Reuters, The Guardian, and International Business Times, for example). His credentials include his ownership of a T-shirt shop just down the road, as well as being a notorious dissident against the current Syrian president.

    *  *  *

    Despite the fact much of the information in this article comes from mainstream outlets, those circulating it refuse to put all of the storylines together to give the public an accurate picture of what is going on in Syria.

    Assad may be brutal — and should face trial for allegations of widespread human rights abuses — but this fact alone does not make the other circumstances untrue or irrelevant. People have the right to be properly informed before they allow themselves to be led down the road of more war in the Middle East, and consequently, more terror attacks and potential conflicts with Russia and China.

  • Money Supply Arguments Are Flawed

    by Keith Weiner

     

    It goes without question, among economists of the central planning mindset, that if a central bank can just set the right quantity of dollars[1], then the price level, GDP, unemployment, and everything else will be right at the Goldilocks Optimum. One such approach that has become popular in recent years is nominal GDP targeting.

    How does a central bank affect the quantity of dollars? In discussing a nominal income targeting, Wikipedia gives the usual laundry list of how to do their magic: “…interest rate targeting or open market operations, unconventional tools such as quantitative easing or interest rates on excess reserves and expectations management…”

    Other than expectations management—which is just telling the market “blah blah blah”—managing an income aggregate is about manipulating one interest rate or another.

    In the real economy, people don’t factor the quantity of dollars into their economic calculations. If you are in the grocery store to buy apples, you do not think about M0 money supply. Whether you are a farmer or miner, whether you operate a factory or trucking company, or even a bank or insurer, the money supply is irrelevant to you.

    By contrast, the interest rate figures in every economic calculation in the economy. How much to borrow, how much to save, and how to assess the tradeoff between consumption and investment are all dependent on interest. The rate of interest is a factor in every price and the relationship between all prices in the economy.

    For example, to grow apples you need land and you must plant trees. Then you have to wait for the trees to mature before they bear fruit. This requires an investment up front, in expectation of earning a return in the future. How high does this return need to be? It depends on the interest rate.

    This decision, made by thousands of current and potential apple farmers, determines the price of apples in the grocery store. And this, in turn, determines the decisions of consumers to buy apples, to buy something else, or to do without fruit if they cannot afford it.

    Whether the interest rate is manipulated upwards, whether it is forced downwards, or whether it is artificially locked in stasis, every price in the economy is affected and everyone’s decisions are altered by the rate of interest. I have written a lot on the perverse incentives caused by interest rate manipulation, but today I want to focus on a different aspect of the problem.

    So, let’s perform a little thought experiment. Suppose a business must pay 20% interest on its capital. If it somehow manages to eke out a 21% rate of profit, it forks over 95 percent of what it earns to its lenders. If it can’t earn at least 20 percent, then it ends up feeding its capital to its creditors.

    Now consider a perverse world where enterprises can borrow at -5 percent. They literally repay investors less capital than they borrow. This case is the opposite of the one above; Lenders feed their capital to enterprises.

    If interest is too high, the Fed is sacrificing entrepreneurs to investors. If interest is too low, then investors are sacrificed to entrepreneurs. Either way, our monetary planners pervert lending into a win-lose deal.

    So what’s the right rate of interest?

    Only a market to determine that. Central planners have never gotten it right, are not right now, and will never get it right. They do, however, inflict collateral damage.

    Market Monetarism—the idea of central planning of credit based on a GDP target—promises improved outcomes over what would happen in a free market. However, it’s no better than conventional Keynesianism or Monetarism.

    We should not be debating different approaches to central planning. We should be rediscovering the idea of a free market in money and credit.


    [1]
    Most commonly this is called money supply. However, there are two problems with this. One, the dollar is credit not money. Two, it is not a supply in the sense of flows—e.g. corn supply or oil supply. It is a measure of stocks, Unlike corn or oil, dollars are not consumed in a transaction.

  • The Social Justice Cult Should Blame Itself For The Rise Of Trump

    Submitted by Brandon Smith via Alt-Market.com,

    I have not been writing much concerning the U.S. election this November, and with good reason – elections are always a distraction from tangible solutions.  They are an anathema to honest debate; a circus of delusions and prefabricated talking points.  They offer the illusion of choice in order to placate the masses.  They are a theater of false hopes.

    That said, elections do accomplish one thing very well — they are great for mobilizing large numbers of people into opposing camps and pitting them against each other over ideologies and political celebrities.  Sometimes, these elections can lead to internal war.  This is where we stand in 2016.

    In my article Will A Trump Presidency Really Change Anything For The Better, published in March, I outlined why I believed that the election of 2016 would revolve around a Trump vs. Hillary free-for-all.  The two sides are perfectly diametrically opposed.  At least, as far as public image is concerned, one is the exact antithesis to the other, and I don’t think this is a coincidence.

    Over the course of the past century social instability and outright internal conflicts have in most cases been the product of a specific catalyst — namely various flavors of Marxism and communism.  That is to say, communists attempt to socially or economically sabotage conservative or free market based systems with civil unrest and political chicanery, and in response, nations are either overrun by color revolution or they swing to the other side of the collectivist spectrum and resort to fascism.

    This is often by design.  As I have examined in detail in numerous articles in the past, it is the financial elite that tend to play BOTH sides of this modern battle between the communists and the “nationalists,” usually promoting or supporting groups with communist leanings, radicalizing them and exploiting them to drive normally level headed conservatives to respond with anger and totalitarianism to keep them at bay.  Of course, these totalitarian regimes also end up under the control of the establishment.  It is the best way to hijack and co-opt a conservative population.

    Today, we have a similarly pervasive communism in the West funded by the same kinds of elites, only in the form of a more frantic style of cultural Marxism.  One need only examine the cash infusions by billionaires like George Soros and his Open Society Institute into Black Lives Matter as well as other “social justice” organizations.

    Under the guise of philanthropy, global financiers exploit mindless followers and the entitlement mob like a heavy bludgeon, swinging them wildly at any cultural mainstay that represents the bedrock of the target nation.  Apparently, the irony is completely lost on the social justice warriors, who completely ignore the fact that rich white guys are bankrolling their battle against… rich white guys.

    It is important to note that while the financial establishment is the very CORE of the problem and the primary instigator and manipulator of the public psyche (they have this down to a science), their success in these endeavors would not be as frequent without so many mindless followers and academic idiots to perpetuate the momentum of chaos.  These groups share almost as much blame as the elites in the destruction of civility and prosperity.

    In this age of unstable economies and societies, there are many people who are desperate to be told what to do rather than lead themselves.  However, none are quite as horrifying as the social justice cultists.

    These people are, in my view, nearly the pinnacle of the communist ideal.  They are die hard collectivists, and are willing to rationalize almost any action as long as they believe it is being done in the name of the “greater good.”  Usually, this greater good is based on entirely arbitrary determinations rather than any inherent moral code, making it vaporous and easily changeable.  A “greater good” without principles based in inherent conscience or natural law can be shifted on a whim to suit any evil imaginable.

    They believe fervently in the purity of their world view.  Most of them are not open to even the slightest question or concern over their ethos.  Their blind faith is unshakeable, even in the face of extensive empirical evidence and superior logic.  Such people are the ultimate cannon fodder for the elites.

    Social justice cultists act on the assumption that history is on their side, and that they will one day be seen as heroes for their deeds.

    They not only seek to promote and spread their ideology — this would merely make them a new form of religion.  No, they are not just evangelists, they also want their own version of a caliphate; an all dominating cult that crushes any embers of dissent and destroys its philosophical opponents trapped within its ever expanding borders.

    A recent and starling example of this mentality can be found in the following video of a BBC show called “The Big Questions.”  The subject of the debate — “Does social media reveal men’s hatred for women?”  Milo Yiannopoulos faces off with a crowd of mouth breathing true-believers and barely gets a word in edgewise as they do what cultural Marxists do best:  use the mob to shout down their opponent and attack the person’s character rather than confront his arguments and evidence:

    Though this show is produced out of the U.K. and not the U.S., I am using it to shed light on the inevitable end game of all social justice cultists regardless of where they live — to dominate all discussion and erase conservative thought from society.  The attitudes displayed by the feminists and the rather pathetic members of the audience are truly frightening. Not only do they argue that Yiannoupoulos has no right to even be dignified  with time to respond, they are at bottom also claiming the right to assert force of law to ban ideas they disagree with and even to imprison the people that argue those ideas.

    Instead of simply ignoring or blocking the people who offend them like rational adults, or participating in a free exchange, they want the power of government to silence opposition. If their ideas were truly superior in merit then they would have no need to use force to silence or imprison their opponents.  They want to turn the whole of the web, the whole of the WORLD, into a federally enforced “safe space” for their ideology and their ideology alone.

    It is this kind of zealotry that leads to outright totalitarianism and collectivism. This is the kind of evil that is done in the name of the so-called “greater good.”

    The fact is, their feelings are irrelevant. They do not matter.  Most rational people don’t care if SJWs are offended, or afraid or disgusted and indignant. Their problems are not our problems.  Our right to free expression and freedom of association is far more important than their personal feelings or misgivings.  We do not owe them a safe space.  If they want a safe space, then they should hide in their hovels or crawl back to the rancid swamps from whence they slithered.

    A backlash is building against the social justice cult that will be unleashed sooner rather than later, and so far it is accelerating at the height of the election frenzy under the banner of Donald Trump.

    Social justice warriors seem to find themselves befuddled at the rise of Trump, but as I predicted in March, a Trump vs. Hillary face-off was inevitable.

    For conservatives, Hillary is the ultimate representation of political hell spawn.  She is a proven elitist puppet, with a criminal record that reads like a transcript from the Nuremberg trials.  She is also a part of an ongoing trend of dynasties in U.S. politics.  Americans have grown tired of the Bushes and the Clintons.  We have grown tired of the endless reign of neo-cons and neo-liberals.  We are looking something different, or what we hope is something different.  Trump at first glance at least looks like a candidate outside of the establishment norm.

    Beyond this increasing aversion to the status quo, though, is the growing American contempt for the social justice cult.  This will be a primary driver of the U.S. election.

    While many in the cult had thrown their support behind Bernie Sanders for a time, Bernie showed his true colors by bowing down to the Clinton machine.  This is typical of socialists, who regularly forgo their proclaimed principles in the name of “unity” and “victory” under a single collectivist umbrella.  Many in the social justice crowd have quickly jumped on Hillary’s bandwagon, as her campaign now rides solely on the disposition of her own sexual organs.

    That is to say, Clinton is now the new mascot for the SJW crowd, even though many of them don't really like her.

    I’m not so sure the “vote for me because I’m a woman” theme is going to go over quite as effectively as Obama’s “vote for me because I’m black” theme.  The Hillary campaign symbol, looking strangely like a warped version of the arrowed symbol for “Male” and Mars, is emblazoned on worshipful feminist posters and cartoons everywhere.  A nice touch was the cringe-worthy display of Clinton’s giant head on the DNC mega-screen bashing through photos of past male presidents as if “shattering” the proverbial glass ceiling.  Set aside the fact that over half of American voters are women, and that there is no glass ceiling preventing women from being voted into office by other women if being a woman rather than a decent candidate was all that mattered.

    The theater of the feminist absurd aside, this election is going to tumble about wildly on all sorts of carnival sideshows.

    The so called “controversy” over comments made by Trump against the parents of a Muslim soldier killed in U.S. service in Iraq is just the beginning of the circus.  To be fair to Trump, the sheer hypocrisy of Hillary Clinton, a warmonger of the highest degree and a participant by-proxy in the death of the soldier in question, using his parents as fuel for a campaign controversy goes so far into the realm of the disturbing that I might be shocked if I didn’t understand that the whole thing is a mind game.  These kinds of distractions are meant to fuel the flames and I predict they will become frequent and overwhelming by November.

    To reiterate, it is clear that the Clinton campaign is going the route of pandering to the SJWs.  This is the script, and I as I said after the Brexit referendum vote, I believe that the script ends with a Clinton failure and a Trump victory.  Pandering to SJWs rarely leads to success.  And, a faltering economy blamed on Trump would be far preferable to one blamed on Clinton.

    My regular readers know well that I personally do not have much faith in the Trump campaign; I’ve seen too many constitutional inconsistencies and too many meetings with elitist representatives so far to give him the benefit of the doubt.  If he turns out to be a true constitutionalist, then I will be pleasantly surprised and happy to admit I was wrong.

    That said, I do understand why the public is rallying around Trump.  They see him not as a candidate, but as a vehicle to push forward a fight against a social justice juggernaut that has gone unanswered for far too long.  They don’t much care about him as a man, which is why the character attacks by the social justice cult and the media have fallen flat again and again.  They only care that he might not be the status quo.  They are looking for something radical to counter the radicalism of cultural Marxists.

    I am not here to argue over which candidate is “better,” or preferable or the “lesser of evils.”  None of this matters.  I realize that I am not going to convince anyone to vote in anyway different than how they have already decided to vote.  In fact, I am certain that most people decided exactly how they were going to vote as soon as the candidates were publicly finalized.

    The zealotry will be evident on both sides.  Democrats will accuse me of being biased in favor of Trump because I outline in articles the endless parade of horrors surrounding Clinton's career.  Republicans will accuse me of "secretly working for the Democrats" because I refuse to throw full blind faith behind Trump.  That's just how elections work – follow my mascot or you are my enemy.

    I really couldn't care less.  I'm on the side of liberty and individualism and I'll fight on this side alone if I have to.

    I will say that I KNOW exactly what will happen under Hillary Clinton – despotism in the name of "equality", leading to outright civil war.  I only SUSPECT according to what I have seen so far that Trump is not a constitutional candidate.

    The danger is that in our search for the counterbalance to social justice despotism and Hillary Clinton's evident communist addictions, we conservatives will fall into the old historical paradigm of fascism in the name of defeating communism, helping the elites instead of dethroning them.  The danger is that we get so caught up in trying to destroy the social justice mob that we forget our principles.

    If a President Trump shows any indications of being anti-constitution, even in the name of our own “greater good,” conservatives MUST stand by our ideals and stand against him, or we become no better than the SJW psychopaths we seek to stop.  No man, no woman, no president is more important than the liberties and heritage of this nation and its citizenry.

    As far as social justice activists are concerned, if they really want to change this country for the better, then they should consider dropping out of their little cult and finding something productive to do.  Stop spending your parents’ money on garbage gender studies classes.  Become scientists and engineers.  Become doctors and inventors. Create a better planet through ingenuity rather than manic ideology.  Make yourselves useful or something.  You're not only wasting your own time wreaking havoc with your collectivism, you are also wasting our time, because now we have to spend it working to stop you and the elites that fund you.

    Become self sufficient instead of begging for handouts or feeding off your family and their savings accounts.  Add to the world instead of bleeding it dry.  Help people through personal action instead of trying to micro-manage their lives and their speech and their thoughts through force of government.

    Otherwise, all you are is more gasoline on a fire that will result in inevitable conflict; a conflict which you will lose.  A conflict which may only serve the interests of the very elites which you think you are fighting against.  Remember, whatever happens, it was the social justice cult that helped to create the conditions by which such a conflict became unavoidable.  Without the cultural Marxists, there would be no rationale for any division.  If they would simply leave us all alone to think and say what we feel, to choose our associations without interference or invasive conquest of “spaces” and to live in a functioning society based on merit rather than victimhood and artificial fear, there would be no fertile ground for an election circus of this magnitude.

    And finally, if EVERYONE relied less on political celebrities, if everyone stopped waiting for a knight on a white horse, or a feminist icon, or a crusade to fight, or a social justice mob to join and started determining their own futures; if everyone began looking far more carefully at the people behind the curtain, then perhaps we could finally see a change in humanity not seen in thousands of years.  Not a collectivist change, but an individualist change, which is the only kind of change everlasting or worth a damn.

  • Full BOE Preview, And A Look At What UK Corporate Bond QE Will Look Like

    After several prominent central bank disappointments over the past few weeks, culminating with last week’s BOJ fiasco, earlier this week the RBA finally did as it was expected by both the market and a majority of analysts, when it cut rates by 25 bps to a record 1.50%, even if the reaction was unexpected, sending the AUD sliding briefly then soaring as the accompanying statement suggesting far less dovishness would follow.

    Which brings us to tomorrow’s Bank of England decision, where as of this moment the OIS market shows that a 25bps rate cut is 100%  priced in. But a plain vanilla rate cut may be just the tip of the Iceberg: as the WSJ writes, piggybacking on an analysis by BofA’s Barnaby Martin, investor bets are rising that Mark Carney could “start snapping up” corporate bonds as part of the stimulus plan to be announced tomorrow. 

    As a reminder, the BoE previously bought corporate bonds between 2009 and 2012. As BofA writes, the purchase numbers were not headline-grabbing (£2.1bn) but the aim of the programme back them was a lot different to what we could envisage now. Using the ECB’s template to create a £ CSPP equivalent, the BoE would end up with an eligible universe of £128bn (44% of the Sterling credit market), and could possibly grow it to £211bn if they bought Euro-denominated bonds (as suggested in ‘09). With a universe this big, the BoE should be able to sustain around £2bn of corporate purchases a month.

    But before we look in depth into the possibiliy of a British CSPP, here is a detailed breakdown of what to expect, and what Wall Street believes will happen, courtesy of RanSquawk:

    * * *

    • Bank of England are widely expected to cut rates to 0.25% with a 25bps rate reduction fully priced in OIS markets.
    • The central bank is also touted to announce further stimulus measures including the potential restart of its QE program (APF currently stands at GBP 375BN) and the Funding for Lending Scheme.
    • 2017 GDP growth forecast is likely to see a significant downgrade amid early signs of a deterioration in the UK economy, while GBP depreciation is likely to support 2017 Inflation forecasts.

    BACKGROUND

    The Bank of England will reconvene for the second time since the UK’s decision to leave the EU, whereby they are widely expected to ease monetary policy. This view is supported by the fact that at the last meeting the MPC said that most officials saw the need to adjust policy in August. Furthermore, Governor Carney himself has already announced that the central bank will probably need to take action in the summer, which leaves Thursday as the remaining option.

    POST-BREXT DATA/COMMENTARY

    Heading into the meeting the BoE has had little (Brexit exposed) economic data to act on. Most notably the PMI figures for July, in which Mfg. and Composite readings contracted to 41-month and 87-month lows, respectively, while the key Services figure saw its largest decline in 7-yrs. Given that services accounts for 79% of the UK economy, a severe contraction in this sector has obvious consequences for GDP and jobs moving forward. Allied with this, tier-2 data points (which would not normally garner significant attention) have also showed sharp declines in business confidence and as such contributed to the heightened uncertainty regarding the UK economy, reinforcing the case that policy adjustments are needed.

    Against that backdrop, several MPC members have recently stated that they are willing to ease policy, with BoE’s Haldane stating that this meeting will likely see material easing while there has also been a shift in some of the more hawkish members. In particular BoE’s Weale, who in a sudden U-turn from his usual stance shifted his view in favour of easing.

    POSSIBLE MEASURES

    In terms of touted measures, OIS markets have fully priced in a 25bp rate cut while there is also a small chance priced in for a 50bps rate reduction. However, a cut in interest rates will likely weigh on GBP which would be somewhat of an undesirable effect at present, given that the currency is already hovering at more than 30-yr lows, while it would also lead to damaging import price inflation. Additionally, with Governor Carney previously stating that he does not believe that rates “too low” (or negative) could have positive outcomes, this would suggest that there is little room to manoeuvre.

    At the last meeting, the central bank’s minutes stated that the MPC had an initial exchange of views on the various possible packages of measures. Consequently, this alludes to the fact that the BoE is looking for further measures other than cutting rates. In turn, this has raised the possibility that the bank could re-launch the Funding for Lending Scheme which would ensure ample liquidity by allowing commercial banks to borrow funds cheaply in order for this to be passed on in the form of cheap loans to firms. Analysts at Nordea Bank note that the central bank could enhance the FLS either by broadening its scope to include household lending or by improving the terms of liquidity provision.

    Moreover, some participants expect the BoE to implement a new QE programme (Asset Purchase Facility which currently stands at GBP 375bn) with analysts noting that Gilts are likely to account for the majority of the new asset purchases with also the inclusion of corporate bonds. Previous expansions to the QE programme have seen holdings rise in GBP 50-75b1n increments.

    INFLATION AND GROWTH FORECASTS

    The MPC will also arm themselves with the latest set of inflation forecasts, which they have stated that will act as an important guide as to the magnitude and calibration of stimulus measures. Additionally, the July meeting minutes stated that the depreciation in GBP (Trade Weight fallen around 12%) has put upward pressure on inflation with BoE’s Haldane commenting that inflation could overshoot its 2% target, in turn inflation forecasts may be upgraded with some suggesting 2017 inflation may be over 2% (Prey. 1.5%). On the other hand, with economic indicators showing early signs that the UK economy is weakening significantly, GDP outlook is likely to see sharp downward revisions. Prior to the Brexit vote, the BoE forecast GDP growth for 2017 at 2.3%, with the consensus amongst analysts now at 0.6% (Prey. 2.1%) while some are expecting growth to be slashed to 0.0%.

    MARKET REACTION

    In terms of market reaction, given that OIS markets have fully priced in 25bps rate cut, this alone may be met with disappointment and as such see some initial upside in GBP. A similar reaction may be seen in GBP if the vote split is deemed too tight (5-4) with also a flattening of the UK curve. While a unanimous 9-0 in favour of a cut might suggest that a follow up move is on the table leading to potential pressure in GBP. Additionally, if a plethora of measures are utilised by the central bank involving a potential restart to its QE programme allied with a rate reduction and credit easing, may lead to upside in equities. While Gilt yields could also post fresh record lows as many analysts note that a restart to QE will likely include the purchase of Gilts.

    SELECTED ANALYST EXPECTATIONS

    • BofAML expects the BoE to cut interest rates by 25bps, alongside a GBP 50bIn expansion in the APF and credit easing package.
    • Goldman Sachs forecasts an increase in asset purchases of over GBP 100bIn over the next 6 months, with a mix of sovereign and corporate bonds.
    • HSBC states that the central bank will cut rates by 25bps, coupled with an announcement of measures to support credit to the real economy.
    • Nordea Bank sees a 25bps cut to 0.25% with a GBP 100bIn increase in the APF over the next few months.

    * * *

    Which brings us back to the all too real possibility that the BOE will, in a few hours, unveil its own CSPP program, copying what the ECB did back in March.

    Here is BofA’s Barnaby Martin, laying out “the case for a £ CSPP”

    Despite the benign backdrop for yields and spreads, we do feel that there is a strong case to be made for the Bank of England pursuing another corporate QE programme for the Sterling credit market. To be clear, market dysfunction in not the problem. Yes, uncertainty is high after the Referendum outcome, but the Sterling credit market is clearly not shut given the three recent new issues over the last week (BAT, Brown-Forman and Santander UK).

    But in a post-Brexit world, if the UK is to flourish on its own then it must have a vibrant and deep credit market underlying it, especially if the ability of the UK banking sector to lend becomes challenged amid a backdrop of lower interest rates and rising delinquencies. Building a “super competitive-economy” with low corporation tax and investment from China, for instance, requires a £ credit market where the ability to issue bonds and raise capital is not in doubt.

    But the reality is that the Sterling credit market – in its current form – is far from this. In our view, it looks to have been suffering a “slow death” of sorts over the last few years. Chart 7 shows that issuance of £ corporate bonds has been dwindling since 2013. This year, there has been only £4bn of non-financial IG issuance in the Sterling credit market, and by year-end it is unlikely to get anywhere near the lofty levels of issuance seen in 2012 (£33bn).

    But we don’t think the dwindling in £ issuance reflects the risk-averseness of UK companies. On the contrary. We believe the explanation is simply that the ECB’s extraordinary monetary policies of the last few years have pulled UK (and global) funding capital into the Euro credit market. Chart 8 makes this point. In 2009, 53% of UK corporates’ liabilities were denominated in Sterling. Today, the figure is just 29%.

    The allure of negative yields in Euros and the market-pacifying impact of the ECB’s CSPP have driven UK companies to fund more and more in Euros (and prior to this the $ credit market, helped by the attractive basis swap).

    But the selling point for greater investment in a post-Brexit UK economy cannot be the ability of UK companies to issue in Euros! (especially with rising currency volatility). Thus, we think the BoE would be playing its part in supporting the UK economy if it helped revitalize the £ credit market with a new corporate bond purchase programme.

    In effect, we believe there is a need to “balkanize” credit markets again, especially the Sterling corporate bond market. We think a “£ CSPP” would act as a nice counterbalance to the ECB’s CSPP, and would return European credit markets to a more level playing field. And importantly, we think there would be the possibility of Carney and Draghi “coordinating” their respective corporate bond buying.

    What could a £ CSPP look like today?

    To bring the £ credit market “back to life”, we think a BOE corporate QE programme would need to be much bigger than 2009’s version. Only regular and continuous buying would ensure that depth returns to the £ primary market. Just as Mario Draghi is showing with his corporate bond buying programme, tightening spreads helps achieve this (as well as purchasing corporate bonds in the primary market,  which the BoE has never done before).

    In Chart 12, we draw from the methodology of the ECB’s Corporate Sector Purchase Programme to create the same idea for the Sterling credit market (we call it the £CSPP). We calculate the volume of eligible corporate bonds that would be available for the Bank of England.

    • We start with our UR00 Sterling corporate bond index (which includes financials and non-financials). We then exclude bank debt, but keep insurance (in line with ECB CSPP methodology),
    • We then exclude all subordinated debt (again in line with ECB CSPP methodology),
    • We then limit the universe to “UK relevant companies” which means either a) UK domiciled companies or b) non-UK domiciled companies with significant exposure to the UK (which we define as companies having at least £3bn of Sterling corporate bonds outstanding). This results in £128bn of eligible corporate bonds for the BoE.
    • As an additional filter, we note that in 2009 the BoE stated that they were prepared to buy corporate bonds denominated in currencies other than £. In the end they kept purchases just to £. But here we add the Euro-denominated bonds issued by UK corporates to which the rules above apply. In this case, we get £211bn of eligible corporate bonds for the BoE.

    How big are these numbers?

    • £128bn is 44% of the Sterling IG corporate bond market.
    • Interestingly, we think the ECB has an eligible universe of €710bn for their CSPP while the Euro IG corporate bond market is €1.72tr in size (41%).

    The ECB is currently buying between €9-10bn of corporate bonds per month. If the BoE was to create their own £CSPP then we think around £2bn of purchases per month would be a sensible starting point.

  • Dear Job Market, Take This Indicator & Shove It!

    Authored by Danielle DiMartino Booth,

    Some songs are just destined to be belted out while speeding down an open highway with the all the windows down, your hair whipping in the wind and the dust flying. Donald Eugene Lytle, aka, Johnny Paycheck, delivered one in spades with his catchy, purposely grammatically incorrect rendition of David Allan Coe’s working man’s anthem. The song, Take this Job and Shove It, which has earned cult status in the Honky Tonk hall of fame proved to be the only number one hit of Paycheck’s career.

    Ironically, Paycheck didn’t change his name to fit the song; that happened 13 years earlier when he borrowed it from a top-ranked Chicago boxer whose claim to fame was his 1940 fight against Joe Lewis for the heavyweight title.

    Very few of us have escaped those lyrics invading our mind from time to time. You might have been slopping sauce on one more pizza, bagging yet another bag of leaves on someone else’s lawn or plugging away at a spreadsheet for which you’d never get credit – all for meagre pay. Whatever the thankless task, you sure would have relished unleashing those words to your boss’ face. Just take this job and shove it!

    The 1977 hit was so popular it went on to inspire a not so popular 1981 movie. Alas the movie of the of the same name, billed as “The comedy for everyone who’s had it up to here…” fell flat at the box office. It was the timing that was all wrong. A movie with a “job shoving” theme was unseemly considering the economy was veering headlong into a double-dip recession. The worker bees of the economy were understandably unamused by the idea of brazenly quitting their jobs.

    Today, in 2016, it’s looking more and more like Janet Yellen is less than amused with her own greatest hit, The Labor Market Conditions Index. She conceived this alternative measure of the job market and debuted it to much fanfare in an August 22, 2014 speech at the Shangri La of economic confabs in Jackson Hole, Wyoming.

    With that, a whole new cottage industry was born. Two gauges measuring the state of the job market, nonfarm payrolls and the official unemployment rate, ballooned into 19. Joy for the economist community in the form of 17 new raison d’etres!

    How have things worked out since then?

    Appreciating the historic context is an essential first step to answering that question. At its December 2012 meeting, with unemployment at 7.8 percent, the Federal Open Market Committee announced its first ever unemployment rate target of 6.5 percent. Fed economists projected that this bogey would not be reached until the end of 2015. At that point, they anticipated the rate would be inside a 6.0-6.6-percent range.

    One voter in the FOMC room begged to differ. Richmond President Jeffrey Lacker dissented, recognizing the folly of the quantitative commitment. The Fed was effectively boxing itself in as financial markets would price in a rate hike the minute the threshold was visible on the horizon.

    As if wearing blinders, then-Chairman Ben Bernanke predicted that the target would act, “as an automatic stabilizer,” with the added qualifier that the new policy, “by no means puts monetary policy on autopilot.”

    Of course, that’s just not the way financial markets work. They are forward-looking beasts precisely because they set prices based on the inputs provided.

    Hence the Fed’s panicked emergency videoconference meeting on March 4, 2014 on the heels of that year’s April jobs report, which revealed a steady unemployment rate of 6.7 percent. The markets’ conclusion: A June rate hike was imminent, a full year and a half before Bernanke had any intention of tightening policy.

    Though still the subject of furious debate, the missing link from Fed economists’ models was the permanence of the decline in the labor force participation rate fed by the 2009 introduction of 99 weeks of unemployment insurance. Needless to say, politicians clamoring for easy votes extended these extraordinary benefits time and again.

    By the end of 2013, 99 weeks had become all too ordinary. Millions of workers had simply dropped out, disincentivized by design. Because the unemployment rate is calculated against the number of people in the labor force, it declined much more rapidly than historic precedent suggested it would.

    And so, with mis-measured inflation still too low for comfort (another full blown story for another day), policymakers backtracked on their commitment. The March 2014 FOMC meeting minutes attempted to explain: “The Committee currently anticipates that, even after employment and inflation are near mandate-consistent levels, economic conditions may, for some time, warrant keeping the target federal funds rate below levels the Committee views as normal in the longer run.”

    The schizophrenic behavior did nothing to bolster the Fed’s credibility. To counter perceptions, the Fed, under the new leadership of labor economist Yellen, came up with yet another model. As she illustrated in great detail at that year’s Jackson Hole gathering, the LMCI would better measure the slack in the labor market without unduly “rewarding” the decline in the labor force participation rate which cast the low unemployment in too positive a light.

    “Assessments of the degree of remaining slack in the labor market need to become more nuanced because of considerable uncertainty,” Yellen said, reminding the audience that in 2012 the Fed had caveated that, “factors determining maximum employment ‘may change over time and may not be directly measurable.’”

    More variables, more math, more clarity? Not hardly. OK – that was a pretty extensive history lesson. But sometimes the setup is key to understanding the outcome.

    Once again, the markets are heavily anticipating Yellen’s 2016 Jackson Hole speech. Will she posit that the LMCI was flawed at inception to now justify a rate hike? Her baby, so to speak, has been wailing for six straight months, the longest slide since the end of the 2009 recession.

    At this year’s June 15th press conference, Yellen once again highlighted the importance of the context of the current backdrop, which has apparently rendered the LMCI, “a kind of experimental research product.” Is it any wonder the media characterized her remarks as “bipolar”?

    The question is, what went wrong, if anything?

    The nature of the LMCI’s components is a good starting point. As a recent Goldman Sachs report detailed, “The LMCI inputs are detrended, and the estimated trends likely ‘soak up’ some of the growth in labor market activity (such that only growth in excess of the trend contributes positively).” Yours truly added the emphasis as this ‘detrending’ is key to explaining away the alarm emanating from the LMCI.

    The Goldman report goes on to say that labor market indicators tend to level off in the middle of an economic cycle even as trends continue on their established pathways, driven by momentum: “The LMCI in effect reflects a combination of the rate of change in labor market conditions – the first difference – as well as recent acceleration or deceleration – the second difference.”

    Did someone mention ‘Nuanced” with a capital ‘N’?

    And then there are the actual inputs. The index’s 19 indicators endeavor to capture movements not just in job creation, but underemployment, wages, worker flows and both consumer and business surveys. A few examples help to illustrate.

    The National Federation of Independent Businesses queries small businesses on their hiring plans and whether it is hard to fill open positions. So fairly straight forward, forward-looking indicators.

    Then you have temporary employment, which once provided a reliable signal on the direction of nonfarm payrolls to come. But temps have lost some of their predictive powers in a world increasingly dominated by firms cutting costs where they can, even if it entails classifying near-permanent employees as temporary to reduce benefit expenses.

    The same goes for new help-wanted ads, which have been trending down for a year now. Not to worry, says the Fed itself, whose economists recently debunked fresh postings as unreliable given Craigslist’s near doubling of fees since the end of 2012. The rising costs associated with advertising thus distills the message in the mere four percent rise in postings through yearend 2015 in the help wanted data vs. the 48 percent rise in the job openings data series. We’re supposed to file that one in the “If you say so” file.

    Finally, you have the distinct ‘job leavers unemployed for less than five weeks,’ which is buried in the household survey, and the now-beloved ‘quit rate’ from the monthly job openings data. Workers having the hutzpah to tell their employers where they can put their cruddy job is measured by the quit rate. When the rate rises, it tends to coincide with a high degree of confidence that you can storm out one door and waltz into another in a short timeframe. So a rise in unemployed for less than five weeks is thus a good thing reflecting workers’ certainty about the job market’s prospects.

    While the unemployed-for-less-than-five-weeks metric has held up of late, the quits rate has fallen. So call this a wash for the moment. In addition, net hiring plans have come off their highs, concomitant with the decline in the number of job openings. These data are released with varying degrees of lag, which can be frustrating for the impatient type who’d prefer to not be sideswiped by a data miss.

    That brings us to perhaps the best indicator of what’s to come, which cannot be explained away, though it too comes from help wanted ads. You may recognize the name Jonathan Basile, AIG’s Head of Business Cycle Research. As his pragmatic title suggests, he is duty bound to have a crystal clear crystal ball.

    Let’s just say we should all adopt one of his favorite indicators on the labor front, the reposting of job positions. Just about every anecdote we’ve heard in recent years has touched on the dearth of skilled labor. As that slack was absorbed, it became increasingly difficult to source good talent. What to do if you can’t fill a position? Well, you repost it until it does get filled. That way you succeed in achieving your original goal of growing that top line by satisfying the incremental demand that triggered the need for a new hire in the first place.

    You see where this is going. If you no longer need to repost that position while the hiring rate is falling…well you get the picture, a picture that’s come into increasing focus since repostings peaked last November.

    “When companies stop reposting help wanted ads, it means they’ve given up on adding additional headcount,” Basile said. “It’s a more cautious signal about the outlook. It means their balance sheets can’t handle the additional labor costs. This is what happens when revenue and earnings headwinds bleed into the labor-intensive parts of the economy, like construction and services.”

     

    Revenues? Earnings? Those certainly don’t sound like economic data points. They sound so much more real.

     

    “Labor sits at the intersection of revenues and earnings because it is the biggest cost on corporate balance sheets,” Basile continued. “Many sell-side nonfarm payroll (NFP) models show labor begetting labor – labor data used as inputs to generate NFP as the output. But in business, balance sheets beget labor. You increase or decrease your headcount based on what your revenues and earnings do, the source that pays for labor. How is this left out of the equation?”

    Great question. The conclusion: the earnings recession we’ve been told to ignore is, after all, relevant. Get it, got it, good.

    You will recall that the bright spot in the awful GDP report was consumption. Hate to go out on any limbs here, but it’s pretty hard to consume if you don’t have a job.

    “All it takes is another shock to tip this one-legged pirate of an economy over,” Basile worries. “That’s why I’m on 100% watch.”

    We should probably all be watching Yellen’s math as she shoves the jobs data around until it’s contorted enough to fit her agenda’s perfect picture frame. Not so perfect are the prospects for those ungainfully employed who are apparently a figment of our collective imagination. They can only dream of a world where jobs are plentiful enough to not-so-respectfully request their employer take their job and shove it.

  • Hyperinflation Defined, Explained, and Proven

     

     

     

     

     


    Hyperinflation Defined, Explained, and Proven


    Written by Jeff Nielson (CLICK FOR ORIGINAL)
     

     


     

    Regular readers already know that hyperinflation is not merely an economic “threat” looming in our near future, it is a certainty. Indeed, it has already occurred. Sadly, the term “hyperinflation” is still widely misused, and thus widely misunderstood. Definition of terms is required.


    The reason why the term “hyperinflation” is widely misused/misunderstood is a very simple one. It is because the term “inflation” is widely misused/misunderstood. If one does not have a clear grasp of the concept of inflation, obviously it is impossible to have an adequate comprehension of hyperinflation.


    Inflation is an increase in the supply of money. That is the economic definition of the term. It is the only correct definition of the term. It is a derivative of the verb “inflate”: to increase (i.e. inflate) the supply of money.


    The term “inflation” is widely, erroneously, and (in the case of central bankers) deliberately misused as meaning an increase in the price of goods. But this price inflation is merely the direct and inevitable consequence of the initial act of inflation: the increase in the supply of money.


    Thanks to decades of brainwashing (and the fraudulent “inflation” statistics which came along with that), this simple but important distinction is almost beyond the comprehension of most readers. Yet it is a concept which is already well-understood in the realm of our markets. It is the concept of dilution.


    When a company prints up a new share, it has diluted its share structure, and the value of all shares in circulation falls commensurately/proportionately. This is nothing more than elementary arithmetic. If a company which originally had a share base of 1,000,000 increases the number of shares to 2,000,000, the value of all those shares decreases by 50%. If we priced the world in terms of the value of our shares (rather than the bankers’ paper), the dilution of the share structure would automatically result in proportionate price inflation.


    This concept applies directly and identically to our monetary system. If a central bank prints up a new unit of its (un-backed) fiat currency, it dilutes its monetary base, and the value of all units of currency already in existence falls. It is the fall in the value of the currency through diluting that currency which directly translates into higher prices: price inflation. Yet incredibly (thanks to our brainwashing) this elementary concept is not accepted. A simple allegory is necessary.


    Let us all journey to Gilligan’s Island: a closed system, and a small population – ideal for our purposes. But let us change one detail. For the sake of mathematical convenience, we will assume that there are ten “castaways” on the island rather than only seven.


    Even among the residents of the island, some commerce takes place. Mr. Howell, the island’s resident banker, suggests that they create their own currency, on the hand-operated printing press he happened to have in his luggage.


    He dubs this currency the Coconut Dollar, and each resident is issued ten Coconut Dollars. No new currency is created, i.e. the monetary base is perfectly flat. Under these circumstances, there would never and could never be any (price) “inflation” on Gilligan’s Island – ever.


    Initial prices (in Coconut Dollars) would be determined by the relative preferences of the residents, and unless those preferences changed, prices would remain absolutely stable, because the amount of currency in circulation was not increasing – i.e. there was no inflation.


    Then circumstances change. Mr. Howell, now the island’s central banker, tells the island’s residents that they should not have to endure such a meager standard of living. He tells the other residents he can raise their standard of living by printing more Coconut Dollars, in order to create “a wealth effect”.


    He issues all the residents 40 more Coconut Dollars. The island’s residents now all have 50 Coconut Dollars. They all feel much “wealthier”. But what happens on the island?


    The residents’ preferences for goods have not changed. Mary Ann bakes one of her highly-prized, coconut-cream pies, slices it into ten pieces, and (as she always does) offers slices for sale. After months/years of baking and selling pies, the standard price for each slice has always been one Coconut Dollar.


    The Skipper, who has a much larger appetite than the other residents, and now five times as many Coconut Dollars in his pocket decides he wants to increase his own share of slices. He offers Mary Ann two Coconut Dollars for a slice. But all the other residents also have five times as many Coconut Dollars in their pockets, and they match the Skipper’s price, in order to maintain their own level of consumption. The “price” for a slice of coconut-cream pie is now two Coconut Dollars.


    The Skipper, with still a large surplus of Coconut Dollars in his pocket tries again to increase his share, by raising his ‘bid’ to three Coconut Dollars. The other residents again match that offer, and the price-per-slice increases to three Coconut Dollars. This process continues until a new price equilibrium is established for coconut-cream pies, as well as all the other goods bought/sold by the residents.


    With the supply of goods on the island being fixed, the island’s residents would soon allocate all of their additional Coconut Dollars, and new (much higher) “standard” prices would emerge. Naturally, no increase in their standard of living ever takes place. The “wealth effect” is purely an illusion. At that point; there would never be any additional price inflation, unless/until Mr. Howell printed even more Coconut Dollars – and “inflated” the monetary base, again.


    Inflation does not appear out of thin air, conjured by magical fairies, as the lying central bankers would have us believe. It is
    always and exclusively a product of their own (excessive) money-printing. That is “inflation”, in the real world. Hyperinflation, by obvious extrapolation, is the extremely excessive money-printing of the central bankers.


    Skeptics and (central bank) Apologists will remain unconvinced. They will point out that “the real world” is a place which is much more complex than Gilligan’s Island, and thus the allegory carries no weight.


    Yes and no. Yes, the real world is much more complex than Gilligan’s Island. No, the allegory loses none of its validity as a result, because the underlying principles can be (easily) incorporated into the real world.


    Our real world is a world with a steadily increasing population, and a steadily increasing supply of goods to meet the needs of that growing population. But it is still a fixed system. It is not Gilligan’s Island, it is the Island of Earth.


    This is how the dynamics of our previous allegory translate onto the Island of Earth. While our population is growing at an alarming rate (from a long term perspective), the annual rate of growth is a low, single-digit number, generally in the 1 – 2% range. The supply of goods increases at a roughly parallel rate – to meet the demand of this (slightly) growing population.


    In economic terms; this is known as “the natural rate of growth”. Equally, it can be described as the sustainable rate of growth. In a finite system, with fixed resources, growth beyond that “natural” rate is both artificial and unsustainable.


    In our monetary system; if the central bankers restrain their level of money-printing to this natural rate of growth, i.e. if central bank inflation matches this rate of growth, then there would, could, and should be no price inflation in the world. The rate of growth in the supply of currency matches the rate of growth in population/goods, and thus price equilibrium can be maintained.


    It is very interesting to note that over the long term, the increase in the global supply of gold has always roughly paralleled the natural rate of growth. This is but one of many reasons why a gold standard, i.e. a gold-backed monetary system, is the optimal basis for our monetary system.


    Robbed of our gold standard in 1971, by Paul Volcker and his lackey Richard Nixon, the central bankers have been free to print their fraudulent paper currencies at will. The “Golden Handcuffs” so despised by John Maynard Keynes have been removed.


    Cautiously, at first, and then with steadily more-reckless abandon, the central bankers have accelerated their money-printing. This has culminated with what readers have already seen on many occasions: the Bernanke Helicopter Drop.

     


     

    As has been explained before; this is the literal, mathematical representation of hyperinflation: the exponential, out-of-control expansion of a nation’s money supply. As readers now know, the monetary base of any legitimate economy (and monetary system) is supposed to be a horizontal line, as we see with the U.S. monetary base (and other currencies) in all the decades during which we operated under some form of gold standard.


    As soon as the last remnant of our gold standard had been eliminated, the horizontal line began to acquire an upward slope. This in itself was visual/mathematical proof that the U.S. dollar, now just an un-backed fiat currency, was being diluted to worthlessness – at a linear (i.e. gradual) rate.


    Then came the Crash of ’08. What was an upward sloping line became a vertical line: conjuring new currency into existence at literally a near-infinite rate. When the horizontal line of a nation’s monetary base is transformed into a vertical line, this is absolute, conclusive proof that hyperinflation has already taken place: the extreme and irreversible dilution of a currency to worthlessness.


    Again, the Skeptics and Apologists have their obvious retort. If the U.S. dollar has already and “irreversibly” been diluted to worthlessness, why has its exchange rate not fallen to zero/near-zero? The glib and succinct reply to that question comes in two words: currency manipulation.


    The Big Bank crime syndicate has been criminally convicted of manipulating all of the world’s currencies, going back to at least – you guessed it – 2008. However, this is only a small portion of the complete answer to that question. A more comprehensive reply will be the starting point of the next installment of this series.

     

     

    Please email with any questions about this article or precious metals HERE

     

     

     

     

     

     

    Hyperinflation Defined, Explained, and Proven


    Written by Jeff Nielson (CLICK FOR ORIGINAL)
     


  • Why We Need a Much Better Plan Than Diversification to Survive the Next Couple of Years

    The first time I’ve made the above claim was well over a decade ago, and I’ve stated it many times since, and this time probably won’t be the last time I discuss this topic. However, this year is an especially easy year to make this argument. If commercial fund managers are so insistent that diversification strategies work, then why have the bulk of them completely ignored the best performing asset class of 2016? What kind of diversification is that? (I will refute some of the better-known arguments in response to this question later in this article, so stay tuned.)

     

    Consider that despite the stellar performance of gold mining stocks this year that have been, by far, the strongest performing asset class of 2016 (along with silver mining stocks), and that even with the massive growth in market cap of PM stocks during H1 2016, the total market cap of all the mining stocks that comprise the HUI Gold Bugs index, as of 2 August 2016, is still barely larger than 1/3 the market cap of Facebook and Amazon. In fact, we could own every single company in the entire HUI gold bug index, and their total market cap would incredibly be less than 1/4 the market cap of one company, Apple. Should Apple’s market value really be in excess of 4-times the market value assigned to of all the gold reserves and resources held by all the companies that comprise the entire HUI gold bugs index? Should Facebook, a glorified advertising company masquerading as a social networking organization that produces no tangible product, really possess a market value nearly 3 times all the gold mining companies that comprise the HUI Gold Bugs Index? The market will tell us that the answer to both these questions is yes. In my opinion, however, the answer to both of these questions is a resounding no, and I believe that within the next couple of years, the market will violently correct these misconceptions. So even with the great run higher in the prices of gold (and silver) mining share prices, the market is still underpricing these shares considerably.

     

    In my opinion, there is no better inventory for a company to own, given the grave fragility of the global banking and finance system, than the only real, sound money in the entire world, proven and probable reserves of physical gold and physical silver. (Sorry, BTC enthusiasts, the answer is not bitcoin, even though I fully support open currency competition, including all cryptocurrencies. However, the recent 30% dump in the price of BTC in just 2 days, after Hong Kong BTC exchange Bitfinex was hacked and nearly 120,000 BTCs were stolen, deftly illustrates that there is no substitute for physical gold and physical silver. While BTC will rebound in price from this event as it has in the past from similar events, and cryptocurrencies provide a good mechanism to move currencies around the world outside of the authority of governmental capital controls and tracking, they still leave a lot to desire in terms of fitting the “sound money” definition. Just perform a Google search of the formerly most hated female at JP Morgan, “Blythe Masters” and “cryptocurrencies” to understand how bankers are trying to transform the use of digital currencies into just another tool of control.) Yet, despite the reality of PM Mining Stocks being the best performing asset class by far in the stock world this year, nearly every commercial bank and commercial brokerage fund manager completely avoids the asset class of Precious Metal mining stocks like it is kryptonite, and in fact, most of the time, refuses to even acknowledges the existence of this unique asset class, despite a supposed commitment to diversification.

     

    As those of you that have been following my writings since 2006 know, including the more than 600 postings on my blog, I used to work at a Wall Street firm more than 10 years ago, before I quit in disgust after witnessing systemically fraudulent practices. However, it may surprise you to discover that I considered portfolio diversification strategies to be one of these systemically fraudulent practices. Before any of you doth protest too much about this conclusion, let me explain the rationale for my inclusion of diversification strategy among the other much better known systemically fraudulent practices regularly engaged in by big commercial brokerage firms and banks.

     

    Most people never ask their financial advisers about their educational backgrounds, and just assume that their adviser retains a certain level of investment expertise. I guarantee you 100% that this assumption is incorrect. In fact, one of the most surprising aspects I learned about financial advisers while working for a Wall Street firm back in the day was the enormously diversified pool of educational and professional backgrounds from which managers plucked their team of financial advisers. Some of my peers came from liberal arts background, teaching backgrounds, government/political policy backgrounds, sports backgrounds and science backgrounds just to name a few. And what was my background? I majored in neurobiology as an undergraduate. Sure, I later obtained an MBA with a concentration in finance, but I also guarantee you that this advanced degree taught me next to nothing about intelligent investment strategies. Instead, I learned a bunch of theories that don’t even apply in the real world of dark pools and computer HFT algorithm controlled markets. In fact, back then, my manager that hired me seemed more interested in the psychological profile I completed as part of the application process versus my possession of any real investment advisory qualifications.

     

    At this point, most people will inquire about a firm’s training program, believing that this program provides the necessary skills for financial advisers to formulate intelligent strategies under all market conditions and not just raging, bloated, Central Banker induced price distortions higher. Again, this assumption would be wrong. Our training program, by my estimation, was 90% focused on closing sales techniques to capture AUM (Assets Under Management) and block and bridge techniques to overcome client objections during the closing process versus the development of any real strategic investing acumen. Of course, many among us may be reading this, thinking “tell me something I don’t already know”, and if so, this article is not intended for you. However, every single year, I still casually meet loads of people that tell me the most important part of their wealth building plan is diversification. This article is intended for this subset of people.

     

    But I digress. So how did so many people with little background, if any, in investing and/or finance, and some with no background at all, become the most successful financial advisers at the firm (as measured by AUM fees generated), you may wonder? That is an excellent question that took me a little while to discover the answer to as well. During my years spent in the commercial investment world, I came to the conclusion that diversification strategy was by far, the most important key to not only the success of firms in capturing hundreds of millions in AUM, but also the key to preventing assets from leaving during down years as well. If every commercial firm utilized the same diversification strategies, then in up years, every firm’s financial advisers more or less returned the same yields within a tight range to their clients, and in down years, every firm’s financial advisers more or less returned the same losses within a tight range to their clients. If every other firm lost roughly the same percentage of money for their clients in a down year, why bother jumping ship to a competing firm if you were a client, right? Thus the industry-wide adoption of portfolio diversification strategy was not executed to benefit clients, as is sold to naive clients, but done to benefit the firms within the industry in maintaining AUM fees.

     

    You see, it really didn’t matter at all if a financial adviser knew what they were doing, because selling diversification strategies to clients made it sound like they knew what they were doing, which was an infinitely better proposition for commercial investment firms than employing financial consultants that actually knew what they were doing. Yes, the analogies to convince clients of diversification strategies were clever, like comparing the necessity of a diversified stock portfolio to the necessity of a diversified, well-balanced diet that consisted of some protein, some fats, and some carbohydrates. The only problem with this analogy, no matter how clever it was, is that it has always been patently untrue.

     

    Consider the global stock market crashes that afflicted the world in 2008. No matter how well someone’s US stock portfolio was diversified that year, if they remained invested in any diversified portfolio that mirrored US stock market indexes like the S&P500 or the Dow Jones Industrial Average, as is the overwhelming case with portfolio asset allocation among fund managers, they lost 40% or more that year in their diversified portfolio. In 2008, we maintained a very concentrated SmartKnowledgeU Crisis Investment Opportunities portfolio allocated to just a couple of asset classes, and we ended up the year with not a lesser 20% loss against the 40%+ losses of a diversified US S&P500, but we ended up with slightly positive yield for the year. And if diversification is such a wealth protective strategy, can you guess which commodity firms declared the largest impairments to their balance sheets by far in 2015? The most diversified ones: Glencore, Vale, Freeport and Anglo-American. These four massively diversified mining giants declared cumulative impairments in 2015 that nearly totaled $36 billion. Of course, one of the reasons their declared impairments were so massive was simply due to the giant size of these corporations, but the fact of the matter is that diversification of their business segments into many different commodities didn’t help these companies from suffering massive losses in 2015 and diversification didn’t prevent US stock portfolios from crashing in 2008.

     


    So why exactly is diversification such a great strategy if it only works when a bubble is building but fails miserably to preserve wealth when a bubble implodes or a significant downturn occurs? The reason commercial investment firms and commercial banks all over the world, no matter if they are located in Cologne, Madrid, Reykjavik, Buenos Aires, New York, London, Wellington, Melbourne, Toronto, Vancouver, Montreal, Shanghai, Kunming, Hong Kong, Singapore, or Nairobi try to convince all clients to embrace diversification strategy as an essential part of their wealth building plan is not because it actually works, but because it covers up the weaknesses and flaws of an unqualified financial consultant. Diversification strategies appeared to have “worked” during the golden years of the 1980s and 1990s, simply because US stock markets were returning 17% to 18% every year on average during those two decades and Stevie Wonder could have pointed to a bunch of stocks from a newspaper listing the components of the US S&P500 during that period and likely would have fared very well. Thus, the “success” of diversification strategies was confused with luck during these times and such a strategy even provided incompetent financial consultants with a cover of credibility as it empowered them with an undeserved veneer of competency. However, the ability to sell the appeal of diversification, as I explained above, completely changes when yield becomes much more difficult to achieve than just throwing darts at a board, and one really has to understand market risks to formulate strategies that can produce significant yield during difficult times. At this point, reliance on a diversified bubble of assets to further significantly inflate to produce yield pulls the curtain back on the diversification scam.

     

    As Credit Suisse’s Andrew Garthwaite discovered, during these times, the weakness and low utility of diversification is really exposed. If a strategy only works when everything is working but doesn’t work in years when times are tough, then I would argue such a strategy is a bad strategy. Just last month, it was reported that Credit Suisse strategist Andrew Garthwaite lamented dismal yields for the past couple years in a client report, writing that “his team has come across almost no one who seems to have outperformed or made decent returns this year” and “we have never had so many client meetings starting with statements such as ‘we are totally lost’.” The reason that Garthwaite’s team cannot find anyone that has made decent returns this year and are totally lost is because his team is likely diversified in the types of asset classes that only work when stock markets are not price-distorted bubbles. Garthwaite’s team’s failure to perform this year likely is due to their refusal to deviate from past strategies and their likely failure to concentrate on only asset classes that are highly undervalued, such as PM mining stocks.

     

    Garthwaite’s commentary takes me back to a conversation I had with a top producer in my office when I worked for a Wall Street firm back in the day. Back then, when I asked this top producer how to become successful, he answered (and I’m paraphrasing here to the best of my memory) that I should not waste any more than 10 to 15 minutes making asset allocation decisions once I closed on a large account. I remember him being very explicit that the pathway to success was to focus on closing 1M+ AUM clients and to not “waste time” on asset allocation decisions, instead taking no more than 10 to 15 minutes to assign this responsibility by making four phone calls to four pre-picked portfolio managers, a small-cap, a mid-cap, a large-cap and an international stock manager, each of whom should receive 25% of the account’s assets. From there, my job as a financial adviser was done, and my role, if I wanted to be successful, was to go out and capture the next $1M or $5M to build my cumulative AUM figure. And with building my AUM total, this was the way to keep the firm happy and be rapidly promoted. In fact, I often heard stories of a new “star” financial adviser arriving at our firm after blowing up their clients’ portfolios at another competing firm. When I would ask why such a person would be given a bonus of 1M+ to come to our firm if they lost considerable amounts of money for all their clients at a previous firm, the answer I heard time and time again was because such a person was awesome at building AUM. After hearing this advice from a top producer and hearing these stories, there was no longer any question in my mind that the diversification strategy was a systemic scam of the financial industry.

     

    At SmartKnowledgeU, I spend hundreds of hours every year determining my asset allocation models for my Crisis Investment Opportunity newsletter and my Platinum Member portfolio. Furthermore, I spend a minimum of 400+ hours a year to produce the bi-annual reports that I send to every Platinum Member that includes analysis and purchase price points for several dozen gold and silver mining stocks that trade on various global stock exchanges that I conclude are among the best in the world. The point is that I discovered that most commercial investment firms could care less if their financial consultants/ advisers know next to nothing about investing, and spend less than 10 minutes per client in determining a client’s asset allocation, as long as they are racking up the AUM fees. If one’s counterargument to this fact is that this particular task is the job of a portfolio manager, then (1) why assign such misleading titles like “financial consultant/adviser” to their employees when salesman is a more appropriate title; and (2) why does nearly every portfolio manager employed by commercial investment firms stick to low-utility diversification strategies that consistently underperform non-managed, passive index funds year after year?


    More than a decade ago, during my meetings with these portfolio managers, if I inquired as to whether the manager had any gold and silver mining stocks in his “diversified” portfolio, the fund manager always answered no. When I probed further, they stated that they never considered gold and silver mining stocks because their small market capitalization made them “too risky”, even if they were a small-cap portfolio manager. The large-cap managers stated that they may consider well-diversified, large-cap, mining stocks like BHP Billiton for inclusion in their portfolio, but that they couldn’t consider other mining companies solely focused on gold or silver production because their smaller-cap size and share prices didn’t meet their fiduciary mandate. Again, I understand if a large-cap fund manager that is restricted by a fiduciary mandate can not buy any PM mining stocks, but small-cap portfolio managers that also avoided PM mining stocks like they were the plague always provided excuses that were pure rubbish. Remember, I last worked in the commercial banking and investment industry over a decade ago, when the bull market for gold and silver was just getting started and the best gold and silver mining stocks were soaring in share price. Most likely, small-cap portfolio managers utilized the too much “risk” excuse back then to mask an utter lack of knowledge regarding how to properly assess a gold and silver mining stock’s value and upside potential.

     

    Back then, there were junior gold and silver mining companies that were a fraction of the market cap of their much larger-cap mining peers that had much stronger management, had managed geopolitical risk in a superior manner, and had streamlined operations to a far greater degree than their larger-cap peers that were not huge risks. Today, these arguments are even more applicable, and one can find junior gold and silver mining companies that are much better bets than their larger cap peers. I have uncovered many instances in the gold and silver mining world in recent years of smaller cap companies that acquired gold and silver mining operations from their much larger peers and

    (1) turned around the operations of a PM mine that was woefully mismanaged by their larger peers,

    (2) improved recovery rates of the metals,

    (3) increased exploration and successfully increased reserves and resources, and

    (4) even improved the grade of ore being mined with the employment of different mining techniques and the sale of non-core assets.

     

    In a day and age in which regular asset classes that commercial portfolio managers normally consider have become overwhelmingly bloated in price as a consequence of the persistent and extended cheap money policy of global Central Bankers, an investment strategy of concentration in few select still undervalued assets versus diversification is likely the only strategy that will work moving forward in returning significant yields. As support of this thesis, just read some of the archived links I’ve provided below. In conclusion, when managers refuse to buy gold and silver mining stocks in their “diversified” portfolio because they consider them too “risky”, even in an environment in which they admit nothing is working, maybe it’s time we should dig a little deeper to learn the truth behind their refusal to ever deviate from their stubborn adherence to diversification strategies that don’t work. If fund managers are trying to pass off some of the best safest assets today as risky, simply because their mandates restrict them from investing in them, then it’s time for us to take back control of our own wealth management. Currently, there are a lot of junior gold and silver mining companies I would rather own moving forward for their upside potential of their valuation versus owning Facebook and Amazon, and frankly, we should all feel the same way as well.

     

    More recent articles from SmartKnowledgeU:

    Can You Imagine the Mass Media Headlines if the S&P500 Index Were Experiencing the Same Year as Gold and Silver Stocks?

    The Current Fall in Gold and Silver Prices Will Prove to be Just a Lull in a Continuing Uptrend That Started Last Year

    Proof that the Largest Gains in the Best Gold and Silver Mining Stocks are Still Ahead

     

    About the author: JS Kim is the Managing Director and Founder of SmartKnowledgeU, a fiercely independent research, consulting and education firm that focuses on gold and silver asset investment strategies as a means of countering the damaging effects of rapidly devaluing fiat currencies worldwide and price-distorted stock market and asset bubbles created by Central Bankers. YTD, his Crisis Investment Opportunities newsletter has more than tripled the yield of the US S&P 500 after also returning positive yields last year, at a time in which the HUI gold bugs index declined by more than 50% from January 2015 to January 2016.

  • Not "The Onion": Argentina's Fernandez Says She Deserves A Nobel Prize In Economics

    /* Style Definitions */
    table.MsoNormalTable
    {mso-style-name:”Table Normal”;
    mso-tstyle-rowband-size:0;
    mso-tstyle-colband-size:0;
    mso-style-noshow:yes;
    mso-style-priority:99;
    mso-style-parent:””;
    mso-padding-alt:0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt;
    mso-para-margin:0in;
    mso-para-margin-bottom:.0001pt;
    line-height:115%;
    mso-pagination:widow-orphan;
    font-size:11.0pt;
    font-family:”Arial”,sans-serif;
    color:black;}

    /* Style Definitions */
    table.MsoNormalTable
    {mso-style-name:”Table Normal”;
    mso-tstyle-rowband-size:0;
    mso-tstyle-colband-size:0;
    mso-style-noshow:yes;
    mso-style-priority:99;
    mso-style-parent:””;
    mso-padding-alt:0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt;
    mso-para-margin:0in;
    mso-para-margin-bottom:.0001pt;
    line-height:115%;
    mso-pagination:widow-orphan;
    font-size:11.0pt;
    font-family:”Arial”,sans-serif;
    color:black;}

    Cristina Fernandez de Kirchner, former First Lady and President of Argentina (2003-2015), confessed in an interview that “instead of having the courts chase us, they should be giving us a Nobel prize for economics… We inherited a country in default and we left it without any debt. ” Brilliant.

    Amongst her accomplishments, Cristina boasts one sovereign debt default after failing to negotiate with creditors (2014), cooking the national economic figures for 8 years, an IMF censure for faking such data, devaluing her currency from 4:1 to 15:1 USD, and leaving her successful with 50% inflation. Perhaps the BoJ could use her advice?

    She and her cabinet have also been the subject of multiple corruption scandals following her departure of office. She has naturally expressed shock, condemned any corrupt officials and denied any knowledge of such actions.

    For those who like to focus on her track record,  Bloomberg has compiled a helpful GDP growth that compares GDP in Cristina’s mind versus GDP growth in the real world.

    To her credit, she has a chance… the Nobel committee did award Paul “we need a bigger housing bubble” Krugman the Economics Nobel and Barack Obama the Nobel Peace prize…..

  • Goldman Finds The Treasury Market No Longer Reacts To Economic Data

    For all the younger traders in our audience, we would like to inform you that maybe not now, but once upon a time, markets actually used to respond to economic data.  That includes both stocks as well as the market that has been historically considered far “smarter” than equities, the Treasury market. Sadly, as central banks took over, the significance of economic data released declined until recently it has virtually stopped mattering, something we predicted would happen back in 2009 when we warned that soon the only financial report that matters is the Fed’s weekly H.4.1 statement.

    Today, some six years later, Goldman picks up where we left off nearly a decade ago, and asks “Does the Treasury Market Still Care about Economic Data?”

    What it finds is simple (and something even the most lay of market observers these days could have told them): no.

    As Goldman’s Elad Pashtan writes, “the sensitivity of US Treasury yields to economic data surprises has declined to near record-lows over the last two years. We find that the pattern of reactions to data surprises across the yield curve matches pre-crisis norms—with higher sensitivity for short-term rates than longer-term rates—but the average reactions are much lower; for breakeven inflation reactions to growth data are not discernible from zero.”

    So if it is not the economy, then what does the “market” respond to?  Take a wild guess:

    In contrast, Treasury yields have reacted more strongly to Fed communication, at least according to one measure of policy surprises, and the sensitivity of exchange rates to activity news has increased.

    Here are the details:

    Economic data “surprises”— the difference between reported values for major economic indicators and consensus forecasts—have had a limited impact on US Treasury yields lately. Typically, Treasury yields rise on news of stronger-than-expected economic growth as investors anticipate either higher inflation and/or tighter monetary policy, and fall on news of weaker growth as markets discount lower inflation and/or easier monetary policy. In recent months, yields have had a much smaller reaction than normal to these types of data surprises. In Exhibit 1, we show the estimated impact of a 10-point surprise in our MAP index—a scaled measure of US growth surprises—on Treasury yields by year, controlling for changes in both risk sentiment (using the VIX index) and oil prices. The impact on 2-year yields has fallen to the lowest level since 2012, and the impact on 10-year yields has fallen to the lowest level since our dataset begins.

    Treasury Rates Becoming Less Responsive to Data Surprises

    Here Goldman expresses its confusion: “The limited impact of data surprises on rates is surprising given that the funds rate is no longer pinned at zero, and the Federal Reserve is actively considering further rate increases. When the funds rate was at the zero lower bound (ZLB) and the Fed was easing policy through forward guidance and QE, investors rightly saw little prospect of near-term rate hikes, even if the economy firmed meaningfully. The responsiveness of short-term Treasury yields to data surprises picked up as the Fed approached liftoff last year, but has since retreated back to ZLB levels.”

    Actually, the reason for the collapse in the market’s response is precisely because the same “market” no longer believes the Fed, or its reaction function, and as a result is no longer as concerned about rate hikes, as it was for example in 2015.  Where things get even more confusing is that over the past several years, Fed policy has been largely driven by the market itself, which however no longer responds to the data but merely to the Fed, creating the most diabolical and reflexive “circular reference” in capital markets existence.

    That particular discussion is the topic of a separate post, however.  For now we are more interested by Goldman’s “amazement” at something that had been largely obvious to most non-academics. Here is Goldman’s attempt to “explain” this phenomenon.

    One possible explanation for this phenomenon is that investors are now more focused on Fed communications, rather than to economic data releases—perhaps due to uncertainty about the central bank’s reaction function. And we do see some evidence along these lines. For example, we can use the same regression framework, but replace the MAP score variable with a measure of monetary policy surprises. We quantify monetary policy surprises using the correlation in daily returns across asset classes. Unexpected monetary policy changes create a particular pattern in market returns, which allow us to isolate them from growth and inflation shocks, and estimate their relative magnitudes over time (for further details see here). We calculate policy shocks using average correlations from 2000 through 2016 (i.e. the principal component loadings are fixed over this time period), so the regression results can be thought of as how the reaction in rates differs from the sample average. When we apply this regression to nominal forward rates on FOMC meetings and minutes release days, we see that interest rates have indeed become more sensitive to monetary policy events—both today and during the crisis—than they were during the pre-crisis era (Exhibit 3).

    Treasury Reactions Similar but Larger to Monetary Policy Surprises

    While most of Goldman’s analysis is commonsensical, they do find an interesting tangent, namely that as the “sensitivity of the Treasury curve to data surprises has declined, the sensitivity of the dollar has increased.” So are we all now just one big FX-trading family? Here’s Goldman

    Why are investors no longer reassessing their inflationary outlook in response to economic data? One possible explanation relates to investor perceptions about divergent global monetary policy regimes. While the sensitivity of the Treasury curve to data surprises has declined, the sensitivity of the dollar has increased: since mid-2014 the dollar has been roughly twice as sensitive to data surprises compared to pre-crisis levels (Exhibit 4, right panel). This result hints that investor may be focused on the effects of dollar pass-through to domestic prices, such that breakeven inflation remains stable even as activity data surprises markets (though we would note that the implied effects are larger than our normal pass-through estimates would suggest, and much more persistent as well).

    Breakevens no Longer Sensitive to Data, but Dollar Sensitivity Higher

    Summarizing Goldman’s findings:

    we find that that the sensitivity of nominal Treasury yields to US economic data surprises is currently very low, despite the fact that the FOMC has hiked once and is considering further increases. The reaction of breakeven inflation in particular is not discernible from zero. At the same time, Treasury markets appear more sensitive to Fed communication—at least according to one measure of policy surprises—and the dollar is reacting more strongly to activity data. Although it is difficult to draw strong conclusions, there could be a few explanations behind these disparate facts, including (1) higher uncertainty about the Fed’s reaction function, (2) investor focus on exchange rate appreciation and pass-through to domestic prices, and (3) low confidence that cyclical forces will lift domestic inflation.

    While we are genuinely surprised at Goldman’s surprise to the bond market’s lack of a reaction to surprises, we would add a (4): the market, in its conventional role of a discounting mechanism which is constantly calibrated by processing an near infinite amount of information about the future, no longer does that and is simply responding to the latest statement or act by the Fed which – paradoxically – is reflexively responding to the market (especially if the market is selling off). Which is why on occasion you will find us writing it as market, because thanks to the Fed, it no longer exists.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 3rd August 2016

  • The End Of IMF Credibility (Or Why Christine Lagarde Should Be Fired… But Won't Be)

    Submitted by Raul Ilargi Meijer via The Automatic Earth blog,

    The IMF’s Independent Evaluation Office (IEO) issued a report a few days ago entitled ‘The IMF and the Crises in Greece, Ireland, and Portugal’. It is so damning for managing director Christine Lagarde and her closest associates, that it’s hard to see, certainly at first blush, how they could all keep their jobs. But don’t be surprised if that is exactly what will happen.

    Because organizations like the IMF don’t care much, if at all, about accountability. Their leaders think they are close to untouchable, at least as long as they have the ‘blessing’ of those whose interests they serve. Which in case of the IMF means the world’s major banks and the governments of the richest nations (who also serve the same banks’ interests). And if these don’t like the course set out, a scandal with a chambermaid is easily staged.

    But the IEO doesn’t answer to Lagarde, it answers to the IMF’s board of executive directors. Still, despite multiple reports over the past few years out of the ‘inner layers’ of the Fund that were critical of, and showed far more comprehension of events than, Lagarde et al, the board never criticizes the former France finance minister in public. And maybe that should change; if the IMF is to hold on to the last shreds of its credibility, that is. But that brings us back to “Organizations like the IMF don’t care much, if at all, about accountability.”

    What the IEO report makes very clear is that the IMF should never have agreed, as part of the Troika, to assist the EU in forcing austerity upon Greece without insisting on significant debt relief, in the shape of a haircut, or (a) debt writedown(s). The IMF’s long established policy is that both MUST happen together. But its Troika companion, the EU, is bound by the Lisbon Treaty, which stipulates: “The Union shall not be liable for or assume the commitments of central governments”. Also, the ECB can not “finance member states”.

    If Lagarde and her minions had stayed true to their own ‘principles’, they should have refused to impose austerity on Greece if and when the EU refused debt relief (note: this has been playing out since at least 2010). They did not, however.

    *  *  *

    The IMF caved in (how willingly is hard to gauge), and the entire Troika agreed to waterboard Greece. The official excuse for bending the IMF’s own rules was the risk of ‘contagion’. But in a surefire sign that Lagarde et al were not acting with, let’s say, a “clear conscience”, they hid this decision from their own executive board.

    Moreover, the IEO now says it was unable to obtain key records or assess the activities of secretive “ad-hoc task forces”. “Many documents were prepared outside the regular established channels; written documentation on some sensitive matters could not be located; [the IEO] has not been able to determine who made certain decisions or what information was available, nor has it been able to assess the relative roles of management and staff..”

    One must wonder why the IMF has an executive board at all. Is it only to provide a facade of credibility and international coherence? When it becomes so clear, and -no less- through a report issued by one of its own offices, that its ‘boots on the ground’ care neither for its established policies nor for its board, isn’t it time for the board to interfere lest the Fund loses even more credibility?

    The IMF’s main problem, which many insiders may ironically see as its main asset, is the lack of transparency, combined with the overwhelming power exerted by the US and Europe. And Europe’s grip on the IMF is exactly what the report is about, in that it accuses Lagarde et al of bowing to EU pressure, to the extent that it abandons its own guiding ‘laws’. It acted like it was the European Monetary Fund, not the international one.

    So there’s no transparency, no accountability, and in the end that will lead to no credibility and no relevance. Well, that’s exactly how the EU lost Britain. And that shows where accountability and credibility are important even for non-democratic supra-national institutions, something these institutions are prone to neglect.

    No, there will not be a vote put to the people, no referendum on the IMF. Though that would sure be interesting. What can happen, though, is that countries, even large ones like China and Russia, threaten to leave, perhaps start their own alternative fund. These things have already been widely discussed.

    What is sure is that the US/Europe-centered character of the Fund will have to change. If Washington and Brussels try to appoint another European as managing director (an unwritten law thus far) they will face a rebellion.

    *  *  *

    That next appointment may come sooner than we think. Because Christine Lagarde is in trouble. It’s even a bit strange, and that’s putting it gently, that she’s still in her job. What’s hanging over her head is a 2008 case, in which she approved a payment of €403 million to businessman Bernard Tapie, for ‘losses’ he was to have suffered in 1993 when French bank Crédit Lyonnais supposedly undervalued his stake in Adidas.

    Lagarde is accused of negligence in the case, in particular because she ignored advice from her own ministry (yeah, that does smack like the IMF thing) and let the Tapie case go to a special arbitration committee instead of the courts. That Tapie was a supporter of the Sarkozy government Lagarde served as finance minister at the time makes it juicier.

    So does this: In 1993 Crédit Lyonnais was a private bank. But in 2008, it had been wound up and was run by a state-operated consortium. Therefore, the €403 million ‘awarded’ to Tapie out-of-court was all taxpayers money. Even juicier: in December 2015, a French appeal court overruled the compensation and ordered Tapie to repay the money, with interest.

    What’s peculiar about Lagarde staying on at the IMF is that she is not merely under investigation or even ‘only’ accused of committing a crime. Instead, she has been ordered to stand trial, something she’s spent 8 years trying to avoid. Still, apparently nobody sees any problem in her continuing to act as Managing Director of the IMF.

    That is quite something. And it directly affects the Fund’s credibility. If a president or prime minister of a country, any country, had been ordered to stand trial, the likely procedure would be to temporarily stand down and let someone else take care of government business pending the trial.

    As it stands, however, Lagarde is allowed to sit pretty. And then? Borrowing from the Guardian: “A charge of negligence in the use of public money carries a one-year jail sentence and a €15,000 fine. The CJR is made up of six members of the French Assemblée Nationale, six members of the upper house, the Senate and three magistrates. No date has been set for the hearing.”

    Ironically, negligence turns out to be a very light charge. Someone in Lagarde’s position could have given away or squandered trillions of euros and then be fined €15,000. But then, class justice is alive and well in France. What are the odds that she will be convicted? She’d have to be found with a chambermaid in Manhattan for that to happen…

    *  *  *

    That’s perhaps what the IMF board are thinking too. Whether that’s wise remains to be seen. Hubris rules all these institutions, sheltered as they are from the real world. But the real world is changing.

    Ironically, many people think these changes will reinforce the IMF. Since the Fund can issue a sort of ‘super money’ in the shape/guise of Special Drawing Rights (SDRs), and especially China would seem to like SDRs becoming the world’s reserve currency instead of the US dollar, the IMF in some people’s eyes holds a trump card.

    There may well be an effort to hide private and public debt throughout the planet even more than it is hidden now, through SDRs. We’ll likely see governments and perhaps large corporations issue bonds denominated in SDRs. China seems to think that this could potentially halt much of its capital flight.

    My trouble with this is that it’s either too unclear or too clear who would profit most from such schemes. Even if the next managing director of the IMF is not European, but Asian or African, the puppet masters of the Fund will still be the same western financial ‘cabal’. And I don’t see China or Russia signing up to that kind of control, and willingly expand it by making SDRs far more important.

    Then again, there’s a sh*tload of debt that needs to be hidden, and the whole world is running out of carpet to sweep it under. Then again, Russia is not that indebted. It’ll be hard to get a consensus.

    *  *  *

    But all that won’t help Greece. Let’s get back to that. We left off where Lagarde conspired with the EU, under the guise of preventing contagion, to abandon the IMF’s own rules in order to waterboard the country. Of course, we know, though nobody writing on the IEO report mentions it, that the contagion they were trying to prevent was not so much between nations but between banks.

    The bailout-related policies and actions that Lagarde hid from her own board (!) were designed to make French and German banks ‘whole’ at the cost of the Greek people. It became austerity, so severe as to make no sense whatsoever -certainly inside an alleged ‘Union’-, even if the IMF -not the world most charitable institution- has always banned this without being accompanied by strong debt relief.

    Schäuble and Dijsselbloem saved Germany and Holland at the expense of Greece. This will end up being the undoing of the EU, even if nobody’s willing to acknowledge it despite the glaring evidence of the Brexit.

    It will probably be the undoing of the IMF as well. And there I get back to what I’ve said 1000 times: centralization can only work in times of growth. There is no conceivable reason, other than dictatorship, why people would want to be part of a centralizing movement unless they get richer from it.

    In today’s shrinking global economy, we have passed a point of no return in this regard. Everyone will want out of these institutions, and get back to making their own decisions about their own lives, instead of having these decisions being taken by some far away board with no accountability.

    Let’s end with a few quotes about the IEO report. Ambrose Evans-Pritchard was in fine form:

    IMF Admits Disastrous Love Affair With The Euro and Apologises For The Immolation Of Greece

    The International Monetary Fund’s top staff misled their own board, made a series of calamitous misjudgments in Greece, became euphoric cheerleaders for the euro project, ignored warning signs of impending crisis, and collectively failed to grasp an elemental concept of currency theory.

     

    [..] In Greece, the IMF violated its own cardinal rule by signing off on a bailout in 2010 even though it could offer no assurance that the package would bring the country’s debts under control or clear the way for recovery, and many suspected from the start that it was doomed. The organisation got around this by slipping through a radical change in IMF rescue policy, allowing an exemption (since abolished) if there was a risk of systemic contagion. “The board was not consulted or informed,” it said. The directors discovered the bombshell “tucked into the text” of the Greek package, but by then it was a fait accompli.

     

    [..] The injustice is that the cost of the bailouts was switched to ordinary Greek citizens – the least able to support the burden – and it was never acknowledged that the true motive of EU-IMF Troika policy was to protect monetary union. Indeed, the Greeks were repeatedly blamed for failures that stemmed from the policy itself. This unfairness – the root of so much bitterness in Greece – is finally recognised in the report. “If preventing international contagion was an essential concern, the cost of its prevention should have been borne – at least in part – by the international community as the prime beneficiary,” it said.

    *  *  *

    That would seem to leave the IMF just one option: to apologize profoundly to Greece, to demand from the EU that all unjust measures be reversed and annulled, and to set up a very large fund (how about €1 trillion) specifically to support the Greek people, including retribution of lost funds, repair of the health care system, reinstatement of a pension system that can actually keep people alive and so on and so forth.

    And to top it off of course: debt writedowns as far as the eye can see. You f**k up, you pay the price. This makes me think of a remark by Angela Merkel a few weeks ago, she said ‘we have found the right mix when it comes to Greece’. Well, Angela, that is so completely bonkers it’s insulting, and the IMF’s own evaluation office says so.

    I like this one from Bill Black as well:

    It was only after forcing the Greek people into a pointless purgatory of a decade of disaster that the troika would consider providing debt relief…The only ‘debt relief’ they offer to discuss is a ‘long rescheduling of debt payments at low interest rates.’ This, under their own dogmas, will lock Greece into a long-term debt trap that will materially lower Greece’s growth rate for decades and leave it constantly vulnerable to recurrent financial crises. That is a recipe for disaster for Greece, Italy, and Spain (collectively, 100 million citizens) and for the EU. It is financial madness – and that ignores the political instability it will cause to force an EU member nation to twist slowly in the wind for 50 years.”

    Got that one off of Yanis Varoufakis’ site, and he must be feeling very vindicated, even if not nearly enough people express it, by the IMF report. Because he’s said all along what they themselves are now admitting. But it ain’t much good if nothing changes, is it? Or, as Varoufakis put it:

    [..] to complete this week’s drubbing of the troika, the report by the IMF’s Independent Evaluation Office (IEO) saw the light of day. It is a brutal assessment, leaving no room for doubt about the vulgar economics and the gunboat diplomacy employed by the troika. It puts the IMF, the ECB and the Commission in a tight spot: Either restore a modicum of legitimacy by owning up and firing the officials most responsible or do nothing, thus turbocharging the discontent that European citizens feel toward the EU, accelerating the EU’s deconstruction.

    [..] The question now is: What next? What good is it to receive a mea culpa if the policies imposed on the Greek government are the same ones that the mea culpa was issued for? What good is it to have a mea culpa if those officials who imposed such disastrous, inhuman policies remain on board and are, in fact, promoted for their gross incompetence?

     

    In sum, an urgent apology is due to the Greek people, not just by the IMF but also by the ECB and the Commission whose officials were egging the IMF on with the fiscal waterboarding of Greece. But an apology and a collective mea culpa from the troika is woefully inadequate. It needs to be followed up by the immediate dismissal of at least three functionaries. 

     

    First on the list is Mr Poul Thomsen – the original IMF Greek Mission Chief whose great failure (according to the IMF’s own reports never before had a mission chief presided over a greater macroeconomic disaster) led to his promotion to the IMF’s European Chief status. A close second spot in this list is Mr Thomas Wieser, the chair of the EuroWorkingGroup who has been part of every policy and every coup that resulted in Greece’s immolation and Europe’s ignominy, hopefully to be joined into retirement by Mr Declan Costello, whose fingerprints are all over the instruments of fiscal waterboarding. And, lastly, a gentleman that my Irish friends know only too well, Mr Klaus Masuch of the ECB.

    You probably guessed by now that I would certainly and urgently add Christine Lagarde to that list of people to be fired. And not appoint another French citizen as managing director. Too risky. They do crazy things. The IMF must be reorganized, and thoroughly, or it no longer has a ‘raison d’être’.

    I see no reason to doubt that those who call the shots are too blinded by hubris to execute such measures, so I’ll list these things one more time: transparency, accountability, credibility and if you don’t have those you will lose your relevance.

    But it’s probably a bad idea to begin with to let an economy, if not a world, in decline, be governed by the same people who owe their positions to its rise. It would seem to take another kind of mindframe.

  • Why Did Khizr Khan Delete His Law Firm's Website?

    Khizr Khan, the Muslim Gold Star father of Captain Humayun Khan, set off a media firestorm at the DNC last week when he criticized Trump for his "unconstitutional" policies aimed at banning Muslim immigration to the United States.  A question posed by Breitbart is whether Khizr Khan's law firm, KM Khan Law Office, actually derives profit directly from Muslim immigration to the United States making him more than just an innocent conscientiousness objector to Trump's policy

    Breitbart suggests that Khan did, in fact, stand to profit from his viewpoints shared at the DNC and point to his website bio which lists "EB-5 Investments & Related Immigration Services" as a specific area of practice.  Oddly enough, since these reports have surfaced the website of Mr. Khan's law office has been taken down.  Luckily, prior versions of the website are available on the wayback machine which can be seen here:

    Khan Law

    Why would Khan remove his website over such a discovery?  Perhaps it's related to the fact that the EB-5 program has come under intense scrutiny from certain members of Congress, the SEC, Homeland Security and the NSA.  Senator Chuck Grassley recently described the program as "riddled with flaws and corruption."  Below are some relevant excerpts from Senator Grassley's prepared remarks at the Judiciary Committee Hearing on February 2, 2016 regarding EB-5:

    It is widely acknowledged that the EB-5 program is riddled with flaws and corruption. Maybe it is only here on Capitol Hill—on this island surrounded by reality—that we can choose to plug our ears and refuse to listen to commonly accepted facts. The Government Accountability Office, the media, industry experts, members of congress, and federal agency officials, have concurred that the program is a serious problem with serious vulnerabilities.

     

    There are also classified reports that detail the national security, fraud and abuse.  Our committee has received numerous briefings and classified documents to show this side of the story. 

     

    The enforcement arm of the Department of Homeland Security wrote an internal memo that raises significant concerns about the program.  One section of the memo outlines concerns that it could be used by Iranian operatives to infiltrate the United States.  The memo identifies seven main areas of program vulnerability, including the export of sensitive technology, economic espionage, use by foreign government agents and terrorists, investment fraud, illicit finance and money laundering

     

    An interagency working group was organized by the National Security Staff because of the serious concerns.  This group’s draft memo said, “The capital raising activities inherent in the regional center model raise concerns about investor fraud and other conduct that may violate US securities laws.

    More information about the EB-5 Immigrant Investor Program can be found on the Department of Homeland Security website.

    While it's unclear how this saga will play out, one thing we're pretty sure of is that we'll see a couple more days of related headlines before we finally get to put this to bed.

    Senator Grassley's full comments can be viewed below:

  • Peter Schiff: Time Is Running Out, "Crisis Worse Than 2008 Coming"

    Submitted by Mac Slavo via SHTFPlan.com,

    We are headed for disaster, and the only question is how long the economy can dodge a bullet.

    The illusory bubble on Wall Street claims to be at record highs, but the reality, the underbelly, is dark indeed.

    Economic expert Peter Schiff speaks on not only the safe haven of gold, and what is at stake in the election, but just how dire the financial consequences will be when the great storm hits and batters everyone.

    As Before Its News reports:

    The endgame for the U.S. economy is oblivion. 2008 was a minor correction compared to the eventual collapse of the U.S. Dollar.

     

    WHY: After the dot.com bubble burst in 2000, Fed chairman Alan Greenspan-led the Federal Reserve through a series of interest cuts that brought down the Federal Funds rate to 1% by 2004. The bubble created by those years of cheap Fed money at 1% resulted in U.S. households losing a total wealth of almost $14 TRILLION in the 2008 crisis. Stock markets fell by almost half for losing $7.9 trillion, and the housing market lost $6 trillion.

     

    FAST FORWARD TO TODAY: We’ve had 7 years of interest rates at 0%. As a result, there is more than just a housing bubble this time. There’s a stock bubble, a housing bubble, a bond bubble, a student loan bubble, and I could go on. As Peter explains, the Fed only has ONE option at this point: Continue to fake it for as long as possible by printing more money (otherwise known as “quantitative easing”), or let the whole system come crashing down.

     

    HERE IS THE REALITY: The world has caught on, and the gig is up. Under Obama’s stewardship, the U.S. national debt has gone from $10 Trillion, to what will be $20 Trillion by the time he leaves office, with nothing more than 100 MILLION Americans out of work, and 50 MILLION in poverty and on food stamps. That’s what cheap money bought for us. It was all “borrowed” cheap money too, making it infinitely worse, and the world is tired of lending.

    In no uncertain terms, Schiff warns that the next crisis will be far, far worse than the 2008 collapse, and the “recovery” that has since rotted away at the house:

  • 65 Million Americans Would Like To Work But Can't Risk Losing Their Entitlements

    At the DNC last week, Anastasia Somoza, who has cerebral palsy and spastic quadriplegia, took to the stage to deliver an emotionally-stirring speech advocating for the rights of disabled people across the country.  She also took the opportunity to brand Trump as a candidate that "feeds off of fear and division" and "shouts, bullies and profits off of the vulnerable Americans" while describing Hillary as someone who "sees her."  Unsurprisingly, this is a narrative which has reverberated with America's media outlets as they couldn't help but assist the Democrats in their effort to exploithelp Anastasia in her quest to elect Hillary.

    Just today, Bloomberg published an article entitled "These Government Rules Trap Millions of Americans in Poverty" that details the personal stories of various folks with disabilities who are willing and able to work but don't out of fear of oppressive rules which could result in the loss of their government benefits. Take the case of Susanne Brasset, who says she only keeps $5 in her bank account because she's "scared to save more" due to the risk that she might lose her social security "medicaid and other crucial benefits".  Brasset goes on to confirm that:

    "There’s more money I could be making, but I’m discouraged by all the rules I need to adhere to.

    How rude!  We're truly disgusted that our government would seek to oppress the country's benefit recipients with outlandish rules aimed at determining a person's financial wherewithal prior to doling out billions of taxpayer dollars.  This country claims it wants to protect its citizens but blatant taxpayer protections like this only serve to permanently impoverish marginalized segments of our electorate.  Bloomberg describes these taxpayer protections as rules that are:

    "intended to bar freeloaders [but] end up keeping disabled people in a permanent state of poverty, unable to put money away for emergencies, retirement, and other life goals."

    How could anyone argue with that?  But don't worry, as Bloomberg points out, there is a "loophole" that allows benefit recipients to save up to $100,000 without risking their taxpayer-funded benefits.  Introducing ABLE:

    ABLE is a savings account, created by Congress in 2014, that can be opened by or for people with a disability that began before they turned 26.  Like a 529 college savings plan, ABLE accounts are run by states, which need to pass legislation of their own to create them.  Just as investment gains in a 529 plan aren’t taxed if the money is used for higher education, the funds in an ABLE account are tax-free if they go toward disability-related expenses, a broad category that includes housing, education, health care, and basic needs.

     

    ABLE goes only so far in fixing a confusing and frustrating system, but it does create a much-needed loophole.  For some, the account offers a way to prepare for emergencies.  For others, like 35-year-old filmmaker and activist Dominick Evans, it could let them save money that doesn't count toward the asset cap so they can work without losing benefits.

     

    Strings are attached. Total contributions, whether by an account holder, friends, or family, are capped at $14,000 a year. If an account exceeds $100,000, the holder can lose eligibility for cash benefits from Social Security's Supplemental Security Income program until the overage has been spent. When a Medicaid recipient dies, the health insurance program for the poor can take the contents of an ABLE account as compensation for the care that was provided.

    News of this option brought a huge sigh of relief from Susanne, who said that ABLE:

    “…gives me peace of mind.  Saving money should be a right to each and every American.”

    We're a little fuzzy on our founding documents but admit that we missed the constitutionally protected right of all Americans to redistributed wealth. 

  • Boomers Again? What Another “Scorched Earth Generation” President Means For Gold

    Submitted by Pater Diekmeyer via SprottMoney.com,

    Donald Trump and Hillary Clinton’s acceptance as Republican and Democratic parties’ nominees for President sets the stage for the contest to begin in earnest.

    Both Trump, who is 70, and Clinton, who is 68, were born in the post-war Baby Boom era. So were their vice-presidential back-ups, Mike Pence and Tim Kaine, as well as all U.S. presidents since Bill Clinton.

    Gold investors thus need to consider the implications of a member of one of the most delusional, spendthrift, and amoral generations in history, occupying the White House for another four years.

    After “the greatest generation” … “the scorched earth generation”

    In his best-selling book “The Greatest Generation,” Tom Brokaw profiled Baby Boomers’ parents’ generation, which he described as “American citizen heroes, who came of age during The Great Depression and World War Two … united by common values – duty, honor, economy, courage, service, love of family and country.”

    In their youth, Boomers, who were born between the mid-1940s and the early 1960s, stated loudly that they wanted to be nothing like their parents before them.

    They succeeded.

    Andrea Yalnizyan, of the Canadian Centre for Policy Alternatives, has described this privileged group, which replaced religion with consumption, as “the scorched earth generation.”

    Not surprisingly, the records of U.S. leaders from the Boom generation have been disastrous.

    Starting with Bill Clinton, through George Bush the Younger (who though born in 1943 was a child of a returning WW II veteran) and Barack Obama, Boomer presidencies have been characterized by increased government spending, borrowing, and money printing. More recently, they have introduced a new innovation: perpetual war.

    Trump and Clinton’s pronouncements suggest if either were to take office, they would follow the paths of previous Boomer presidents. Their administrations would thus almost certainly be characterized by:

    Delusional politics

    Boomer Presidents have presided over what Chris Hedges characterizes of an “Empire of Illusion,” where image and spectacle trump (forgive the pun) reality. That includes governments that:

    • Produce phony numbers (unfunded liabilities, off-balance sheet debts, massaged government statistics). Trump’s personal financial statements, which suggest that his personal brand name alone (excluding real assets) is worth more than $3 billion, provide a taste for what is in store.
    • Extend and pretend, refusing to deal with current problems, ranging from insolvent financial regimes, bankrupt pensions and healthcare systems to climate change, but instead passing on the growing problems to their successors.
    • Support captured regulatory bodies and oversight authorities (these include debt rating agencies and auditors who rubber stamp the most egregious misrepresentations, if their checks are big enough)

    Bigger government

    Baby Boomer presidents have all acted on the belief that there is no problem that cannot be solved by more government. The Clinton Administration was one of the first to use off-balance sheets liabilities in a material way, to disguise the unsustainable costs. George Bush the Younger nearly doubled the national debt and Barack Obama did so again.

    Both Trump and Clinton look set to instigate continued government spending increases when they take office, this time financed with an innovation suggested by another Baby Boomer Ben Bernanke: helicopter money.

    More wars from the Chicken Hawks

    Millions of Boomers served the United States nobly in wars of questionable value, such as Vietnam. However, prominent Boomer leaders almost all ducked active military service. Calvin Trillin, of The Nation magazine, describes such folk, many of whom were active in promoting wars that others would fight, as “Chicken Hawks.”

    These include George W. Bush (who avoided Vietnam by using family connections to get assigned to a National Guard unit, where he could get pilot lessons for free). Bill Clinton ducked military service by studying in England. Hillary Clinton was able avoid active duty because she was a woman. Donald Trump ducked out by getting a medical deferment.

    In office, both Trump’s and Clinton’s avoidance of military service will put enormous pressure on them to “look tough.” Both will almost certainly buckle to such pressure. Clinton, for example, who in her early days on the scene was regarded as a dove, has been forced by political pressure to actively support almost every military action that the U.S. has ever undertaken.

    The first generation to leave behind less than what they inherited

    Both Trump and Clinton presidencies thus look set to continue favor the “Empire of Illusion” policies described by Hedges.

    Under either’s stewardship, unless things change, Boomers will cap a dubious performance: they will be the first generation in U.S. history to leave behind a weaker country than the one they inherited.

    In that climate, investors’ priorities need to be to minimize the damage to their portfolios. Return of investment, rather than return on investment, needs to be the main focus.

    A sound investment strategy, in such an environment, would almost certainly be overweight in hard assets, which are grounded in the reality-based community.

  • White House Caught Secretly Airlifting $1.7 Billion US Taxpayer Cash To Tehran To Ensure Iran Nuclear Accord Success

    What Donald Trump has proclaimed the worst deal ever made, may just have become worst-er. The shocking truth behind the US-Iran nuclear deal, as WSJ reports, is that John Kerry and the Obama Administration airlifted $1.7bn of cash in 'compromise' payments (read – bribe) to Tehran to ensure the release of 4 captured sailors coincidentally the same weekend as the signing of the nuclear deal.

    With all the chatter of helicopter money as solution to the western world's economic ills,The Wall Street Journal's Jay Solomon and Carol Lee expose, it appears The Obama Administration is already busily dropping cash where ever it needs things done in a hurry…

    Wooden pallets stacked with euros, Swiss francs and other currencies were flown into Iran on an unmarked cargo plane, according to these officials. The U.S. procured the money from the central banks of the Netherlands and Switzerland, they said.

     

    The money represented the first installment of a $1.7 billion settlement the Obama administration reached with Iran to resolve a decades-old dispute over a failed arms deal signed just before the 1979 fall of Iran’s last monarch, Shah Mohammad Reza Pahlavi.

     

    The settlement, which resolved claims before an international tribunal in The Hague, also coincided with the formal implementation that same weekend of the landmark nuclear agreement reached between Tehran, the U.S. and other global powers the summer before.

     

    “With the nuclear deal done, prisoners released, the time was right to resolve this dispute as well,” President Barack Obama said at the White House on Jan. 17—without disclosing the $400 million cash payment.

    Of course, senior U.S. officials denied any link between the payment and the prisoner exchange. They say the way the various strands came together simultaneously was coincidental, not the result of any quid pro quo.

    But U.S. officials also acknowledge that Iranian negotiators on the prisoner exchange said they wanted the cash to show they had gained something tangible.

    Sen. Tom Cotton, a Republican from Arkansas and a fierce foe of the Iran nuclear deal, accused President Barack Obama of paying “a $1.7 billion ransom to the ayatollahs for U.S. hostages.”

     

    “This break with longstanding U.S. policy [not to] put a price on the head of Americans, and has led Iran to continue its illegal seizures” of Americans, he said.

     

    Since the cash shipment, the intelligence arm of the Revolutionary Guard has arrested two more Iranian-Americans. Tehran has also detained dual-nationals from France, Canada and the U.K. in recent months.

    Perhaps most ironically, the Iranians did not want US Dollars…

    Iranian press reports have quoted senior Iranian defense officials describing the cash as a ransom payment. The Iranian foreign ministry didn’t respond to a request for comment.

     

    The $400 million was paid in foreign currency because any transaction with Iran in U.S. dollars is illegal under U.S. law. Sanctions also complicate Tehran’s access to global banks

     

    The Obama administration has refused to disclose how it paid any of the $1.7 billion, despite congressional queries, outside of saying that it wasn’t paid in dollars. Lawmakers have expressed concern that the cash would be used by Iran to fund regional allies, including the Assad regime in Syria and the Lebanese militia Hezbollah, which the U.S. designates as a terrorist organization.

     

     

    Mr. Kerry and the State and Treasury departments sought the cooperation of the Swiss and Dutch governments. Ultimately, the Obama administration transferred the equivalent of $400 million to their central banks. It was then converted into other currencies, stacked onto the wooden pallets and sent to Iran on board a cargo plane.

     

    On the morning of Jan. 17, Iran released the four Americans: Three of them boarded a Swiss Air Force jet and flew off to Geneva, with the fourth returning to the U.S. on his own. In return, the U.S. freed seven Iranian citizens and dropped extradition requests for 14 others.

    We leave it to Sen. James Lankford (R., Okla.) to conclude:

    “President Obama’s…payment to Iran in January, which we now know will fund Iran’s military expansion, is an appalling example of executive branch governance,… Subsidizing Iran’s military is perhaps the worst use of taxpayer dollars ever by an American president.”

    And now comes the big test of the mainstream media in America – can they stop discussing Trump and Khizr Kahn for long enough to question the deliberate obfuscation of facts in yet another foreign policy snafu by the administration?

  • D-Day For Australia's Real Estate Bubble?

    Submitted by Pater Tenebrarum via Acting-Man.com,

    Unknowable Degrees of Bubble Insanity

    Back in February, we brought you an update on the truly insane real estate bubble in Australia (see: “Australia’s Housing Bubble – In the Grip of Insanity” for details) in the wake of Jonathan Tepper of Variant Perception reporting on an eye-opening fact-finding tour in Sydney.

     

    shack

    This rotting shack in Sydney and its tiny plot of land sold for nearly $1 million in May of 2014 – more than two years ago.  Since then, house prices in Australia have increased even further. Yes, it is an insane bubble, no doubt about it.

     

     

    As every seasoned market observer knows though, the fact that a bubble has  obviously attained crazy proportions does not mean it cannot become even crazier. We only need to think back to the Nikkei index in the late 1980s, the Nasdaq in the late 1990s, or the grand-daddy of modern-day bubble insanity, the Souk Al-Manakh bubble in Kuwait in the early 1980s.

    The latter example is generally less well known than the others, but it is unsurpassed in terms of sheer mass dementia. What made this bubble so special – at its peak Kuwait’s stock market had a total capitalization of more than $100 billion, which made it the third-largest equity market in the world behind the US and Japan at the time, a fact that should have told market participants they were skating on very thin ice – was the use of post-dated checks to pay for stock purchases.

    The bubble needed a trigger to pop, and that trigger was delivered when one day, a single one of these post-dated checks actually bounced. One of the biggest market crashes in history ensued – a truly dramatic wipe-out, that in the end destroyed the country’s entire OTC stock market.

    As we have pointed out previously, while residential real estate is actually a consumer good, analytically it should be treated as akin to a capital good maintained over several consecutive stages of production, as it renders its services over a very long period of time (the same principle holds for other durable goods – see J.H. de Soto, Money, Bank Credit and Economic Cycles).

    One implication of this is that interest rates are very important to the valuation of real estate. At present, the administered central bank interest rate in Australia is at a new low, and since it remains actually high compared to similar rates in other developed countries, it may well decline even further.

     

    1-australia-interest-rate@2x

    Australia’s administered central bank interest rate – click to enlarge.

     

    Gross market rates all over the world have so far continued to follow the downtrend in central bank rates, so the market has yet to reassert itself (we plan to post an in-depth discussion of the current trend in gross market rates soon). As long as rates remain low, real estate bubbles tend to remain well supported.

    Let us not forget, the bursting of a number of housing bubbles in 2006-2009 (in the US, Spain and several other countries) was preceded by a slow but steady increase in interest rates and a sharp slowdown in money supply growth in the major currency areas. Neither one nor the other are in evidence in Australia at present – at least not yet.

     

    2-australia-money-supply-m1@2x

    Australia’s narrow money supply M1 has grown sharply in recent years (the pace of the advance is comparable to the pre-2008 era) – click to enlarge.

     

    An Important New Development

    One of the reasons why interest rates are so important in keeping residential real estate bubbles from imploding is that they make otherwise unaffordable properties seemingly affordable.

    Most home buyers use mortgages to finance house purchases, and the size of the monthly payment is therefore a main criterion in terms of affordability. Given that these are usually very long term loans with terms ranging from 15 to 30 years, the level of interest rates makes an enormous difference.

    Below is a slightly dated chart via Variant Perception (ending in Q2 2015) that compares Australian home prices, household incomes, rents and construction costs. It should be obvious how irrational house prices have become in light of the huge gap that has opened up between these time series.

    The chart also demonstrates that low interest rates are indeed of overwhelming importance in sustaining these sky-high prices. There is certainly little else that will.

     

    3-Australia house prices vs income.

    Australia: house prices vs. household income, rents and construction costs.

     

    Keep in mind though what we have mentioned in the annotation to the chart of Australia’s money supply above. The credit expansion that has been the driving force of the bubble has largely been the work of commercial banks. While the central bank has enabled them to offer loans at lower and lower rates, it is their willingness to actually do so that is decisive.

     

    4-Interest only loans

    Another chart illustrating the importance of interest rates to Australia’s housing bubble: the share of “interest only” mortgage loans, the principal of which is settled with a balloon payment at the end of their term. The influence of rates on the size of the monthly payment is even greater in these cases.

     

    One of our readers has recently made us aware of a recent development that may well throw a major spanner into the works. Similar to what has happened in other desirable destinations, Chinese buyers have played an increasingly important role in Australia’s property market. They have been especially active in the market for condominiums, which has experienced an extremely pronounced boom as a result.

    What we were hitherto not aware of was the extent to which these buyers have actually obtained financing from Australian banks. This source of funding is now threatening to dry up. The banks are pulling back after learning that many of the loan applications seem to be fraudulent.

    This happens to coincide with a noticeable surge in supply in the market – many developments that have been started in order to cash in on the huge gap between prices and construction costs are now finished or about to be finished (we can picture a great many “ghost apartment blocs” in Australia’s future).

    As the Financial Review reports:

    “Off-the-plan buyers of Australian apartments are in crisis as tough new borrowing rules mean thousands of investors who have paid a deposit are struggling to complete their purchases, according to local and overseas mortgage brokers and financiers.

    Shanghai-based financiers claim their Chinese clients’ funding from Australian banks has been frozen and they face foreclosure – or usurious interest rates – from private financiers. Australian financiers claim their local clients, many of them Asian, have had their settlements deferred by three months to find alternative funding.

     

    “All the deals have been frozen,” said Mark Yin, an agent with Shanghai-based Home Tree Group, about his Shanghai clients’ funding with Australian banks. “We are now looking for finance all over the world.”

     

    Mr Yin said this represented nearly 100 per cent of his clients who were waiting for properties to be completed in Australia and that most of the apartments were in the Melbourne CBD.

     

    Melbourne-based Marshall Condon, chief executive of mortgage broker Neue Black and who also has off-shore and local Asian investors, added: “In the next three to 12 months, many investors will be applying for funding to complete their deals, however, they will be become increasingly concerned as they discover funding is limited.”

     

    Billions of dollars has been invested in tens-of-thousands of high-rise apartments that are reshaping the skylines of the nation’s major capitals, particularly Melbourne, Sydney and Brisbane. Most have been sold off-the-plan, which means purchasers buy off the blueprint with a deposit and complete when it is built, which requires a second valuation and financing commitment by the lender. But a huge increase in supply has slowed demand, particularly around Melbourne’s CBD, pushing down prices.

     

    Lenders, which initially fell over themselves to finance overseas’ buyers, slammed on the breaks when spot checks on the loan applications detected widespread fraud. The main problem is mainland Chinese buyers, which account for about half of the deals. That means many local lenders that agreed to provide funding when buyers made deposits, will not recommit upon completion.

     

    Nervous local lenders fear that a sharp downturn, or change of sentiment, could result in foreclosures with overseas borrowers they have little chance of locating. Mortgage brokers, who receive their commissions upon final completion, are nervous they will not be paid for negotiating deals and financing.

     

    Developers, some of whom have already canceled projects, are concerned about financing existing and future projects. It also has potentially big economic impact for local consumer sentiment, building services and government revenues.

     

    Overseas financiers, typically based in Singapore and Malaysia, are working on rescue packages for borrowers by creating private bail-out funds, or buying apartments off stressed purchases, which means they lose their deposit. They include rolling five-year terms, starting at 7.5 per cent, or one-year emergency loans at 12 per cent, according to financiers.

     

    Other packages are stepped-loans where the different amounts of the loan have different rates, invariably several times higher than Australian lenders’ standard variable or fixed rate loans. For example, Australian banks and other local lenders are offering three-year fixed rates at below 4 per cent. Home Tree Group’s Mr Yin said so far he was unable to secure funding for his clients and doubted they would be able to settle.

     

    “I have now stopped dealing in Australian property,” he said. Another agent in Shanghai, the chief executives of Iron Fish China Lanny Xu, said while most of his clients were not affected by the change, around 20 per cent were trying to on-sell apartments as they were unable to complete settlement.

     

    He said of some were looking to banks in Singapore for financing, as they were still happy to extend loans over Australian property. “The cost of funding in Singapore is higher than in Australia,” he said.

     

    Mr Xu said another option was to seek finance from newly established mortgage funds, which were looking to fill the gap left by the withdrawal of Australian banks from the market. He said such funds were charging interest rates of between 8 per cent and 12 per cent.

     

    Scott Kirchner, the manager of Bella Resident in China, said the inability of offshore buyers to access finance was “really starting to bite”. “We are reluctant to take on new clients unless they have 100 per cent of the cash for a property,” he said. “But then there’s the issue of how do they get the money out of China.”

    (emphasis added)

    In other words, a number of buyers are now faced with a sudden increase in interest rates from 4% to between 8% to 12% – regardless of the administered interest rate of the RBA. It is of course possible that the effect will once again stay local (i.e., confined to Melbourne and condominiums), similar to what happened when commodity prices collapsed.

    The downturn in commodities led to sharp declines in property prices in regions and towns close to mining activities. However, house prices in the big cities continued to soar – not least because the RBA cut rates in order to offset the impact of the commodities bust.

    It is definitely possible though that this latest development is actually the pin that finally pricks the bubble. As noted above, in Kuwait a single bounced check reportedly triggered an avalanche. The Souk Al-Manakh bubble is certainly not directly comparable to Australia’s housing market, but when a bubble is already very stretched, something will eventually trigger its demise – at times it can even be a seemingly small event.

     

    Melbourne

    Condominium high-rises in Melbourne – to date the consensus was that the market “might” be oversupplied by 2018 – it appears as though this juncture has been brought forward.

     

    Conclusion

    It is a very good bet that many of the condominium high-rises built in anticipation of ever-growing demand and an unimpeded expansion of bank credit will turn out to have been unwise investments. As Ludwig von Mises reminds us in Human Action, these malinvestments become visible once the banks are getting cold feet and are beginning to pull back – which is precisely what seems to be happening in this case.

    However conditions may be, it is certain that no manipulations of the banks can provide the economic system with capital goods. What is needed for a sound expansion of production is additional capital goods, not money or fiduciary media. The boom is built on the sands of banknotes and deposits. It must collapse.

     

    The breakdown appears as soon as the banks become frightened by the accelerated pace of the boom and begin to abstain from further expansion of credit. The boom could continue only as long as the banks were ready to grant freely all those credits which business needed for the execution of its excessive projects, utterly disagreeing with the red state of the supply of factors of production and the valuations of the consumers. These illusory plans, suggested by the falsification of business calculation as brought about by the cheap money policy, can be pushed forward only if new credits can be obtained at gross market rates which are artificially lowered below the height they would reach at an unhampered loan market. It is this margin that gives them the deceptive appearance of profitability. The change in the banks’ conduct does not create the crisis. It merely makes visible the havoc spread by the faults which business has committed in the boom period.

     – L.v. Mises, Human Action p. 559

    (emphasis added)

    It is probably still fair to say though that an outbreak of caution on the part of lenders is a trigger for the bust, in the sense that the illusory accounting profits generated during the boom period will suddenly disappear.

    Of course it remains to be seen if this recent development will have wider implications for Australia’s real estate bubble or if the central bank’s loose monetary policy will continue to trump such disturbances in the farce. This is one development though which the RBA cannot really influence – it is essentially a major rate hike affecting an important group of buyers, and it seems as though a lot of hitherto anticipated demand simply won’t be there.

     

     

    shack-2

    Bonus picture: the back of the $1 million shack. Just in case you thought it might look better from a different perspective…

  • Welfare Is The New Work

    Authored by Stephen Moore, published Op-Ed at The Washington Tmes,

    The welfare state of mind has spiraled out of control in America…

    Two recent news stories highlight how pernicious the welfare state has become in America today.

    The first was an announcement by the feds that food stamps can be used to have groceries delivered right to a recipient’s door. Service with a smile. The Obama administration says it is too much of a hardship for those on welfare to actually travel to the grocery store. What’s next? Cooking the meal for them? If only the DMV would do home deliveries for drivers licenses.

     

    The second story was about the hullabaloo over a proposal by Maine governor Paul LePage to prohibit food stamp recipients from using their food aid to purchase junk foods like sugary soft drinks and candy bars. He says that the state has an obesity problem and he will “implement reform unilaterally or cease Maine’s administration of the food stamp program altogether.” The Obama administration rejected his request and the left activists act as if the idea that a welfare recipient can’t buy a pint of Ben and Jerry’s ice cream at taxpayer expense is a violation of civil liberties.

    The welfare/entitlement state of mind has spiraled out of control in America. No one is lifting a finger of opposition. The cost of welfare is now well over $1 trillion a year. Food stamps are so ubiquitous that they have replaced dollars as the new standard currency in many inner cities in America. Even in affluent areas with upscale grocery stores, food stamp recipients fill their carts with everything from cakes to lobster.

    Liberals love welfare. It was only a few years ago that Democratic House leader Nancy Pelosi opined that putting more people on food stamps and unemployment insurance is one of the “best ways to stimulate the economy.” Which is more astonishing? That she believes this lunacy or that she would be dumb enough to say it out loud.

    We are in the seventh year of a so-called recovery, yet 45 million Americans depend on taxpayers to put food on their table. This is roughly 5 million more than when President Obama took office. Medicaid rolls have exploded by more than 10 million, too, and Mr. Obama openly boasts about how many people he’s moved into the program. Unemployment insurance beneficiaries have fallen, thankfully, but the number of Americans collecting disability has continued to climb. Wow this is some recovery.

    By the way, disability rolls are growing even as worker safety has hit an all-time high. Shouldn’t safety and automation mean fewer disabled workers? The reality, as everyone in the welfare industry knows, is that food stamps and disability are the new welfare. Neither one of them requires work in exchange for benefits.

    No one wants to admit that the ease of entry into the welfare state and the generosity of the benefits is one big reason why labor force participation has collapsed. Why work?

    Welfare expert Peter Ferrara notes that a big instigator for the welfare state expansion has been the decimation of welfare reform laws passed in 1996. “It’s infuriating that a law that worked incredibly well in lowering costs and getting the unemployed into the workforce, has been largely gutted,” he concludes.

    As a result, the Census Bureau tells us that most families that are in poverty have no one working. Poverty is still widespread in America not because wages are too low, but that fewer poor people have a job. If there are no wages earned at all, it is impossible to get out of the poverty trap.

    Welfare incentivizes non-work in many other ways. Former George W. Bush economist Larry Lindsey reports that welfare recipients generally lose at least 50 cents of every dollar benefit they gain in wage and salary from working. Sometimes the benefits fall by 70 cents per dollar earned. So a $12 an hour job returns as little as $4 an hour of extra income. Why work?

    Democrats in Congress have vociferously opposed putting even baby teeth back into work for welfare requirements. Even modest workfare requirements are denounced as anti-poor. So even a proposed federal law mandating work for food stamp recipients who are non-disabled adults without kids got shot down.

    We know that changing welfare laws can have a very positive impact on getting recipients back into the workforce and off welfare. In North Carolina when unemployment benefits were reduced and the number of weeks of benefits were limited, entry into the workforce shot up. Entry into the workforce grew by more than nearly any other state in the country. Go figure.

    In Maine, we saw a similarly remarkable result from work requirements. According to a Heritage Foundation report: “SNAP recipients in Maine totaled 201,151 in April of 2015 — a decline of more than 28,000 in just one year. The number of ABAWDs — Able-Bodied Adults Without Dependents — in Maine declined about 80 percent” to 2,530 in 2015 from 12,000 prior to the work requirement.

    This result was in line with the federal work for welfare requirements enacted in 1996. Caseloads fell by more than half and costs of aid tumbled. So why aren’t Republicans pushing workfare for all federal welfare recipients? Some are afraid that they will be viewed as hard-hearted or even cruel. But getting people off of welfare into a productive job is not just a way to reduce costs, it’s a proven way to rebuild broken lives and move people into the mainstream. There is dignity in work. There is despair in welfare. After three generations of the failed entitlement state, hasn’t welfare done enough harm to the very people it was supposed to help.

  • July U.S. Auto Sales – The Good, The Bad, & The Downright Ugly

    Ford (-3.0% vs. -0.5 est), GM (-1.9% vs. -1.0 est) and Fiat Chrysler (+0.3% vs. 1.9% est) all posted headline misses on July auto sales with a modest “beat” from Toyota (-1.4% vs -1.9% est) even though its sales were still down YoY.  Looking past the headlines, however, the data is even worseFord sales to retail customers (i.e. stripping out fleet sales where they make no money) were down 6% while Fiat Chrysler was down 2%.  GM managed to grow retail sales 5% YoY but only after increasing incentive spending 29% over the competition to 14.2% of total retail value….WINNING!  Ford and GM stocks were punished on the misses.

    According to headline data, truck sales took a big leap higher in July…but the devil is in the details.  Most of the truck gains for Ford came from cargo vans which were up 35% YoY while its F-Series pickup truck was down 1% and SUVs were down 5.3%.  GM posted higher unit sales of trucks, albeit on higher incentive spending, but mix shifted from the higher MSRP Silverado (units down 4% YoY) to the lower priced Colorado and Canyon models which were up 27.5% and 33.1%, respectively.  Chrysler reported a 2% YoY increase in Dodge Ram sales.

    Wards Data

     

    Overall, July sales were slightly positive YoY but stripping out fleet sales would paint a very different picture.

    July Auto Sales

     

    Inventory-to-sales remained near all-time highs excluding the 08/09 recession.

     

    Auto Inventory

     

    Investors punished Ford and GM stocks for their efforts.

    Ford and GM

     

    Please see below for additional thoughts on company-specific performance:

    Ford – Ford posted a big miss at -3.0% YoY vs. consensus of -0.5%.  Retail sales showed a terrible decline of 6% YoY which were offset by 6% growth in less profitable sales to rental companies and government agencies.  Overall Ford sales were certainly boosted by GM’s 42% decline in fleet sales.  The key money makers for the OEM were down across the board YoY with SUV sales off 5.6% (Explorer down 22%; Escape down 10%; Edge up 5%) and F-Series sales off 1%.  Ford said average pricing per vehicle grew $1,600 YoY primarily on mix shift.

    GM – GM also posted a big miss at -1.9% YoY vs. consensus of -1.0%.  GM estimates their market share grew 1% in July to 17.9%.  GM retail sales came in at +5% YoY and
    fleet sales down a massive -42%, which they described as “plan”.  Retail sales growth came at a substantial cost to the OEM with incentive spending for July way up to 14.2% vs. an average of 11.0% for the industry overall as GM sought to clear out old inventory.  Days of inventory on dealer lots declined MoM to 66 days from 72 days. 

    Fiat Chrysler – Fiat Chrysler posted a miss at +0.3% YoY vs. consensus of +1.9%.  That said, the headline number was driven by fleet sales with retail sales down -2% YoY and lower-margin fleet sales up +22%.  Popular Jeep lines struggled with Wrangler down -5% and Cherokee down -12% while Ram trucks increased +2% YoY.

    Toyota – “Beat” with sales of -1.4% YoY vs. consensus of -2.9%. 

    Honda – Beat with sales of +4.4% YoY vs. consensus of -0.4%. 

    Nissan – Missed sales of +1.2% YoY vs. consensus of +3.0%. 

Digest powered by RSS Digest